Kec R2022 Eie

KONGU ENGINEERING COLLEGE
(Autonomous Institution Affiliated to Anna University, Chennai)

PERUNDURAI ERODE – 638 060
TAMILNADU INDIA
REGULATIONS, CURRICULUM & SYLLABI – 2022
(CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM AND

OUTCOME BASED EDUCATION)
(For the students admitted during 2022 - 2023 and onwards)
BACHELOR OF ENGINEERING DEGREE

IN
ELECTRONICS AND INSTRUMENTATION ENGINEERING
DEPARTMENT OF ELECTRONICS AND

INSTRUMENTATION ENGINEERING
KONGU ENGINEERING COLLEGE, PERUNDURAI, ERODE – 638060
(Autonomous)
REGULATIONS 2022
CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM AND OUTCOME BASED EDUCATION
BACHELOR OF ENGINEERING (BE) / BACHELOR OF TECHNOLOGY (BTech) DEGREE

PROGRAMMES
These regulations are applicable to all candidates admitted into BE/BTech Degree programmes from the
academic year 2022 – 2023 onwards.
1. DEFINITIONS AND NOMENCLATURE
In these Regulations, unless otherwise specified:
i. “University” means ANNA UNIVERSITY, Chennai.
ii. “College” means KONGU ENGINEERING COLLEGE.
iii. “Programme” means Bachelor of Engineering (BE) / Bachelor of Technology (BTech)

Degree programme
iv. “Branch” means specialization or discipline of BE/BTech Degree programme, like Civil
Engineering, Information Technology, etc.
v. “Course” means a Theory / Theory cum Practical / Practical course that is normally
studied in a semester like Mathematics, Physics etc.
vi. “Credit” means a numerical value allocated to each course to describe the candidate’s
workload required per week.
vii. “Grade” means the letter grade assigned to each course based on the marks range
specified.
viii. “Grade point” means a numerical value (0 to 10) allocated based on the grade assigned
to each course.
ix. “Principal” means Chairman, Academic Council of the College.
x. “Controller of Examinations (COE)” means authorized person who is responsible for all
examination related activities of the College.
xi. “Head of the Department (HOD)” means Head of the Department concerned.
2. PROGRAMMES AND BRANCHES OF STUDY

The following programmes and branches of study approved by Anna University, Chennai and
All India Council for Technical Education, New Delhi are offered by the College.
Programme Branch
Civil Engineering
Mechanical Engineering
Electronics and Communication Engineering
Computer Science and Engineering
BE Electrical and Electronics Engineering
Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
Mechatronics Engineering
Automobile Engineering
Computer Science and Design
Chemical Engineering
Information Technology
BTech Food Technology
Artificial Intelligence and Data Science
Artificial Intelligence and Machine Learning
3. ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS
3.1 First Semester Admission
The candidates seeking admission to the first semester of the eight semester BE / BTech
Degree Programme:
Should have passed the Higher Secondary Examination (10 + 2) in the academic stream
with Mathematics, Physics and Chemistry as three of the four subjects of study under
Part-III subjects of the study conducted by the Government of Tamil Nadu or any
examination of any other University or authority accepted by the Anna University,
Chennai as equivalent thereto.
(OR)
Should have passed the Higher Secondary Examination of Vocational stream

(Vocational groups in Engineering / Technology) as prescribed by the Government of
Tamil Nadu.
They should also satisfy other eligibility conditions as prescribed by the Anna
University, Chennai and Directorate of Technical Education, Chennai from time to time.
3.2 Lateral Entry Admission
The candidates who hold a Diploma in Engineering / Technology awarded by the State
Board of Technical Education, Tamilnadu or its equivalent are eligible to apply for
Lateral entry admission to the third semester of BE / BTech.
(OR)
The candidates who hold a BSc degree in Science(10+2+3 stream) with mathematics as
one of the subjects at the BSc level from a recognised University are eligible to apply
for Lateral entry admission to the third semester of BE / BTech. Such candidates shall
undergo two additional Engineering course(s) in the third and fourth semesters as
prescribed by the College.
They should also satisfy other eligibility conditions prescribed by the Anna University,
Chennai and Directorate of Technical Education, Chennai from time to time.
4. STRUCTURE OF PROGRAMMES
4.1 Categorisation of Courses
The BE / BTech programme shall have a curriculum with syllabi comprising of theory,
theory cum practical, practical courses in each semester, professional skills
training/industrial training, project work, internship, etc that have been approved by the
respective Board of Studies and Academic Council of the College. All the programmes
have well defined Programme Outcomes (PO), Programme Specific Outcomes (PSO)
and Programme Educational Objectives (PEOs) as per Outcome Based Education
(OBE). The content of each course is designed based on the Course Outcomes (CO).
The courses shall be categorized as follows:
i. Humanities and Social Sciences (HS) including Management Courses, English
Communication Skills, Universal Human Values and Yoga & Values for Holistic
Development.
ii. Basic Science (BS) Courses
iii. Engineering Science (ES) Courses
iv. Professional Core (PC) Courses
v. Professional Elective (PE) Courses
vi. Open Elective (OE) Courses
vii. Employability Enhancement Courses (EC) like Project work, Professional
Skills/Industrial Training, Comprehensive Test & Viva, Entrepreneurships/Start
ups and Internship / In-plant Training in Industry or elsewhere
viii. Audit Courses (AC)
ix. Mandatory Courses (MC) like Student Induction Program and Environmental
Science.
x. Honours Degree Courses (HC)
4.2 Credit Assignment and Honours Degree

4.2.1. Credit Assignment
Each course is assigned certain number of credits as follows:
Contact period per week Credits
1 Lecture / Tutorial Period 1
2 Practical Periods 1
2 Project Work Periods 1
40 Training / Internship Periods 1
The minimum number of credits to complete the BE/BTech programme is 166.
4.2.2 Honours Degree

If a candidate earns 18 to 20 additional credits in an emerging area, then he/she can be
awarded with Honours degree mentioning that emerging area as his/her specialization.
The respective board of studies shall recommend the specializations for honours degree
and appropriate additional courses to be studied by the candidate which shall get
approval from Academic Council of the institution. A candidate shall have not less than
8.0 CGPA and no history of arrears to opt for the honours degree and has to maintain the
same during the entire programme.
Various specializations for various branches recommended by the respective boards of
studies are given below:
Specializations for Honours degree in To be offered as Honours, Only for the following
SNo
emerging areas branches mentioned against the specialization
1. Construction Technology BE – Civil Engineering
2. Smart Cities BE – Civil Engineering
3. Smart Manufacturing * BE – Mechanical Engineering
4. Computational Product Design * BE – Mechanical Engineering
5. Intelligent Autonomous Systems * BE – Mechatronics Engineering
6. E-Mobility * BE – Automobile Engineering
7. Artificial Intelligence and Machine Learning BE – Electronics and Communication Engineering
8. System on Chip Design * BE – Electronics and Communication Engineering
9. Electric Vehicles BE – Electrical and Electronics Engineering
10. Microgrid Technologies BE – Electrical and Electronics Engineering
11. Intelligent Sensors Technology * BE – Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
12. Smart Industrial Automation * BE – Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
13. Data Science BE – Computer Science and Engineering
14. Cyber Security BE – Computer Science and Engineering
15. Data Science BTech – Information Technology
16. Cyber Security BTech – Information Technology
17. Petroleum and Petrochemical Engineering * BTech – Chemical Engineering
18. Waste Technology * BTech – Chemical Engineering
19. Food Processing and Management * BTech – Food Technology
20. Virtual and Augumented Reality BE- Computer Science and Design
21. Data Science BE- Computer Science and Design
22. Internet of Things (IoT) BTech – Artificial Intelligence and Data Science
23. Blockchain BTech – Artificial Intelligence and Data Science
24. Internet of Things (IoT) BTech – Artificial Intelligence and Machine Learning
25. Blockchain BTech – Artificial Intelligence and Machine Learning
*Title by KEC
The courses specified under Honours degree in the emerging area may include theory,
theory cum practical, practical, project work, etc. under the particular specialization. A
candidate can choose and study these specified courses from fourth semester onwards
and he/she shall successfully complete the courses within the stipulated time vide
clause 5. Total number of credits earned in each semester may vary from candidate to
candidate based on the courses chosen. The registration, assessment & evaluation
pattern and classification of grades of these courses shall be the same as that of the
courses in the regular curriculum of the programme of the candidate vide clause 6,
clause 7 and clause 15 respectively. A candidate can earn Honours degree in
only one specialization during the entire duration of the programme.
4.3 Employability Enhancement Courses
A candidate shall be offered with the employability enhancement courses like project
work, internship, professional skills training/industrial training, comprehensive test &
viva, and entrepreneurships/start ups during the programme to gain/exhibit the
knowledge/skills.
4.3.1 Professional Skills Training/ Indsutrial Training/Entrepreneurships/Start
Ups/ Inplant Training
A candidate may be offered with appropriate training courses imparting
programming skills, communication skills, problem solving skills, aptitude skills
etc. It is offered in two phases as phase I in fourth semester and phase II in fifth
semester including vacation periods and each phase can carry two credits.
(OR)
A candidate may be allowed to go for training at research organizations or
industries for a required number of hours in fifth semester vacation period. Such
candidate can earn two credits for this training course in place of Professional
Skills Training course II in fifth semester. He/She shall attend Professional
Skills Training Phase I in fourth semester and can earn two credits.
(OR)
A candidate may be allowed to set up a start up and working part-time for the start
ups by applying his/her innovations and can become a student entrepreneur
during BE/BTech programme. Candidates can set up their start up from fifth
semester onwards either inside or outside of the college. Such student
entrepreneurs may earn 2 credits in place of Professional Skills Training II. The
area in which the candidate wants to initiate a start up may be interdisciplinary or
multidisciplinary. The progress of the startup shall be evaluated by a panel of
members constituted by the Principal through periodic reviews.
4.3.2 Comprehensive Test and Viva
The overall knowledge of the candidate in various courses he/she studied shall
be evaluated by (i) conducting comprehensive tests with multiple choice
questions generally with pattern similar to GATE and/or (ii) viva-voce
examination conducted by a panel of experts assigned by the Head of the
department. The members can examine the knowledge of the candidate by
asking questions from various domains and the marks will be assigned based on
their answers. This course shall carry two credits.
4.3.3 Full Time Project through Internships
The curriculum enables a candidate to go for full time project through internship
during a part of seventh semester and/or entire final semester and can earn credits
vide clause 7.6 and clause 7.11.
A candidate is permitted to go for full time projects through internship in seventh
semester with the following condition: The candidate shall complete a part of the
seventh semester courses with a total credit of about 50% of the total credits of
seventh semester including Project Work-II Phase-I in the first two months from
the commencement of the seventh semester under fast track mode. The balance
credits required to complete the seventh semester shall be earned by the candidate
through either approved One/Two Credit Courses /Online courses / Self Study
Courses or Add/Drop courses as per clause 4.4 and clause 4.5 respectively.
A candidate is permitted to go for full time projects through internship during
eighth semester. Such candidate shall earn the minimum number of credits
required to complete eighth semester other than project through either approved
One / Two Credit Courses /Online courses / Self Study Courses or Add/Drop
courses as per clause 4.4 and clause 4.5 respectively.
Assessment procedure is to be followed as specified in the guidelines approved by
the Academic Council.
4.3.4 A student shall go for in-plant training for duration of two weeks during the entire
programme. It is mandatory for all the students.
4.4 One / Two Credit Courses / Online Courses / Self Study Courses
The candidates may optionally undergo One / Two Credit Courses / Online Courses /
Self Study Courses as elective courses.
4.4.1 One / Two Credit Courses: One / Two credit courses shall be offered by the
college with the prior approval from respective Board of Studies. A candidate
can earn a maximum of six credits through one / two credit courses during the
entire duration of the programme.
4.4.2 Online Courses: Candidates may be permitted to earn credits for online courses,
offered by NPTEL / SWAYAM / a University / Other Agencies, approved by
respective Board of Studies.
4.4.3 Self Study Courses: The Department may offer an elective course as a self
study course. The syllabus of the course shall be approved by the respective
Board of Studies. However, mode of assessment for a self study course will be
the same as that used for other courses. The candidates shall study such courses
on their own under the guidance of member of the faculty following due
approval procedure. Self study course is limited to one per semester.
4.4.4 The elective courses in the final year may be exempted if a candidate earns the
required credits vide clause 4.4.1, 4.4.2 and 4.4.3 by registering the required
number of courses in advance.
4.4.5 A candidate can earn a maximum of 30 credits through all one / two credit
courses, online courses and self study courses.
4.5 Flexibility to Add or Drop Courses
4.5.1 A candidate has to earn the total number of credits specified in the curriculum of
the respective programme of study in order to be eligible to obtain the degree.
However, if the candidate wishes, then the candidate is permitted to earn more
than the total number of credits prescribed in the curriculum of the candidate’s
programme.
4.5.2 From the first to seventh semesters the candidates have the option of registering
for additional elective/Honours courses or dropping of already registered
additional elective/Honours courses within two weeks from the start of the
semester. Add / Drop is only an option given to the candidates.
4.6 Maximum number of credits the candidate can enroll in a particular semester cannot
exceed 30 credits.
4.7 The blend of different courses shall be so designed that the candidate at the end of the
programme would have been trained not only in his / her relevant professional field but
also would have developed to become a socially conscious human being.
4.8 The medium of instruction, examinations and project report shall be English.
5. DURATION OF THE PROGRAMME
5.1 A candidate is normally expected to complete the BE / BTech Degree programme in

8 consecutive semesters/4 Years (6 semesters/3 Years for lateral entry candidate), but in
any case not more than 14 semesters/7 Years (12 semesters/6 Years for lateral entry
candidate).
5.2 Each semester shall consist of a minimum of 90 working days including continuous
assessment test period. The Head of the Department shall ensure that every teacher
imparts instruction as per the number of periods specified in the syllabus for the course
being taught.
5.3 The total duration for completion of the programme reckoned from the commencement
of the first semester to which the candidate was admitted shall not exceed the maximum
duration specified in clause 5.1 irrespective of the period of break of study (vide
clause 11) or prevention (vide clause 9) in order that the candidate may be eligible for the
award of the degree (vide clause 16). Extension beyond the prescribed period shall not be
permitted.
6. COURSE REGISTRATION FOR THE EXAMINATION
6.1 Registration for the end semester examination is mandatory for courses in the current
semester as well as for the arrear courses failing which the candidate will not be
permitted to move on to the higher semester. This will not be applicable for the courses
which do not have an end semester examination.
6.2 The candidates who need to reappear for the courses which have only continuous
assessment shall enroll for the same in the subsequent semester, when offered next, and
repeat the course. In this case, the candidate shall attend the classes, satisfy the
attendance requirements (vide clause 8) and earn continuous assessment marks. This will
be considered as an attempt for the purpose of classification.
6.3 If a candidate is prevented from writing end semester examination of a course due to lack
of attendance, the candidate has to attend the classes, when offered next, and fulfill the
attendance requirements as per clause 8 and earn continuous assessment marks. If the
course, in which the candidate has a lack of attendance, is an elective, the candidate may
register for the same or any other elective course in the subsequent semesters and that
will be considered as an attempt for the purpose of classification.
6.4 A candidate shall register for the chosen courses as well as arrear courses (if any vide
clause 6.2 and 6.3) from the list of courses specified under Honours degree.
7. ASSESSMENT AND EXAMINATION PROCEDURE FOR AWARDING MARKS

7.1 The BE/BTech programmes consist of Theory Courses, Theory cum Practical courses,
Practical courses, Comprehensive Test and Viva, Project Work, Industrial Training
/Professional Skills Training, Internship/In-plant Training and Entrepreneurships/ Start
ups. Performance in each course of study shall be evaluated based on (i) Continuous
Assessments (CA) throughout the semester and (ii) End Semester Examination (ESE) at
the end of the semester except for the courses which are evaluated based on continuous
assessment only. Each course shall be evaluated for a maximum of 100 marks as shown
below:
Sl. Continuous End Semester

Category of Course Examination
No. Assessment Marks
Marks
1. Theory 40 60
2. Theory cum Practical (The distribution 50 50

of marks shall be decided based on the
credit weightage assigned to theory and
practical components.)
3. Practical 60 40
4. Professional Skills Training / 100 ---
Comprehensive Test & Viva /
Entrepreneurships / Start ups / Project
Work I / Mandatory
Course/Industrial Training/ Universal
Human Values / Yoga and Values for
Holistic Development
5. Project Work II Phase I / Project 50 50

Work II Phase II / Internships
6. One / Two credit Course The distribution of ---
marks shall be
7. All other Courses decided based on the
credit weightage
assigned
7.2 Examiners for setting end semester examination question papers for theory courses,
theory cum practical courses and practical courses and evaluating end semester
examination answer scripts, project works, internships and entrepreneurships/start ups
shall be appointed by the Controller of Examinations after obtaining approval from the
Principal.
7.3 Theory Courses
For all theory courses out of 100 marks, the continuous assessment shall be 40 marks and
the end semester examination shall be for 60 marks. However, the end semester
examinations shall be conducted for 100 marks and the marks obtained shall be reduced
to 60. The continuous assessment tests shall be conducted as per the schedule laid down
in the academic schedule. The total of the continuous assessment marks and the end
semester examination marks shall be rounded off to the nearest integer.
7.3.1 The assessment pattern for awarding continuous assessment marks shall be as
follows:
Sl. Max.
Type Remarks
No. Marks
Test - I 25
1. Average of best 2 tests
Test - II 25
(25 marks)
Test - III 25
Tutorial:
(Tutorial/Problem Solving (or) Type of assessment is to
Simulation (or) be chosen based on the
2. Simulation & Mini Project (or) 10 nature of the course and
Mini Project (or) to be approved by
Case Studies (or) Principal
Any other relevant to the course )
Others: Assignment / Paper
Presentation in Conference / To be assessed by the
3. Seminar / Comprehension / 05 Course Teacher based
Activity based learning / Class on any one type.
notes
Rounded off to the one
Total 40
decimal place
However, the assessment pattern for awarding the continuous assessment marks
may be changed based on the nature of the course and is to be approved by the
Principal.
A reassessment test or tutorial covering the respective test or tutorial portions
7.3.2
may be conducted for those candidates who were absent with valid reasons
(Sports or any other reason approved by the Principal).
7.3.3 The end semester examination for theory courses shall be for a duration of
three hours and shall be conducted between November and January during odd
semesters and between April and June during even semesters of every year.
7.4 Theory cum Practical Courses
For courses involving theory and practical components, the evaluation pattern as per the
clause 7.1 shall be followed. Depending on the nature of the course, the end semester
examination shall be conducted for theory and the practical components. The
apportionment of continuous assessment and end semester examination marks shall be
decided based on the credit weightage assigned to theory and practical components
approved by Principal.
7.5 Practical Courses
For all practical courses out of 100 marks, the continuous assessment shall be for 60
marks and the end semester examination shall be for 40 marks. Every exercise /
experiment shall be evaluated based on the candidate’s performance during the practical
class and the candidates’ records shall be maintained.
7.5.1 The assessment pattern for awarding continuous assessment marks for each
course shall be decided by the course coordinator based on rubrics of that
particular course, and shall be based on rubrics for each experiment.
7.5.2 The end semester examination shall be conducted for a maximum of 100 marks
for duration of 3 hours and reduced to 40 marks. The appointment of examiners
and the schedule shall be decided by chairman of Board of Study of the relevant
board.
7.6 Project Work II Phase I / Project Work II Phase II
7.6.1 Project work shall be assigned to a single candidate or to a group of
candidates not exceeding 4 candidates in a group. The project work is mandatory
for all the candidates.
7.6.2 The Head of the Department shall constitute review committee for project
work. There shall be two assessments by the review committee during the
semester. The candidate shall make presentation on the progress made by
him/her before the committee.
7.6.3 The continuous assessment and end semester examination marks for Project
Work II Phase I /Project Work II Phase II and the Viva-Voce Examination
shall be distributed as below.
Continuous Assessment End Semester Examination
(Max. 50 Marks) (Max. 50 Marks)
Report
Review I Review II Evaluation Viva - Voce
Zeroth Review
(Max.. 20 Marks) (Max. 30 Marks) (Max. 20 (Max. 30 Marks)
Marks)
Rv. Super Review Super Review Super Ext. Exr. Super Exr.1 Exr.2
Com visor Committee visor Committee visor visor
(excluding (excluding
supervisor supervisor)
)
0 0 10 10 15 15 20 10 10 10
7.6.4 The Project Report prepared according to approved guidelines and duly signed
by the Supervisor shall be submitted to Head of the Department. The
candidate(s) must submit the project report within the specified date as per the
academic schedule of the semester. If the project report is not submitted within
the specified date then the candidate is deemed to have failed in the Project
Work and redo it in the subsequent semester.
7.6.5 If a candidate fails to secure 50% of the continuous assessment marks in the
project work, he / she shall not be permitted to submit the report for that
particular semester and shall have to redo it in the subsequent semester and
satisfy attendance requirements.
7.6.6 The end semester examination of the project work shall be evaluated based on
the project report submitted by the candidate in the respective semester and
viva-voce examination by a committee consisting of two examiners and
supervisor of the project work.
7.6.7 If a candidate fails to secure 50 % of the end semester examination marks in the
project work, he / she shall be required to resubmit the project report within 30
days from the date of declaration of the results and a fresh viva-voce
examination shall be conducted as per clause 7.6.6.
7.6.8 A copy of the approved project report after the successful completion of
viva-voce examination shall be kept in the department library.
7.7 Project Work I / Industrial Training

The evaluation method shall be same as that of the Project Work II as per clause 7.6
excluding 7.6.3, 7.6.5, 7.6.6 and 7.6.7. The marks distribution is given below.
Continuous Assessment
(Max. 100 Marks)
Review III
(Max. 50 Marks)
Review I Review II Report
Zeroth Review
(Max.. 20 Marks) (Max.. 30 Marks) Evaluation Viva - Voce
(Max. 20 (Max. 30 Marks)
Marks)
Review Super Review Super Review Super Review Super Review
Commi visor Committee visor Committee visor Committee visor Committee
ttee (excluding (excluding
supervisor) supervisor)
0 0 10 10 15 15 20 10 20
If a candidate fails to secure 50 % of the continuous assessment marks in this course, he /

she shall be required to resubmit the project report within 30 days from the date of
declaration of the results and a fresh viva-voce examination shall be conducted.
7.8 Professional Skills Training
Phase I training shall be conducted for minimum of 80 hours in 3rd semester vacation and
during 4th semester. Phase II training shall be conducted for minimum of 80 hours in 4th
semester vacation and during 5th semester. The evaluation procedure shall be approved
by the board of the offering department and Principal.
7.9 Comprehensive Test and Viva
A candidate can earn 2 credits by successfully completing this course. The evaluation
procedures shall be approved by the Principal.
7.10 Entrepreneurships/ Start ups
A start up/business model may be started by a candidate individually or by a group of
maximum of three candidates during the programme vide clause 4.3.1. The head of the
department concerned shall assign a faculty member as a mentor for each start up.
A review committee shall be formed by the Principal for reviewing the progress of the
Start ups / Business models, innovativeness, etc. The review committee can recommend
the appropriate grades for academic performance for the candidate(s) involved in the start
ups. This course shall carry a maximum of two credits in fifth semester and shall be
evaluated through continuous assessments for a maximum of 100 marks vide clause 7.1. A
report about the start ups is to be submitted to the review committee for evaluation for each
start up and the marks will be given to Controller of Examinations after getting approval
from Principal.
7.11 In-Plant Training
Each candidate shall go for In-Plant training for a duration of minimum of two weeks
during the entire programme of study and submit a brief report about the training
undergone and a certificate issued from the organization concerned.
7.12 One / Twe Credit Courses
For all one/ two credit courses out of 100 marks, the continuous assessment shall be 50
marks and the model examination shall be for 50 marks. Minimum of two continuous
assessments tests shall be conducted during the one / two credit course duration by the
offering department concerned. Model examination shall be conducted at the end of the
course.
7.13 Online Course
The Board of Studies will provide methodology for the evaluation of the online courses.
The Board can decide whether to evaluate the online courses through continuous
assessment and end semester examination or through end semester examination only. In
case of credits earned through online mode from NPTEL / SWAYAM / a University /
Other Agencies approved by Chairman, Academic Council, the credits may be
transferred and grades shall be assigned accordingly.
7.14 Self Study Course
The member of faculty approved by the Head of the Department shall be responsible for
periodic monitoring and evaluation of the course. The course shall be evaluated through
continuous assessment and end semester examination. The evaluation methodology shall
be the same as that of a theory course.
7.15 Audit Course
A candidate may be permitted to register for specific course not listed in his/her
programme curriculum and without undergoing the rigors of getting a 'good' grade, as an
Audit course, subject to the following conditions.
The candidate can register only one Audit course in a semester starting from
second semester subject to a maximum of two courses during the entire programme of
study. Such courses shall be indicated as 'Audit' during the time of registration itself.
Only courses currently offered for credit to the candidates of other branches can be
audited.
A course appearing in the curriculum of a candidate cannot be considered as an audit
course. However, if a candidate has already met the Professional Elective and Open
Elective credit requirements as stipulated in the curriculum, then, a Professional Elective
or an Open Elective course listed in the curriculum and not taken by the candidate for
credit can be considered as an audit course.
Candidates registering for an audit course shall meet all the assessment and examination
requirements (vide clause 7.3) applicable for a credit candidate of that course. Only if
the candidate obtains a performance grade, the course will be listed in the semester Grade
Sheet and in the Consolidated Grade Sheet along with the grade SC (Successfully
Completed). Performance grade will not be shown for the audit course.
Since an audit course has no grade points assigned, it will not be counted for the purpose
of GPA and CGPA calculations.
7.16 Mandatory Courses

A candidate joined in first semester shall attend and complete a mandatory course
namely Student Induction Program of duration three weeks at the beginning of first
semester. The candidates studying in second year shall attend and complete another one
mandatory course namely Environmental Science. No credits shall be given for
mandatory courses and shall be evaluated through continuous assessment tests only vide
clause 7.1 for a maximum of 100 marks each. Upon the successful completion, these
courses will be listed in the semester grade sheet and in the consolidated grade sheet with
the grade “SC” (Successfully Completed). Since no grade points are assigned, these
courses will not be counted for the purpose of GPA and CGPA calculations.
7.17 Universal Human Values (UHV) and Yoga and Values for Holistic Development
(YVHD)
Courses YVHD shall be offered to all first year candidates of all BE/ BTech programmes
to impart knowledge on yoga and human values. Course UHV shall be offered to all the
second year BE/ BTech students. These courses shall carry a maximum of 100 marks
each and shall be evaluated through continuous assessment tests only vide clause 7.1.
The candidate(s) can earn 2 credits for UHV and 1 credit for YVHD by successfully
completing these courses. Two continuous assessment tests will be conducted and the
average marks will be taken for the calculation of grades.
8. REQUIREMENTS FOR COMPLETION OF A SEMESTER
8.1 A candidate who has fulfilled the following conditions shall be deemed to have
satisfied the requirements for completion of a semester and permitted to appear for the
examinations of that semester.
8.1.1 Ideally, every candidate is expected to attend all classes and secure 100 %
attendance. However, a candidate shall secure not less than 80 % (after
rounding off to the nearest integer) of the overall attendance taking into
account the total number of working days in a semester.
8.1.2 A candidate who could not satisfy the attendance requirements as per clause
8.1.1 due to medical reasons (hospitalization / accident / specific illness) but has
secured not less than 70 % in the current semester may be permitted to appear
for the current semester examinations with the approval of the Principal on
payment of a condonation fee as may be fixed by the authorities from time to
time. The medical certificate needs to be submitted along with the leave
application. A candidate can avail this provision only twice during the entire
duration of the degree programme.
A candidate who could not satisfy the attendance requirements as per clause
8.1.1 due to his/her entrepreneurships/ start ups activities, but has secured not
less than 60 % in the current semester can be permitted to appear for the current
semester examinations with the recommendation of review committee and
approval from the Principal.
8.1.3 In addition to clause 8.1.1 or 8.1.2, a candidate shall secure not less than 60 %
attendance in each course.
8.1.4 A candidate shall be deemed to have completed the requirements of study of
any semester only if he/she has satisfied the attendance requirements (vide
clause 8.1.1 to 8.1.3) and has registered for examination by paying the
prescribed fee.
8.1.5 Candidate’s progress is satisfactory.
8.1.6 Candidate’s conduct is satisfactory and he/she was not involved in any
indisciplined activities in the current semester.
8.2. The candidates who do not complete the semester as per clauses from 8.1.1 to 8.1.6
except 8.1.3 shall not be permitted to appear for the examinations at the end of the
semester and not be permitted to go to the next semester. They have to repeat the
incomplete semester in next academic year.
8.3 The candidates who satisfy the clause 8.1.1 or 8.1.2 but do not complete the course as
per clause 8.1.3 shall not be permitted to appear for the end semester examination of that
course alone. They have to repeat the incomplete course in the subsequent semester
when it is offered next.
9. REQUIREMENTS FOR APPEARING FOR END SEMESTER EXAMINATION
9.1 A candidate shall normally be permitted to appear for end semester examination of the
current semester if he/she has satisfied the semester completion requirements as per
clause 8, and has registered for examination in all courses of that semester. Registration
is mandatory for current semester examinations as well as for arrear examinations
failing which the candidate shall not be permitted to move on to the higher semester.
9.2 When a candidate is deputed for a National / International Sports event during End
Semester examination period, supplementary examination shall be conducted for such a
candidate on return after participating in the event within a reasonable period of time.
Such appearance shall be considered as first appearance.
9.3 A candidate who has already appeared for a course in a semester and passed the
examination is not entitled to reappear in the same course for improvement of letter
grades / marks.
10. PROVISION FOR WITHDRAWAL FROM EXAMINATIONS
10.1 A candidate may, for valid reasons, be granted permission to withdraw from appearing
for the examination in any regular course or all regular courses registered in a particular
semester. Application for withdrawal is permitted only once during the entire duration of
the degree programme.
10.2 The withdrawal application shall be valid only if the candidate is otherwise eligible to
write the examination (vide clause 9) and has applied to the Principal for permission
prior to the last examination of that semester after duly recommended by the Head of the
Department.
10.3 The withdrawal shall not be considered as an appearance for deciding the eligibility of a
candidate for First Class with Distinction/First Class.
10.4 If a candidate withdraws a course or courses from writing end semester examinations,
he/she shall register the same in the subsequent semester and write the end semester
examinations. A final semester candidate who has withdrawn shall be permitted to
appear for supplementary examination to be conducted within reasonable time as per
clause 14.
10.5 The final semester candidate who has withdrawn from appearing for project viva-voce
for genuine reasons shall be permitted to appear for supplementary viva-voce
examination within reasonable time with proper application to Controller of
Examinations and on payment of prescribed fee.
11. PROVISION FOR BREAK OF STUDY
11.1 A candidate is normally permitted to avail the authorised break of study under valid
reasons (such as accident or hospitalization due to prolonged ill health or any other valid
reasons) and to rejoin the programme in a later semester. He/She shall apply in advance
to the Principal, through the Head of the Department, stating the reasons therefore, in
any case, not later than the last date for registering for that semester examination.
A candidate is permitted to avail the authorised break of study only once during the entire
period of study for a maximum period of one year. However, in extraordinary situation
the candidate may apply for additional break of study not exceeding another one year by
paying prescribed fee for the break of study.
11.2 The candidates permitted to rejoin the programme after break of study / prevention due
to lack of attendance shall be governed by the rules and regulations in force at the time
of rejoining.
11.3 The candidates rejoining in new Regulations shall apply to the Principal in the
prescribed format through Head of the Department at the beginning of the readmitted
semester itself for prescribing additional/equivalent courses, if any, from any semester
of the regulations in-force, so as to bridge the curriculum in-force and the old
curriculum.
11.4 The total period of completion of the programme reckoned from the commencement of
the semester to which the candidate was admitted shall not exceed the maximum period
specified in clause 5 irrespective of the period of break of study in order to qualify for
the award of the degree.
11.5 If any candidate is prevented for want of required attendance, the period of prevention
shall not be considered as authorized break of study.
11.6 If a candidate has not reported to the college for a period of two consecutive semesters
without any intimation, the name of the candidate shall be deleted permanently from the
college enrollment. Such candidates are not entitled to seek readmission under any
circumstances.
12. PASSING REQUIREMENTS
12.1 A candidate who secures not less than 50 % of total marks (continuous assessment and
end semester examination put together) prescribed for the course with a minimum of
45 % of the marks prescribed for the end semester examination in all category of courses
vide clause 7.1 except for the courses which are evaluated based on continuous
assessment only shall be declared to have successfully passed the course in the
examination.
12.2 A candidate who secures not less than 50 % in continuous assessment marks prescribed
for the courses which are evaluated based on continuous assessment only shall be
declared to have successfully passed the course. If a candidate secures less than 50% in
the continuous assessment marks, he / she shall have to re-enroll for the same in the
subsequent semester and satisfy the attendance requirements.
12.3 For a candidate who does not satisfy the clause 12.1, the continuous assessment marks
secured by the candidate in the first attempt shall be retained and considered valid for
subsequent attempts. However, from the fourth attempt onwards the marks scored in the
end semester examinations alone shall be considered, in which case the candidate shall
secure minimum 50 % marks in the end semester examinations to satisfy the passing
requirements.
13. REVALUATION OF ANSWER SCRIPTS
A candidate shall apply for a photocopy of his / her semester examination answer script within a
reasonable time from the declaration of results, on payment of a prescribed fee by submitting
the proper application to the Controller of Examinations. The answer script shall be pursued and
justified jointly by a faculty member who has handled the course and the course coordinator and
recommended for revaluation. Based on the recommendation, the candidate can register for
revaluation through proper application to the Controller of Examinations. The Controller of
Examinations will arrange for revaluation and the results will be intimated to the candidate
concerned. Revaluation is permitted only for Theory courses and Theory cum Practical courses
where end semester examination is involved.
14. SUPPLEMENTARY EXAMINATION

If a candidate fails to clear all courses in the final semester after the announcement of final end
semester examination results, he/she shall be allowed to take up supplementary examinations to
be conducted within a reasonable time for the courses of final semester alone, so that he/she
gets a chance to complete the programme.
15. AWARD OF LETTER GRADES:
For all the passed candidates, the relative grading principle is applied to assign the letter grades.
Marks / Examination Status Letter Grade Grade Point

O (Outstanding) 10
A+ (Excellent) 9
Based on the relative A (Very Good) 8

grading B+ (Good) 7
B (Average) 6
C (Satisfactory) 5
Less than 50 U (Reappearance) 0
Successfully Completed SC 0
Withdrawal W -
Absent AB -
Shortage of Attendance in a SA -
course
The Grade Point Average (GPA) is calculated using the formula:

course credits  grade points  for all courses in the specific semester
GPA =
course credits  for all courses in the specific semester
The Cumulative Grade Point Average (CGPA) is calculated from first semester (third semester
for lateral entry candidates) to final semester using the formula
course credits  grade points  for all courses in all the semesters so far
CGPA=
course credits  for all courses in all the semesters so far
The GPA and CGPA are computed only for the candidates with a pass in all the courses.
The GPA and CGPA indicate the academic performance of a candidate at the end of a semester
and at the end of successive semesters respectively.
A grade sheet for each semester shall be issued containing Grade obtained in each course, GPA
and CGPA.
A duplicate copy, if required can be obtained on payment of a prescribed fee and satisfying
other procedure requirements.
Withholding of Grades: The grades of a candidate may be withheld if he/she has not cleared
his/her dues or if there is a disciplinary case pending against him/her or for any other reason.
16. ELIGIBILITY FOR THE AWARD OF DEGREE

A candidate shall be declared to be eligible for the award of the BE / BTech Degree provided
the candidate has
i. Successfully completed all the courses under the different categories, as specified in the
regulations.
ii. Successfully gained the required number of total credits as specified in the curriculum
corresponding to the candidate’s programme within the stipulated time (vide clause 5).
iii. Successfully passed any additional courses prescribed by the respective Board of Studies
whenever readmitted under regulations other than R-2022 (vide clause 11.3)
iv. No disciplinary action pending against him / her.
17. CLASSIFICATION OF THE DEGREE AWARDED
17.1 First Class with Distinction:
17.1.1. A candidate who qualifies for the award of the degree (vide clause 16) and who
satisfies the following conditions shall be declared to have passed the
examination in First class with Distinction:
 Should have passed the examination in all the courses of all the eight
semesters (six semesters for lateral entry candidates) in the First
Appearance within eight consecutive semesters (six consecutive semesters for
lateral entry candidates) excluding the authorized break of study (vide clause
11) after the commencement of his / her study.
 Withdrawal from examination (vide clause 10) shall not be considered as
an appearance.
 Should have secured a CGPA of not less than 8.50
(OR)
17.1.2 A candidate who joins from other institutions on transfer or a candidate who gets
readmitted and has to move from one regulations to another regulations and who
qualifies for the award of the degree (vide clause 16) and satisfies the following
conditions shall be declared to have passed the examination in First class with
Distinction:
Appearance within eight consecutive semesters (six consecutive semesters
for lateral entry candidates) excluding the authorized break of study (vide
clause 11) after the commencement of his / her study.
 Submission of equivalent course list approved by the respective Board
of studies.
 Withdrawal from examination (vide clause 10) shall not be considered
as an appearance.
17.2 First Class:

A candidate who qualifies for the award of the degree (vide clause 16) and who
satisfies the following conditions shall be declared to have passed the
examination in First class:
 Should have passed the examination in all the courses of all eight
semesters (six semesters for lateral entry candidates) within ten
consecutive semesters (eight consecutive semesters for lateral entry
candidates) excluding authorized break of study (vide clause 11) after
the commencement of his / her study.
 Withdrawal from the examination (vide clause 10) shall not be
considered as an appearance.
17.3 Second Class:
All other candidates (not covered in clauses 17.1 and 17.2) who qualify for the
award of the degree (vide clause 16) shall be declared to have passed the
examination in Second Class.
17.4 A candidate who is absent for end semester examination in a course / project work
after having registered for the same shall be considered to have appeared for that
examination for the purpose of classification.
17.5 Honors Degree:

A candidate who qualifies for the award of the degree (vide clause 16) and who
satisfies the following conditions shall be declared to have earned the
BE/BTech degree with Honours (vide clause 16 and clause 4.2.2):
Appearance within eight consecutive semesters (six consecutive semesters for
lateral entry candidates) excluding the authorized break of study (vide clause
11) after the commencement of his / her study.
 Withdrawal from examination (vide clause 10) shall not be considered as
an appearance.
18. MALPRACTICES IN TESTS AND EXAMINATIONS

If a candidate indulges in malpractice in any of the tests or end semester examinations, he/she
shall be liable for punitive action as per the examination rules prescribed by the college from
time to time.
19. AMENDMENTS
Notwithstanding anything contained in this manual, the Kongu Engineering College through the
Academic council of the College, reserves the right to modify/amend without notice, the
Regulations, Curricula, Syllabi, Scheme of Examinations, procedures, requirements, and rules
pertaining to its BE / BTech programme.
******
B.E. - ELECTRONICS AND INSTRUMENTATION ENGINEERING CURRICULUM – R2022
(For the students admitted in the academic year 2022-23)
SEMESTER – I
Course Hours / Week Maximum Marks Cate

Course Title Credit
Code gory
L T P CA ESE Total
Theory/Theory with Practical
22EGT11 Communication Skills - I 3 0 0 3 40 60 100 HS
Matrices and Ordinary Differential
22MAC11 3 1* 2* 4 50 50 100 BS
Equations
Physics for Electronics and
22PHT16 3 0 0 3 40 60 100 BS
Instrumentation Engineering
22EIT11 Electron Devices and Circuits 3 0 0 3 40 60 100 PC
22CSC11 Problem Solving and Programming in C 3 0 2 4 100 0 100 ES
22MET11 Engineering Drawing 2 1 0 3 40 60 100 ES
Practical / Employability Enhancement
Physics Laboratory for Electronics And
22PHL16 0 0 2 1 60 40 100 BS
22MEL11 Engineering Practices Laboratory 0 0 2 1 60 40 100 ES
Yoga and Values for Holistic
22VEC11 1 0 1 1 100 0 100 HS
Development
22MNT11 Student Induction Program -- -- -- 0 100 0 100 MC
Total Credits to be earned 23
* Alternate weeks
SEMESTER – II

Course Title Credit
Code gory
L T P CA ESE Total
22EGT21 Communication Skills - II 3 0 0 3 40 60 100 HS
Multivariable Calculus and Complex
22MAC21 3 1* 2* 4 50 50 100 BS
Analysis
Chemistry for Electronics And
22CYT25 3 0 0 3 40 60 100 BS
22EIC21 Electric Circuit Analysis 3 0 2 4 50 50 100 PC
22CSC22 Data Structures using C 3 0 2 4 50 50 100 ES
22EIT21 Electrical Machines 3 0 0 3 40 60 100 ES
Chemistry Laboratory for Electrical
22CYL11 0 0 2 1 60 40 100 BS
Systems
22EIL21 Devices and Machines Laboratory 0 0 2 1 60 40 100 ES
* Alternate weeks
SEMESTER – III

Course Title Credit
Code gory
L T P CA ESE Total
22ITC31 Java Programming 3 0 2 4 50 50 100 ES
22EIT31 Transducers Engineering 3 0 0 3 40 60 100 PC
22EIT32 Analog Integrated Circuits 3 0 0 3 40 60 100 PC
22EIT33 Digital Logic Circuits 3 1 0 4 40 60 100 PC
Electrical Measurements and
22EIT34 3 1 0 4 40 60 100 PC
Instrumentation
22MNT31 Environmental Science 2 0 0 0 100 0 100 MC
22TAM02 Tamils and Technology 1 0 0 1 100 0 100 HS
Transducers and Measurements
22EIL31 0 0 2 1 60 40 100 PC
Laboratory
Analog and Digital Integrated Circuits
22EIL32 0 0 2 1 60 40 100 PC
Laboratory
Communication Skills Development
22EGL31 0 0 2 1 60 40 100 HS
Laboratory
SEMESTER – IV

Course Title Credit
Code gory
L T P CA ESE Total
Transforms and Partial Differential
22MAT42 3 1 0 4 40 60 100 BS
Equations
22ITC41 Programming in Python 3 0 2 4 50 50 100 ES
22EIT41 Microcontroller and its Applications 3 0 0 3 40 60 100 PC
22EIT42 Control Systems 3 1 0 4 40 60 100 PC
22EIT43 Industrial Instrumentation I 3 0 0 3 40 60 100 PC
Microcontroller and Interfacing
22EIL41 0 0 2 1 60 40 100 PC
Laboratory
Instrumentation Design and Control
22EIL42 0 0 2 1 60 40 100 PC
Systems Laboratory
22GCL41 Professional Skills Training - I -- -- -- 2 100 0 100 EC
SEMESTER – V

Course Title Credit
Code gory
L T P CA ESE Total
22EIT51 Industrial Instrumentation - II 3 0 0 3 40 60 100 PC
22EIT52 Process Control 3 0 0 3 40 60 100 PC
22EIT53 Digital Signal Processing 3 1 0 4 40 60 100 PC
22EIT54 VLSI Systems 3 0 0 3 40 60 100 PC
Professional Elective - I 3 0 0 3 40 60 100 PE
Open Elective – I 3 1/0 0/2 4 40 60 100 OE
22EIL51 Industrial Instrumentation Laboratory 0 0 2 1 60 40 100 PC
22EIL52 Process Control Laboratory 0 0 2 1 60 40 100 PC
22GCL51 Professional Skills Training - II -- -- -- 2 100 0 100 EC
SEMESTER – VI

Course Title Credit
Code gory
L T P CA ESE Total
22EIT61 Industrial Automation using PLC And DCS 3 0 0 3 40 60 100 PC
22EIT62 Industry 4.0 with Industrial IoT 3 0 0 3 40 60 100 PC
Professional Elective - II 3 0 0 3 40 60 100 PE
Open Elective – II 3 1/0 0/2 4 40 60 100 OE
22EIL61 PLC and DCS Laboratory 0 0 2 1 60 40 100 PC
Virtual Instrumentation and Industrial IoT
22EIL62 0 0 2 1 60 40 100 PC
Laboratory
22EIP61 Project Work I 0 0 8 4 100 0 100 EC
22GCT31 Universal Human Values 2 0 0 2 100 0 100 HS
22GEP61 Comprehensive Test and Viva -- -- -- 2 100 0 100 EC
SEMESTER – VII

Course Title Credit
Code gory
L T P CA ESE Total
22GCT71 Engineering Economics and Management 3 0 0 3 40 60 100 HS
Professional Elective – III 3 0 0 3 40 60 100 PE
Professional Elective – IV 3 0 0 3 40 60 100 PE
Professional Elective – V 3 0 0 3 40 60 100 PE
Open Elective – III 3 0 0 3 40 60 100 OE
22EIP71 Project Work II Phase - I 0 0 10 5 50 50 100 EC
SEMESTER – VIII

Course Title Credit
Code gory
L T P CA ESE Total
Professional Elective - VI 3 0 0 3 40 60 100 PE
Open Elective – IV 3 0 0 3 40 60 100 OE
22EIP81 Project Work II Phase - II 0 0 8 4 50 50 100 EC
Total Credits: 168

LIST OF PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVES (PEs)

S. Course
Course Name L T P C Domain/ Stream
No. Code
Semester - V
Elective – I
1. 22EIE01 Biomedical Instrumentation 3 0 0 3 AI
2. 22EIE02 Embedded Systems 3 0 0 3 AE
3. 22EIE03 Instrumentation System Design 3 0 0 3 EEA
4. 22EIE04 Electronic Instrumentation 3 0 0 3 AI
5. 22EIE05 Industrial Electronics and Drives 3 0 0 3 CS
6. 22EIE06 Soft Computing Techniques 3 0 0 3 EEA
Semester - VI
Elective – II
7. 22EIE07 Analytical Instrumentation 3 0 0 3 AI
8. 22EIE08 Virtual Instrumentation 3 0 0 3 AI
9. 22EIE09 Digital Image Processing 3 0 0 3 EEA
10. 22EIE10 Power Plant Instrumentation 3 0 0 3 IA
11. 22EIE11 Wireless Instrumentation 3 0 0 3 AE
12. 22EIE12 Control System Components 3 0 0 3 CS
Semester - VII
Elective - III
13. 22EIE13 Fiber Optics and Laser Instruments 3 0 0 3 AI
14. 22EIE14 Wearable Technology 3 0 0 3 AE

Deep Neural Networks for Computational
15. 22EIE15 3 0 0 3 EEA
Imaging
Instrumentation Techniques in
16. 22EIE16 3 0 0 3 IA
Agriculture
17. 22EIE17 Instrumentation in Building Automation 3 0 0 3 IA
18. 22EIE18 Advanced Control Techniques 3 0 0 3 CS
Elective – IV
19. 22EIE19 Safety in Process Industries 3 0 0 3 AI

20. 22EIE20 MEMS and Nano Technology 3 0 0 3 AE
21. 22EIE21 Machine Learning and its Applications 3 0 0 3 EEA

Instrumentation in Aircraft Navigation and
22. 22EIE22 3 0 0 3 IA
Control
23. 22EIE23 Industrial Data Communication 3 0 0 3 AI
24. 22EIE24 Optimal and Adaptive Control 3 0 0 3 CS
25. 22EIE25 Total Quality Management 3 0 0 3 GE
Elective – V
26. 22EIE26 Multi Sensor Data Fusion 3 0 0 3 EEA
27. 22EIE27 Piping and Instrumentation Diagrams 3 0 0 3 IA
28. 22EIE28 Artificial Intelligence 3 0 0 3 EEA

Instrumentation and Control in Process
29. 22EIE29 3 0 0 3 IA
Industries
30. 22EIE30 Intelligent Robotic Systems 3 0 0 3 AI
31. 22EIE31 Model Predictive Control 3 0 0 3 CS
32. 22GEE01 Fundamentals of Research 3 0 0 3 GE
Semester - VIII
Elective - VI
33. 22EIE32 Diagnostic and Therapeutic Instruments 3 0 0 3 AI

Instrumentation and Control in Paper
34. 22EIE33 3 0 0 3 IA
Industries
Instrumentation and Control in Petro
35. 22EIE34 3 0 0 3 IA
Chemical Industries
36. 22EIE35 VHDL Programming and Its Applications 3 0 0 3 AE
37. 22EIE36 Computer Control of Processes 3 0 0 3 CS
38. 22EIE37 Digital Twins 3 0 0 3 EL

* Domain/Stream Abbreviations: IN-Instrumentation, EL-Electronics, AI-Applied Instrumentation, AE-Applied

Electronics and Industry 4.0, EEA-Experimental Engineering and Analysis, IA-Industry Automation, CS-Control
Systems, GE – General Engineering.
(For the students admitted in the academic year 2022-23 onwards)
LIST OF OPEN ELECTIVE COURSES OFFERED TO OTHER DEPARTMENTS (OEs)

S. Course
Course Name L T P C Sem
No. Code
1. 22EIO01 Measurements and Instrumentation 3 1 0 4 V
2. 22EIO02 Biomedical Instrumentation and Applications 3 1 0 4 V
3. 22EIO03 Industrial Automation 3 1 0 4 V

PLC Programming with High Level
4. 22EIO04 3 1 0 4 VI
Languages
5. 22EIO05 Virtual Instrumentation 3 1 0 4 VI
6. 22EIO06 Introduction to Distributed Control Systems 3 0 0 3 VII

Instrumentation in Aircraft Navigation and
7. 22EIO07 3 0 0 3 VII
Control
8. 22EIO08 Industry 4.0 with Industrial IoT 3 0 0 3 VII
9. 22EIO09 Industrial Data Communication 3 0 0 3 VII
10. 22EIO10 Wireless Instrumentation 3 0 0 3 VII
11. 22EIO11 Instrumentation Techniques in Agriculture 3 0 0 3 VII
12. 22EIO12 Environmental Sensors 3 0 0 3 VIII
13. 22EIO13 Pollution Control and Management 3 0 0 3 VIII

SEMESTER – I

Course Title Credit
Code gory
L T P CA ESE Total
22EGT11 Communication Skills - I 3 0 0 3 40 60 100 HS
22MAC11 Matrices and Ordinary Differential Equations 3 0 2 4 50 50 100 BS
Physics for Electronics and Instrumentation
22PHT16 3 0 0 3 40 60 100 BS
Engineering
22CSC11 Problem Solving and Programming in C 3 0 2 4 50 50 100 ES
22MET11 Engineering Drawing 2 1 0 3 40 60 100 ES
Physics Laboratory for Electronics and
22PHL16 0 0 2 1 60 40 100 BS
22GCL12 Foundation Engineering Laboratory – II 0 0 6 3 100 0 100 ES
22VEC11 Yoga and Values for Holistic Education -- -- -- 1 100 0 100 HS
22TAM01 Heritage of Tamils 1 0 0 1 100 0 100 HS
22MNT11 Student Induction Program --- --- --- 0 100 0 100 MC
SEMESTER – II

Course Title Credit
Code gory
L T P CA ESE Total
Communication Skills - II 3 0 0 3 40 60 100 HS
22MAC21 Multivariable Calculus and Complex Analysis 3 0 2 4 50 50 100 BS
Chemistry for Electronics And Instrumentation
3 0 0 3 40 60 100 BS
Engineering
Data Structures using C 3 0 2 4 50 50 100 ES
Electron Devices and Circuits 3 0 0 3 40 60 100 PC
Chemistry Laboratory for Electrical Systems 0 0 2 1 60 40 100 BS
Foundation Lab – I (3 Labs) 0 0 6 3 100 0 100 ES
Tamils and Technology 1 0 0 1 100 0 100 HS
SEMESTER – III

Course Title Credit
Code gory
L T P CA ESE Total
Networks, Signals and Systems 3 0 2 4 40 60 100 PC
Java Programming 3 0 2 4 50 50 100 ES
Digital Logic Circuits 3 1 0 4 40 60 100 PC
Transducers Engineering 3 0 0 3 40 60 100 PC
Electrical Measurements and Instrumentation 3 0 0 3 40 60 100 PC
Transducers and Measurements Laboratory 0 0 2 1 60 40 100 PC
Devices and Circuits Laboratory 0 0 2 1 60 40 100 PC
Environmental Science 2 0 0 0 100 0 100 MC
Communication Skills Development
0 0 2 1 60 40 100 HS
Laboratory
SEMESTER – IV

Course Title Credit
Code gory
L T P CA ESE Total
22MAT42 Transforms and Partial Differential Equations 3 1 0 4 50 50 100 BS
Python Programming 3 1 0 4 40 60 100 ES
Control Systems 3 0 2 4 50 50 100 PC
Analog Integrated Circuits 3 0 0 3 40 60 100 PC
Industrial Instrumentation I 3 0 0 3 40 60 100 PC
Analog and Digital Integrated Circuits Laboratory 0 0 2 1 60 40 100 PC
Industrial Instrumentation Laboratory 0 0 2 1 60 40 100 PC
Professional Skills Training I /
-- -- -- 2 100 0 100 EC
Industrial Training I
SEMESTER – V

Course Title Credit
Code gory
L T P CA ESE Total
Process Control 3 1 0 4 40 60 100 PC
Industrial Instrumentation II 3 1 0 4 40 60 100 PC
Electrical Machines 3 0 0 3 40 60 100 PC
Microcontroller and its Applications 3 0 0 3 40 60 100 PC
PE 1 3 0 0 3 40 60 100 PE
OE 1 (Advanced Java Programming/ Web 50/ 50/
3 0/1 2/0 4 100 OE
Technology – mandatory for all circuit branches) 40 60
Process Control Laboratory 0 0 2 1 60 40 100 PC
Microcontroller and Interfacing Laboratory 0 0 2 1 60 40 100 PC
Professional Skills Training II /
-- -- -- 2 100 0 100 EC
Industrial Training II
SEMESTER – VI

Course Title Credit
Code gory
L T P CA ESE Total
Industrial Automation using PLC and DCS 3 0 0 3 40 60 100 PC
Industry 4.0 with Industrial IoT 3 0 0 3 40 60 100 PC
PE 2 3 0 0 3 40 60 100 PE
OE2 3 1 0 4 40 60 100 OE
PLC and DCS Laboratory 0 0 2 1 60 40 100 PC
Virtual Instrumentation and Industrial IoT
0 0 2 1 60 40 100 PC
Laboratory
Project Work I 0 0 10 5 50 50 100 EC
Universal Human Values 2 0 0 2 100 0 100 HS
Comprehensive Test and Viva --- --- --- 2 100 0 100 EC
SEMESTER – VII

Course Title Credit
Code gory
L T P CA ESE Total
Engineering Economics and Management 3 0 0 3 40 60 100 HS
Digital Signal Processing 3 0 0 3 40 60 100 PC
PE 3 3 0 0 3 40 60 100 PE
PE 4 3 0 0 3 40 60 100 PE
OE 3 3 0 0 3 40 60 100 OE
Project Work II Phase I 0 0 12 6 50 50 100 EC
SEMESTER – VIII

Course Title Credit
Code gory
L T P CA ESE Total
PE 5 3 0 0 3 40 60 100 PE
OE 4 3 0 0 3 40 60 100 OE
Project Work II Phase II --- --- 8 4 50 50 100 EC
Total Credits: 168

22EGT11 - COMMUNICATION SKILLS I
(Common to All Engineering and Technology Branches)
Programme &
All B.E./B.Tech. Branches Sem. Category L T P Credit
Branch
Prerequisites Nil I HS 3 0 0 3
Preamble This course is designed to impart required levels of Communication Skills and Proficiency in English language
necessary for different professional contexts.
Unit – I Grammar, Vocabulary, Listening, Speaking, Reading & Writing 9
Grammar: Parts of speech - Tenses - Types of sentences: Assertive, Imperative, Interrogative & Exclamatory – Affirmative &
Negative - Gerunds & Infinitives - Vocabulary: Affixes - Synonyms & Antonyms - Listening: Types of listening - Barriers to listening
- Listening to short talks - TV shows - Speaking: Verbal & Non-verbal communication - Pair conversation - Role play - Reading:
Types of Reading – Intensive: scanning, word by word, survey - Writing: Dialogue writing, Informal Letters - Paragraph writing
Unit – II Grammar, Vocabulary, Listening, Speaking, Reading & Writing 9
Grammar: Voices - Impersonal passives - Vocabulary: Homonyms, Homophones & Homographs - Listening: Importance of
listening - Listening to announcements & radio broadcasts - Speaking: Persuasive & Impromptu talks - Narrating a story -
Reading: Reading comprehension - Articles from Newspapers/Magazines - Cloze exercises - Writing: Essay writing, Jumbled
sentences
Unit – III Grammar, Vocabulary, Listening, Speaking, Reading & Writing 9
Grammar: Prepositions - Vocabulary: Compound Nouns - Listening: Listening to TED Talks, Commentaries - Speaking: Self
Introduction - Reading: Extensive: speed, skimming - Identifying lexical & contextual meanings - Writing: Instructions & Warnings
- Formal letters: Seeking permission for Industrial visits & Inviting guests
Unit – IV Grammar, Vocabulary, Listening, Speaking, Reading & Writing 9
Grammar: Articles & Determiners - Vocabulary: Technical Vocabulary - Analogy - Unscrambling words - Logical reasoning -
Listening: Listening to conversations - Speaking: Tongue twisters - Skill Sharing - Note-taking - Reading: Note making -
Paraphrasing & Summarizing - Writing: Recommendations & Suggestions - Business letters: Enquiry, Calling for quotations &
placing orders
Unit – V Grammar, Vocabulary, Listening, Speaking, Reading & Writing 9
Grammar: Cause and effect expressions - Vocabulary: Abbreviations & acronyms, Definitions Listening: Listening to eminent
personalities - Speaking: Commonly mispronounced words - Welcome address, Chief guest address & Vote of thanks - Reading
- IELTS type passages - Writing: Preparing transcript for a speech - Interpreting news articles & advertisements
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
1. Sanjay Kumar & Pushp Lata, “Communication Skills”, 2nd Edition, Oxford University Press, New Delhi, 2018.
REFERENCES:
1. Ashraf Rizvi, "Effective Technical Communication", 2nd Edition, McGraw-Hill India, 2017.
S. P. Dhanavel, "English and Communication Skills for Students of Science and Engineering", Orient BlackSwan Publishers,
2.
Hyderabad, 2009.
Jack C. Richards and Chuck Sandy, “Passages” Student’s Book 1, 3rd Edition, Cambridge University Press, New York,
3.
2014.
COURSE OUTCOMES: BT Mapped
On completion of the course, the students will be able to (Highest Level)
CO1 use language effectively by acquiring vocabulary and syntax in context Applying (K3)
CO2 listen and comprehend different spoken discourses from a variety of situations Applying (K3)
CO3 speak confidently in different professional contexts and with peers Creating (K6)
CO4 comprehend different genres of texts by adopting various reading strategies Understanding (K2)
write legibly and flawlessly at varied professional contexts proficiently with appropriate choice
CO5 Creating (K6)
of words and structures
Mapping of COs with POs and PSOs

COs/POs PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 2 1 3 1 1
CO2 2 3 1
CO3 2 3 2
CO4 1 3 1 1
CO5 3 2
1 – Slight, 2 – Moderate, 3 – Substantial, BT- Bloom’s Taxonomy
ASSESSMENT PATTERN – THEORY

Test / Bloom’s Remembering Understanding Applying Analyzing Evaluating Creating
Total %
Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) %
CAT1 37 30 33 100
CAT2 30 30 40 100
CAT3 33 34 33
ESE 17 63 20 100
* ±3% may be varied (CAT 1,2,3 – 50 marks & ESE – 100 marks)
22MAC11 - MATRICES AND ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS
(Common to all Engineering and Technology branches)
Programme &
All BE/BTech Branches Sem. Category L T P Credit
Branch
Prerequisites Nil 1 BS 3 1* 2* 4
Preamble To provide the skills to the students for solving different real time problems by applying matrices and
ordinary differential equations.
Unit – I Matrices: 9+3
Introduction – Characteristic equation – Eigen values and Eigen vectors of a real matrix – Properties of Eigen values
and Eigen vectors (without proof) – Cayley – Hamilton theorem (Statement and applications only) - Orthogonal matrices
– Orthogonal transformation of a symmetric matrix to diagonal form – Quadratic form – Nature of Quadratic forms -
Reduction of quadratic form to canonical form by orthogonal transformation – Applications of Eigen values and Eigen
vectors: Stretching of an elastic membrane.
Unit – II Ordinary Differential Equations: 9
Introduction – Solutions of First order differential equations: Exact differential equations – Leibnitz’s Linear Equation –
Bernoulli's equation –Clairaut's equation - Applications: Law of natural growth and decay.
Unit – III Ordinary Differential Equations of Higher Order: 9
Linear differential equations of second and higher order with constant coefficients - Particular Integrals for the types: eax
– cosax / sinax – xn – eaxxn, eax sinbx and eax cosbx – xn sinax and xn cosax – Differential Equations with variable
coefficients: Euler-Cauchy’s equation – Legendre’s equation.
Unit – IV Applications of Ordinary Differential Equations: 9
Method of variation of parameters – Simultaneous first order linear equations with constant coefficients – Applications of
differential equations: Simple harmonic motion – Electric circuits (Differential equations and associated conditions need
to be given).
Unit – V Laplace Transform: 9
Laplace Transform: Conditions for existence – Transform of elementary functions – Basic properties – Derivatives and
integrals of transforms –Transforms of derivatives and integrals – Transform of unit step function – Transform of
periodic functions. Inverse Laplace transform: Inverse Laplace transform of elementary functions – Partial fraction
method – Convolution theorem (Statement only) – Applications: Solution of linear ODE of second order with constant
coefficients.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS / EXERCISES:

1. Introduction to MATLAB
2. Computation of eigen values and eigen vectors

3. Plotting and visualizing single variable functions
4. Solving first and second order ordinary differential equations

5. Solution of Simultaneous first order ODEs
6. Solving second order ODE by variation of parameters
7. Determining Laplace and inverse Laplace transform of basic functions

8. Solution of Second order ODE by employing Laplace transforms
Lecture:45, Tutorials and Practical:15, Total:60
TEXT BOOK:
Ramana B V, “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, 1st Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Limited,
1.
New Delhi, 2018.
REFERENCES/ MANUAL / SOFTWARE:
1. Kreyszig E, "Advanced Engineering Mathematics ", 10th Edition, John Wiley, New Delhi, India, 2016.
2. Kandasamy P., Thilagavathy K. and Gunavathy K., “Engineering Mathematics For First Year B.E/B.Tech”,
Reprint Edition 2014, S.Chand and Co., New Delhi.
Duraisamy C., Vengataasalam S., Arun Prakash K. and Suresh M., "Engineering Mathematics - I", 2nd Edition,
3.
Pearson India Education, New Delhi, 2018.
4. Grewal B.S., “Higher Engineering Mathematics" 44thEdition, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2018.
5. Matrices and Ordinary Differential Equations Laboratory Manual.
Applying (K3),
CO1 solve engineering problems which needs matrix computations.
Manipulation (S2)
Applying (K3),
CO2 identify the appropriate method for solving first order ordinary differential equations.
Manipulation (S2)
Applying (K3),
CO3 solve higher order linear differential equations with constant and variable coefficients.
Manipulation (S2)
apply the concept of ordinary differential equations for modeling and finding solutions Applying (K3),
CO4
to engineering problems. Manipulation (S2)
Applying (K3),
CO5 apply Laplace Transform to find solutions of Linear Ordinary Differential Equations
Manipulation (S2)

COs/POs PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 3 2 3
CO2 3 3 2 3
CO3 3 3 2 3
CO4 3 3 2 3
CO5 3 3 3 3
ASSESSMENT PATTERN - THEORY

Test / Bloom’s Remembering Understanding Applying Analyzing Evaluating Creating Total
Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) % %
CAT1 10 20 70 100
CAT2 10 20 70 100
CAT3 10 20 70 100
ESE 10 20 70 100
* ±3% may be varied (CAT 1, 2 & 3 – 50 marks & ESE – 100 marks)
*Alternate week
22PHT16 – PHYSICS FOR ELECTRONICS AND INSTRUMENTATION ENGINEEERING
Programme &
BE- Electronics & Instrumentation Engineering Sem. Category L T P Credit
Branch
Prerequisites Nil 1 BS 3 0 0 3
Preamble This course aims to impart the knowledge on oscillations and waves, acoustics, ultrasonics, quantum
physics, conductors, superconductors, semiconductors and dielectrics. It also describes the applications of
aforementioned topics in instrumentation engineering.
Unit – I Oscillations and Waves: 9
Periodic motion – Oscillations – Simple harmonic motion – Differential equation of simple harmonic motion – Forced oscillations –
Damped oscillations – Application of simple harmonic motion in torsional pendulum, cantilever and LC circuit – Resonance –
Waves – Equation of plane progressive wave – Types of progressive waves – Reflection and transmission of waves at a boundary
(qualitative) – Energy transport of progressive waves.
Unit – II Acoustics and Ultrasonics: 9
Classification of sound – Characteristics of sound – Reverberation and reverberation time – Growth and decay of sound – Sabine’s
formula for reverberation time – Determination of sound absorption coefficient – Factors affecting acoustics of buildings and the
remedies – Ultrasonics – Properties of ultrasonic waves – Generation of ultrasonic waves – Magnetostrictive generator and
Piezoelectric generator – Non-destructive testing – Flaw detection.
Unit – III Quantum physics: 9
Blackbody radiation – Planck’s theory – Compton scattering – Matter waves – Properties of matter waves – Heisenberg uncertainty
principle (qualitative) – Schrodinger’s time-independent and time-dependent wave equations – Physical significance of wave
function – Particle in a one-dimensional box.
Unit – IV Conducting and Superconducting materials: 9
Classical free electron theory of metals – Electrical conductivity – Drawbacks of classical free electron theory – Quantum free
electron theory (qualitative) – Fermi distribution function – Effect of temperature on Fermi function – Superconductivity –
Temperature dependence of resistivity – Critical field – Meissner effect – Critical current – Persistent current – Isotope effect –
Type-I superconductors and Type-II superconductors – Cryotron.
Unit – V Semiconducting and Dielectric materials: 9
Intrinsic semiconductor – Carrier concentration – Fermi level – Electrical conductivity and band gap – Extrinsic semiconductors
(qualitative) – Dielectric constant – Types of polarization mechanisms: Electronic, ionic, orientational and space-charge – Dielectric
loss – Dielectric breakdown – Applications of dielectric materials in capacitor.
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
Avadhanulu M.N., Kshirsagar P.G. and Arun Murthy T.V.S., “A Textbook of Engineering Physics”, 11 th Edition, S. Chand &
1.
Company Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2019. (Units I,II,III,IV,V)
REFERENCES:
1. Gaur R.K. and Gupta S.L., “Engineering Physics”, 8th Edition, Dhanpat Rai and Sons, New Delhi, 2009.
2. Charles Kittel, “Introduction to Solid State Physics”, 8th Edition, John Wiley & Sons, New Jersey, 2004.
3. Tamilarasan K. and Prabu K., “Materials Science”, 1st Edition, McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2019.
make use of the concepts of oscillatory and wave motion to comprehend the phenomena related
CO1 Applying (K3)
to the propagation of elastic waves.
apply the concepts of growth and decay of sound energy in a hall to compute Sabine’s formula
CO2 and to recognize the requirements of acoustically good buildings and also to describe the Applying (K3)
production of ultrasonic wave and the testing materials by non-destructive method.
use the concepts of quantum mechanics to describe the behavior of electrons in a metal by
CO3 Applying (K3)
solving Schrodinger’s wave equations.
apply the concepts of classical and quantum free electron theory of metals to compute the
electrical conductivity and to comprehend the effect of temperature on Fermi function and also to
CO4 Applying (K3)
apply the concept of Cooper pair to comprehend the properties, types and application of
superconductors.
use the concept of density of states to compute the carrier concentration, electrical conductivity,
CO5 band gap of intrinsic semiconductor. To use concepts of electric polarization to comprehend the Applying (K3)
select polarization mechanisms in dielectrics and the related phenomena.
Mapping of Cos with POs and PSOs

Cos/POs PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 2 2 2 2 2 1
CO2 3 2 2 2 2 2 1
CO3 3 2 2 2 2 2 1
CO4 3 2 2 2 2 2 1
CO5 3 2 2 2 2 2 1

Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) % %
CAT1 15 35 50 100
CAT2 15 35 50 100
CAT3 15 35 50 100
ESE 10 30 60 100
22EIT11 - ELECTRON DEVICES AND CIRCUITS
Programme &
B.E. & Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Sem. Category L T P Credit
Branch
Prerequisites Nil 1 PC 3 0 0 3
Preamble Electron Devices and circuits deals with diodes and special diodes along with its applications. It also focus on BJT
Biasing, working of FET, different types of amplifiers, feedback amplifiers and oscillators.
Unit – I Diode Applications and Special Devices: 9
Semiconductors – PN junction Diode: Volt-Ampere Characteristics, Effect of temperature on Diode Characteristics, Applications: Clippers,
Clampers and Voltage multipliers. Special Devices: Varactor diode – Tunnel diode – PIN diode - LCD – LDR - Surface Mount Devices –
OLED.
Unit – II BJT Biasing and Stabilization: 9
Characteristics of BJT – Current gains in CB, CE and CC Configuration– Load line and Operating point - Thermal runaway – Stability and
Stability Factor. Transistor Biasing: Fixed bias circuits and Voltage - divider bias – Hybrid model of CE configuration.
Unit – III FET, MOSFET and UJT: 9
Construction, Characteristics and Applications of JFET – JFET parameters – FET in CS, CD and CG configurations. MOSFET Types and
its characteristics – UJT as relaxation oscillator.
Unit – IV Differential Amplifier, Large Signal Amplifier and Tuned Amplifier: 9
Differential amplifier using BJT – Differential and common mode gain, CMRR. Power Amplifiers: Class A, Class B Amplifier and Push Pull
amplifier. Tuned amplifiers: Single Tuned Amplifier and Double Tuned Amplifier.
Unit – V Feedback Amplifiers and Oscillators: 9
Feedback amplifiers – Basic Concept of Feedback - Effects of negative feedback – Types of Negative Feedback Connections: Voltage /
current, series/shunt feedback amplifiers. Oscillators: Classification of Oscillators - Conditions for Oscillation – RC oscillators and LC
oscillators.
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
1. R.S.Sedha, “A Text Book of Applied Electronics”, Revised Second Edition, S Chand & Co Ltd, New Delhi, 2022
REFERENCES:
Salivahanan, Suresh Kumar, “Electronic Devices and Circuits”, 4 th Edition, Mc.Graw Hill Education (India) Private Limited,
1.
Bengaluru, 2017.
Robert L. Boylestad, Louis Nashelsky, “Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory”, 11 th Edition, Pearson New International Edition,
2.
New Delhi, 2015
CO1 describe the diode and special electronic devices for various applications Understanding(K2)
CO2 determine the stability factor of BJT Applying (K3)
CO3 illustrate the construction, operation and application of FET, MOSFET and UJT Understanding (K2)
CO4 explain the construction and operation of differential, tuned and power amplifiers Understanding (K2)
CO5 construct feedback and oscillator circuits using transistors Applying (K3)

CO1 3 2 2 2
CO2 3 3 1 1 1 3 3
CO3 3 2 2 2
CO4 3 2 2 2
CO5 3 3 1 1 1 3 3

Test / Bloom’s Remembering Understanding Applying Analyzing Evaluating Creating (K6) Total
Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % % %
CAT1 10 55 35 - - - 100
CAT2 10 55 35 - - - 100
ESE 10 55 35 - - - 100
* ±3% may be varied (CAT 1 & 2 – 60 marks & ESE – 100 marks)
22CSC11 - PROBLEM SOLVING AND PROGRAMMING IN C
(Common to All Engineering and Technology branches except CSE, IT, CSD, AIDS & AIML )
Programme & All BE/BTech Engineering & Technology branches ,
Sem. Category L T P Credit
Branch except CSE, IT, CSD, AIDS & AIML
Preamble The course aims to provide exposure to problem-solving through programming. It introduces all the
fundamental concepts of C Programming. This course provides adequate knowledge to solve problems using
C
Unit – I Introduction to C and Operators: 9
The structure of a C program – Compiling and executing C program – C Tokens – Character set in C – Keywords – identifiers-
Basic data Types – Variables – constants – Input / Output statements – Operators
Unit – II Control Statements and Arrays: 9
Decision-making and looping statements, Arrays: Declaring, initializing and accessing arrays – operations on arrays – Two-
dimensional arrays and their operations.
Unit – III Functions: 9
Functions: Introduction- Using functions, function declaration and definition – function call – return statement – passing parameters
to functions: basic data types and arrays – storage classes – recursive functions
Unit – IV Strings and Pointers: 9
Strings: Introduction – operations on strings: finding length, concatenation, comparing and copying – string and character
manipulation functions, Arrays of strings. Pointers : declaring pointer variables – pointer expression and arithmetic, pointers and 1D
arrays, pointers and strings
Unit – V User-defined Data Types and File Handling: 9
User-defined data types: Structure: Introduction – nested structures– arrays of structure – structure and functions -unions –
enumerated data type. File Handling : Introduction - opening and closing files – reading and writing data to files -Manipulating file
position indicator : fseek(), ftell() and rewind()
1. Programs for demonstrating the use of different types of format Specifiers
2. Programs for demonstrating the use of different types of operators like arithmetic, logical, relational, and ternary operators
3. Programs for demonstrating the use of using decision making statements
4. Programs for demonstrating the use of repetitive structures
5. Programs for demonstrating one-dimensional arrays
6. Programs for demonstrating two-dimensional arrays
7. Programs to demonstrate modular programming concepts using functions
8. Programs to demonstrate recursive functions.
9. Programs to demonstrate strings (Using built-in and user-definedfunctions)
10. Programs to illustrate the use of pointers
11. Programs to illustrate the use of structures and unions
12. Programs to implement file Handling
Lecture:45, Practical:30, Total:75
TEXT BOOK:
1. Reema Thareja, “Programming in C ”, 2nd Edition, Oxford University Press, New Delhi, 2018.
1. Yashavant Kanetkar, "Let us C", 16th Edition, BPB Publications, 2018.
2. Sumitabha Das, “Computer Fundamentals and C Programming”, 1st Edition, McGraw Hill, 2018.
3. Balagurusamy E., "Programming in ANSI C", 7th Edition, McGraw Hill Education, 2017.
Behrouz A. Forouzan & Richard F.Gilberg, “Computer Science A Structured Programming Approach Using C”, 3rd Edition,
4.
Cengage,2017.
5. https://www.cprogramming.com/tutorial/c-tutorial.html

Applying (K3),
CO1 develop simple programs using input/output statements and operators
Precision (S3)
identify the appropriate looping and control statements in C and develop applications using Applying (K3),
CO2
these statements Precision (S3)
Applying (K3),
CO3 develop simple C programs using the concepts of arrays and modular programming
Precision (S3)
Applying (K3),
CO4 apply the concepts of pointers and develop C programs using strings and pointers
Precision (S3)
Applying (K3),
CO5 make use of user-defined data types and file concepts to solve given problems
Precision (S3)
CO1 3 2 2 2 1 1 1 1
CO2 3 2 2 2 1 1 1 1
CO3 3 2 2 2 1 1 1 1
CO4 3 2 2 2 1 1 1 1
CO5 3 2 2 2 1 1 1 1

Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) % %
CAT1 10 30 60 100
CAT2 10 30 60 100
CAT3 10 30 60 100
ESE 10 30 60 100
22MET11 - ENGINEERING DRAWING
Programme & All BE/BTech Branches Sem. Category L T P Credit
Branch
Prerequisites Nil 1/2 ES 2 1 0 3
Preamble To impart knowledge on orthographic, isometric projections, sectional views and development of surfaces by
solving different application oriented problems.
Unit – I General Principles of Orthographic Projection: 6+3
Importance of Graphics in Engineering Applications - Use of Drafting Instruments - BIS Conventions and Specifications - Size, Layout
and Folding of Drawing Sheets - Lettering and Dimensioning - Projections of Points, Lines and Planes - General Principles of
Orthographic Projection - First Angle Projection - Layout of Views - Projection of Points Located in all Quadrant and Straight Lines
Located in the First Quadrant - Determination of True Lengths and True Inclinations and Location of Traces - Projection of Polygonal
Surface and Circular Lamina Inclined to both Reference Planes.
Unit – II Projections of Solid: 6+3
Projections o f Simple Solids Like Prisms, Pyramids, Cylinder and Cone w hen the Axis i s inclined t o One Reference Plane b y
Change o f Position Method.
Unit – III Sectioning of Solids: 6+3
Sectioning of Solids - Prisms, Pyramids, Cylinder and Cone in Simple Vertical Position by Cutting Planes inclined to One Reference
Plane and Perpendicular to the other - Obtaining True Shape of Section.
Unit – IV Development of Surfaces: 6+3
Development of Lateral Surfaces of Simple Solids Like Prisms, Pyramids, Cylinders and Cones - Development of Simple Truncated
Solids Involving Prisms, Pyramids, Cylinders and Cones.
Unit – V Isometric Projection and Introduction to AutoCAD: 6+3
Principles of Isometric Projection - Isometric Scale - Isometric Projections of Simple and Truncated Solids Like Prisms, Pyramids,
Cylinders and Cones - Conversion of Isometric Projection into Orthographic Projection - Introduction to AutoCAD.
Lecture: 30, Tutorial:15, Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
1. Natarajan.K.V. “A Textbook of Engineering Graphics”,35th Edition, Dhanalakshmi Publishers, Chennai, 2022,
REFERENCES:
1. Venugopal K. and Prabhu Raja V., “Engineering Graphics”, 16th Edition, New Age International Publishers, Chennai, 2022.
2. Basant Agrawal, Agrawal C.M., “Engineering Drawing”, 3 rd Edition, McGraw Hill Education, 2019.
3. Parthasarathy N.S., Vela Murali. “Engineering Drawing”, 1st Edition, Oxford University Press, 2015.
interpret international standards of drawings and sketch the projections of points, lines and
CO1 Applying (K3)
planes
CO2 draw the projections of 3D primitive objects like prisms, pyramids, cylinders and cones Applying (K3)
CO3 construct the various sectional views of solids like prisms, pyramids, cylinders and cones Applying (K3)
CO4 develop the lateral surfaces of simple and truncated solids Applying (K3)
sketch the isometric projections of simple and truncated solids and convert isometric
CO5 Applying (K3)
drawing into orthographic projection

COs/Pos PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 2 2 3 2
CO2 3 2 1 2 3 2
CO3 3 2 1 2 3 2
CO4 3 2 1 2 3 2
CO5 3 2 1 2 3 2

Total %
Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) %
CAT1 6 9 85 100
CAT2 6 9 85 100
CAT3 6 9 85 100
ESE 10 10 80 100
22PHL16 - PHYSICS LABORATORY FOR ELECTRONICS AND INSTRUMENTATION ENGINEERING
Programme &
BE- Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Sem. Category L T P Credit
Branch
Preamble This course aims to impart hands on training in the determination of parameters such as rigidity
modulus, AC frequency, velocity of ultrasonic wave, compressibility of a liquid, specific resistance,
thermal conductivity, band gap, Hall coefficient and knowledge on the working of LCR circuit, p-n diode
and UJT, and also to impart skills on writing coding / developing project / product related to societal
requirement.
Determination of the rigidity modulus of the given metallic wire using torsional pendulum / Studying the variation of
1.
current and voltage in a series LCR circuit.
2. Determination of the frequency of alternating current using electrically vibrating tuning fork (Melde’s apparatus).
Determination of the velocity of ultrasonic waves in a liquid and the compressibility of the liquid using ultrasonic
3.
interferometer.
4. Determination of the specific resistance of the given metallic wire using Carey-Foster’s bridge.
5. Determination of the thermal conductivity of a bad conductor using Lee’s disc.
6. Determination of the band gap of a given semiconducting material using post-office box.
7. Observation of the I-V characteristics of a p-n junction diode.

Observation of the I-V characteristics of a uni junction transistor / Determination of Hall coefficient of a material
8.
using Hall effect arrangement.
9. Determination of the thickness of a thin wire using air-wedge method.
10. Writing coding for any one of the above experiments / developing a project / a product.
Total:30
REFERENCES/ MANUAL /SOFTWARE:
1. Physics Laboratory Manual / Record, Department of Physics, 1st Edition, 2020.

determine the rigidity modulus of a wire using the concepts of twisting couple or to study a
Applying (K3),
CO1 series LCR circuit. To determine AC frequency and the velocity of ultrasound in a liquid
Precision (S3)
using the concept of formation of standing waves.
determine the specific resistance using the principle of Wheatstone bridge and the thermal
conductivity of a bad conductor using the concept of heat conduction through materials. To Applying (K3),
CO2
determine the band gap of semiconductor materials using the concept of variation of Precision (S3)
resistance with temperature and to obtain the I-V characteristics of a p-n junction diode.
obtain the I-V characteristics of a UJT using the concept of creation of a region with
negative resistance or to determine the Hall coefficient of a material using the concept of Applying (K3),
CO3
Hall effect. To determine and thickness of a thin film using the concept of interference and Precision (S3)
also to write coding / do project / develop product.
CO1 3 2 2 3 2 2 2 1
CO2 3 2 2 3 2 2 2 1
CO3 3 2 2 3 2 2 2 1
22MEL11 - ENGINEERING PRACTICES LABORATORY
Programme &
Branch
Prerequisites Nil 1/ 2 ES 0 0 2 1
Preamble This course is designed to provide a hands-on experience in basic of mechanical and electrical
engineering practices.
PART A – MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Prepare a Square / Rectangular / V-Shape Projection with its Counterpart for Mating and Perform the Drilling,
1.
Tapping, and Assembling Tasks from the given Square / Rectangular MS Plates using Modern Power Tools.
Prepare T / L / Lap Joint from given Wooden Work Piece and Make a Box / Tray out of Plywood using Modern
2.
Power Tools.
Perform the Thread Formation on a GI/PVC Pipe and Prepare a Water Line from the Overhead Tank that is
3.
Leak-Proof.
4. Make a Butt / Lap / Tee Joint of MS Plate using Arc Welding Process and Welding Simulator.
Activity: Prepare an Innovative Model with the Knowledge from Fitting / Carpentry / Plumbing / Welding
5.
Involving Modern Power Tools.
PART B – ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING
6. Wiring circuit for fluorescent lamp and Stair case wiring
7. Wiring Circuit of Incandescent lamp using Impulse Relay
8. Measurement of Earth Resistance
9. Soldering of Simple Circuits and trouble shooting
10. Implementation of half wave and full wave Rectifier using diodes
Total:30
1. Engineering Practices Laboratory Manual.

plan the sequence of operations for effective completion of the planned models / Creating (K6)
CO1
innovative articles Manipulation (S2)
identify and use appropriate modern power tools and complete the exercises/models Applying (K3)
CO2
accurately Manipulation (S2)
Applying (K3),
CO3 perform house wiring and realize the importance of earthing
Manipulation (S2)
Applying (K3),
CO4 soldering with simple electronics circuits
Manipulation (S2)
Applying (K3),
CO5 trouble shoot the electrical and electronic circuits
Manipulation (S2)
CO1 3 3 1 3 1 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 1 3 3 3 3
CO3 3 3 2 1 2 2 3 3 2
CO4 3 2 1 1 2 3 3 3 2
CO5 3 3 2 1 2 2 3 3 2
22VEC11 - YOGA AND VALUES FOR HOLISTIC DEVELOPMENT
Programme &
Branch
Prerequisites Nil 1/2 HS 1 0 1 1
Preamble Yoga or yogasanas are considered as art and science of healthy living by our ancient gurus. It is method to bring
harmony of body and mind for general wellbeing. Yoga is considered as one of the greatest gifts to the world by
Indians for healthy living. Students in particular are benefitted by learning yoga.
Unit – I Introduction: 2
The Origins of Yoga – Definitions - Concepts - Aims and objectives of Yoga – Yoga is a Science and Art – Rules and Regulations of
Asanas – Classifications of Yogasanas – Patanjali’s Ashtanga Yoga – Pranayama – Mudras & Bandhas - Shatkarma (Cleansing
Practice) - Streams of Yoga – Modern Trends in yoga.
Unit – II Yoga and Mind: 2
The Nature of Mind - Five Elements and the Mind - Meditation and the Mind - Functions of the Mind - Role of Yoga in Psychological
problems: Mood Disorders, Major Depressive Disorder, Cyclothymic Disorder.
Unit – III Yoga and Values, Diet: 2
Human Values – Social Values – Role of Yoga in Personality Integration - Concepts of Natural Diet - Naturopathy Diet – Eliminative
Diet – Soothing Diet – Constructive Diet.
Unit – IV Asanas: 2
Prayer - Starting & Closing - Preparatory practices – Loosening Practices – Meaning, Definitions and Objectives of Asanas -
Principles of Practicing Asanas. Asanas: Standing – Sitting – Prone – Supine – Suryanamaskar.
Unit – V Pranayama and Meditation: 2
Breathing Practices for awareness - Definitions and Objectives of Pranayama - Principles of Practicing Pranayama. Pranayama:
Nadi Shuddhi - Kapalabathi – Sitali – Sitkari – Bhranari – Ujjayi – Relaxation Techniques – Meditation.
Lecture: 10, Practical: 10, Total:20
TEXT BOOK:
1. Swami satyananda saraswathi, “Asana pranayama mudra bandha”, Bihar school of yoga, 4 th Edition, 1969.
2. Swami mukthi Bodhanandha, “Hatha yoga pradipika”, Bihar school of yoga, 4 th Edition, 1985.
REFERENCES:
1. B.K.S. Iyenkar, “Yoga the path of holistic health”, DK Limited, 2 nd Edition, 1969.
2. Selvarasu, “Kriya cleansing in yoga”, Aruvi yoga, 3 rd Edition, 2002.

CO1 realize the importance of yoga in physical health. Applying (K3)
CO2 realize the importance of yoga in mental health. Applying (K3)
CO3 realize the role of yoga in personality development and diet. Applying (K3)
CO4 do the loosening practices, Asanas and realize its benefits. Applying (K3)
CO5 do the practice of Pranayama, meditation and realize its benefits Applying (K3)

CO1 3 2 1
CO2 3 2
CO3 3 3
CO4 3 2 3
CO5 3 3

Test /
Remembering Understanding Applying Analyzing Evaluating Creating Total
Bloom’s
(K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) % %
Category*
CAT1 - - - - - - -
CAT2 - - - - - - -
CAT3 20 30 50 - - - 100
ESE - - - - - - -
* ±3% may be varied (CAT3 – 100 marks)
22TAM01 - தமிழர் மரபு
Programme &
All BE / BTech Branches Sem. Category L T P Credit
Branch
Preamble தமிழர்களின் மமொழி, இலக்கியம், ஓவியங்கள், சிற்பக்கலலகள், நொட்டுப்புறக் கலலகள்,

வரீ விலளயொட்டுக்கள், திலைக் ககொட்பொடுகள், இந்திய பண்பொட்டிற்குத் தமிழர்களின்
பங்களிப்லபப் பற்றிய அறிலவ வழங்குவகத இந்த பொடத்தின் கநொக்கமொகும்.
அலகு – I மமொழி மற்றும் இலக்கியம் 3
இந்திய மமொழிக் குடும்பங்கள் - திரொவிட மமொழிகள் - தமிழ் ஒரு மசம்மமொழி - தமிழ்
மசவ்விலக்கியங்கள் - சங்க இலக்கியத்தின் சமயச் சொர்பற்ற தன்லம - சங்க இலக்கியத்தில் பகிர்தல்
அறம் - திருக்குறளில் கமலொண்லமக் கருத்துக்கள் - தமிழ் கொப்பியங்கள், தமிழகத்தில் சமை மபௌத்த
சமயங்களின் தொக்கம் - பக்தி இலக்கியம், ஆழ்வொர்கள் மற்றும் நொயன்மொர்கள் – சிற்றிலக்கியங்கள் -
தமிழில் நவனீ இலக்கியத்தின் வளர்ச்சி - தமிழ் இலக்கிய வளர்ச்சியில் பொரதியொர் மற்றும் பொரதிதொசன்
ஆகிகயொரின் பங்களிப்பு.
அலகு – I I மரபு - பொலற ஓவியங்கள் முதல் நவன ீ ஓவியங்கள் வலர – சிற்பக் கலல 3
நடுகல் முதல் நவன ீ சிற்பங்கள் வலர - ஐம்மபொன் சிலலகள் - பழங்குடியினர் மற்றும் அவர்கள்
தயொரிக்கும் லகவிலனப் மபொருட்கள், மபொம்லமகள் - கதர் மசய்யும் கலல - சுடுமண் சிற்பங்கள் -
நொட்டுப்புறத் மதய்வங்கள் - குமரிமுலனயில் திருவள்ளுவர் சிலல - இலசக் கருவிகள் – மிருதங்கம்,
பலற, வலை, ீ யொழ், நொதஸ்வரம் - தமிழர்களின் சமூக மபொருளொதொர வொழ்வில் ககொவில்களின் பங்கு.
அலகு – I I I நொட்டுப்புறக் கலலகள் மற்றும் வரீ விலளயொட்டுக்கள் 3

மதருக்கூத்து, கரகொட்டம், வில்லுப்பொட்டு, கைியொன் கூத்து, ஒயிலொட்டம், கதொல்பொலவக் கூத்து,
சிலம்பொட்டம், வளரி, புலியொட்டம், தமிழர்களின் விலளயொட்டுகள்.
அலகு – I V தமிழர்களின் திலைக் ககொட்பொடுகள் 3

தமிழகத்தின் தொவரங்களும், விலங்குகளும் - மதொல்கொப்பியம் மற்றும் சங்க இலக்கியத்தில் அகம் மற்றும்
புறக் ககொட்பொடுகள் - தமிழர்கள் கபொற்றிய அறக்ககொட்பொடு- சங்க கொலத்தில் தமிழகத்தில் எழுத்தறிவும்
கல்வியும் - சங்ககொல நகரங்களும் துலற முகங்களும் - சங்ககொலத்தில் ஏற்றுமதி மற்றும் இறக்குமதி -
கடல்கடந்த நொடுகளில் கசொழர்களின் மவற்றி.
அலகு – V இந்திய கதசிய இயக்கம் மற்றும் இந்திய பண்பொட்டிற்குத் தமிழர்களின் 3

பங்களிப்பு
இந்திய விடுதலலப்கபொரில் தமிழர்களின் பங்கு - இந்தியொவின் பிறபகுதிகளில் தமிழ் பண்பொட்டின்
தொக்கம் - சுயமரியொலத இயக்கம் - இந்திய மருத்துவத்தில் சித்த மருத்துவத்தின் பங்கு – கல்மவட்டுகள்,
லகமயழுத்துப்படிகள் - தமிழ்ப் புத்தகங்களின் அச்சு வரலொறு.
Total: 15
TEXT BOOK:
1. ஆ. பூபொலன், தமிழர் மரபு, VRB Publishers Pvt Ltd, 2022.
REFERENCES:
தமிழக வரலொறு- மக்களும் பண்பொடும்- கக கக பிள்லள (மவளியீடு தமிழ்நொடு பொடநூல் மற்றும்
1.
கல்வியியல் பைிகள் கழகம்)
2. கைினித்தமிழ் - முலனவர் இல. சுந்தரம் (விகடன் பிரசுரம்)
3. கீ ழடி - லவலக நதிக்கலரயில் சங்ககொல நகர நொகரிகம்.( மதொல்லியல் துலற மவளியீடு)
4. மபொருலந - ஆற்றங்கலர நொகரிகம் ( மதொல்லியல் துலற மவளியீடு)

படிப்லப முடித்தவுடன், மொைவர்கள் (Highest Level)
தமிழ் மமொழி மற்றும் இலக்கியத்தில் மதிப்புமிக்க கருத்துக்கலள விளக்க
CO1 Understanding (K2)
முடியும்.
CO2 தமிழர்களின் சிற்பம் மற்றும் அவர்களின் ஓவியங்கள் பற்றி விளக்க முடியும். Understanding (K2)
தமிழர்களின் நொட்டுப்புற மற்றும் தற்கொப்புக் கலலகலளப் பற்றி சுருக்கமொகக்
கூற முடியும்.
CO4 தமிழர்களின் திலைக் ககொட்பொடுகலளப் பற்றி விளக்க முடியும். Understanding (K2)
இந்திய கதசிய இயக்கம் மற்றும் இந்திய பண்பொட்டிற்குத் தமிழர்களின்
பங்களிப்பு பற்றி விளக்க முடியும்.

CO1 3 3 2 2 3
CO2 3 3 2 2 3
CO3 3 3 2 2 3
CO4 3 3 2 2 3
CO5 3 3 2 2 3

Total %
Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) %
CAT1 40 60 100
CAT2 40 60 100
CAT3 40 60 100
ESE NA
* ±3% may be varied (CAT 1, 2 & 3 – 50 marks)
22TAM01 - HERITAGE OF TAMILS
Programme &
All BE / BTech Branches Sem. Category L T P Credit
Branch
Preamble The objective of this course is to impart knowledge about Tamil language, literature, paintings, sculptures, folk
arts, heroic games, doctrines, contribution of Tamils to Indian culture.
UNIT I Language and Literature 3
Language families in india - dravidian languages – tamil as a classical language - classical literature in tamil – secular nature of
sangam literature – distributive justice in sangam literature - management principles in thirukural - tamil epics and impact of
buddhism & jainism in tamil land - bakthi literature azhwars and nayanmars - forms of minor poetry - development of modern
literature in tamil - contribution of bharathiyar and bharathidhasan.
UNIT II Heritage - Rock Art Paintings to Modern Art – Sculpture 3
Hero stone to modern sculpture - bronze icons - tribes and their handicrafts - art of temple car making - - massive terracotta
sculptures, village deities, thiruvalluvar statue at kanyakumari, making of musical instruments - mridhangam, parai, veenai, yazh
and nadhaswaram - role of temples in social and economic life of tamils.
UNIT III Folk and Martial Arts 3
Therukoothu – karagattam - villu pattu - kaniyan koothu – oyillattam - leather puppetry – silambattam – valari - tiger dance - sports
and games of tamils.
UNIT IV Thinai Concept of Tamils 3
Flora and fauna of tamils & aham and puram concept from tholkappiyam and sangam literature - aram concept of tamils -
education and literacy during sangam age - ancient cities and ports of sangam age - export and import during sangam age -
overseas conquest of cholas.
UNIT V Contribution of Tamils to Indian National Movement and Indian Culture 3
Contribution of tamils to indian freedom struggle - the cultural influence of tamils over the other parts of india – self-respect
movement - role of siddha medicine in indigenous systems of medicine – inscriptions & manuscripts – print history of tamil books.
Total: 15
TEXT BOOK:
1. S.Muthuramalingam, M.Saravanakumar, Heritage of Tamils, Yes Dee Publishing Pvt Ltd, 2023.
REFERENCES:
Historical Heritage of the Tamils (Dr.S.V.Subatamanian, Dr.K.D. Thirunavukarasu) (Published by : International Institute of
1.
Tamil Studies).
The Contribution of Tamil of the Tamils to Indian Culture(Dr.M.Valarmathi)(Puplished by International Institute of Tamil
2.
Studies).
Keeladi – ‘Sangam City C ivilzation on the banks of river Vaigai; (Jointly Published by: Department of Archaeology &
3.
Tamilnadu Text Book and Educational Services Corporation, Tamilnadu).
CO1 explain valuable concepts in language and literature of tamils. Understanding (K2)
CO2 illustrate about the tamils sculpture and their paintings. Understanding (K2)
CO3 summarize about the tamils folk and martial arts. Understanding (K2)
CO4 explain the thinai concept of tamils. Understanding (K2)
CO5 explain the contribution of Tamils to the Indian National Movement and Indian culture. Understanding (K2)

CO1 3 3 2 2 3
CO2 3 3 2 2 3
CO3 3 3 2 2 3
CO4 3 3 2 2 3
CO5 3 3 2 2 3

Total %
Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) %
CAT1 40 60 100
CAT2 40 60 100
CAT3 40 60 100
ESE NA
* ±3% may be varied (CAT 1, 2 & 3 – 50 marks)
22TAM02 - தமிழரும் மதொழில்நுட்பமும்
Programme &
Branch
முன்னுலர தமிழ் கலொச்சொரத்கதொடு ஒன்றிய மதொழில் நுட்பங்கலள பற்றிப் எடுத்துலரத்தல்
அலகு – I மநசவு மற்றும் பொலன மதொழில்நுட்பம் 3

சங்க கொலத்தில் மநசவு மதொழில் – பொலனத் மதொழில்நுட்பம் கருப்பு சிவப்பு பொண்டங்கள் – பொண்டகளில்
கீ றல் குறியீடுகள்
அலகு – I I வடிவலமப்பு மற்றும் கட்டிடத் மதொழில்நுட்பம் 3

சங்க கொலத்தில் வடிவலமப்பு மற்றும் கட்டுமொனங்கள் & சங்க கொலத்தில் வட்டுப்மபொருட்களில்
ீ
வடிவலமப்பு – சங்க கொலத்தில் கட்டுமொன மபொருட்களும் நடுகல்லும் – சிலப்பதிகொரத்தில் கமலட
அலமப்பு பற்றிய விவரங்கள் – மொமல்லபுரச்சிற்பங்களும், ககொவில்களும் – கசொழர் கொலத்து
மபருங்ககொயில்கள் மற்றும் பிற வழிபொட்டுத் தலங்கள் – நொயக்கர் கொலக் ககொயில்கள் –
மொதிரிகட்டலமப்புகள் பற்றி அறிதல், மதுலர மீ னொட்சி அம்மன் ஆலயம் மற்றும் திருமலல நொயக்கர்
மஹொல் – மசட்டிநொட்டு வடுகள்
ீ – பிரிட்டிஷ் கொலத்தில் மசன்லன இந்கதொ-சொகரொமசனிக் கட்டிடக் கலல.
அலகு – I I I உற்பத்தித் மதொழில்நுட்பம் 3
கப்பல் கட்டும் கலல – உகலொகவியல் – இரும்புத் மதொழிற்சொலல – இரும்லப உருக்குதல், எஃகு –
வரலொற்றுச்சொன்றுகளொக மசம்பு மற்றும் தங்க நொையங்கள் – நொையங்கள் அச்சடித்தல் – மைி
உருவொக்கும் மதொழிற்சொலலகள் – கல்மைிகள் – கண்ைொடி மைிகள் – சுடுமண் மைிகள் – சங்கு
மைிகள் – எலும்புத்துண்டுகள் – மதொல்லியல் சொன்றுகள் – சிலப்பதிகொரத்தில் மைிகளின் வலககள்.
அலகு – I V கவளொண்லம மற்றும் நீர்ப்பொசனத் மதொழில்நுட்பம் 3
அலை, ஏரி, குளங்கள், மதகு – கசொழர்கொல குமிழித் தூம்பின் முக்கியத்துவம் – கொல்நலட பரொமரிப்பு –
கொல்நலடகளுக்கொக வடிவலமக்கப்பட்ட கிைறுகள் – கவளொண்லம மற்றும் கவளொண்லம சொர்ந்த
மசயல்பொடுகள் – கடல்சொர் அறிவு – மீ ன்வளம் – முத்து மற்றும் முத்துக்குளித்தல் – மபருங்கடல் குறித்த
பண்லடய அறிவு – அறிவுசொர் சமூகம்.
அலகு – V அறிவியல் தமிழ் மற்றும் கைினித்தமிழ் 3
அறிவியல் தமிழின் வளர்ச்சி – கைினிதத்தமிழ் வளர்ச்சி – தமிழ் நூல்கலள மின்பதிப்பு மசய்தல் – தமிழ்
மமன்மபொருட்கள் உருவொக்கம் – தமிழ் இலையக் கல்விக்கழகம் – தமிழ் மின் நூலகம் – இலையத்தில்
தமிழ் அகரொதிகள் மசொற்குலவத் திட்டம்.
Total:15
TEXT BOOK:
தமிழக வரலொறு - மக்களும் பண்பொடும் - கக கக பிள்லள (மவளியீடு தமிழ்நொடு பொடநூல் மற்றும்

1.
கல்வியில் பைிகள் கழகம்), உலகத் தமிழொரொய்ச்சி நிறுவனம், மசன்லன, 2002
2. கைினித்தமிழ் முலனவர் இல. சுந்தரம், விகடன் பிரசுரம், 2016
REFERENCES:
1. கீ ழடி-லவலக நதிக்கலரயில் சங்ககொல நகர நொகரிகம்.(மதொல்லியல் துலற மவளியீடு)
2. மபொருலந-ஆற்றங்கலர நொகரிகம் (மதொல்லியல் துலற மவளியீடு)
3. Social Life of Tamils (Dr.K.K.Pillay) A joint Publication of TNTB & ESC and RMRL – (in print)
4. Social Life of the Tamils – The Classical Period (Dr.S.Sigaravelu) (Published by: International Institute of Tamil Studies).
5.
Tamil Studies)
6. The Contribution of the Tamil to Indian Culture (Dr.M.Valarmathi) (Puplished by International Institute of Tamil Studies).
Keeladi – ‘Sangam City Civilzation on the banks of river Vaigai; (Jointly Published by: Department of Archaeology &
7.
Tamilnadu Text Book and Educational Services Corporation, Tamilnadu)
8. Studies in the History of India with Special Reference to Tamilnadu (Dr.K.K.Pillay) (Published by: The Author)
Porunai Civilization (Jointly Published by: Department of Archaeology & Tamilnadu Textbook and Educational Services
9.
Corporation, Tamilnadu)
10. Journey of Civilization Indus to Vaigai (R.Balakrishnan) (Published by: RMRL) – Reference Book.
படிப்பப முடித்தவுடன், மாணவர்கள் (Highest Level)
தமிழ் கலொச்சொரம் மற்றும் தமிழ் சமூகத்தினுலடய மநசவு மற்றும் பொலன
மதொழில்நுட்பம் பற்றி விளக்க முடியும்.
தமிழர்களின் வடிவலமப்பு மற்றும் கட்டிடத் மதொழில்நுட்ப ஆற்றல் பற்றி விளக்க
முடியும்.
CO3 தமிழர்களின் உற்பத்தித் மதொழில்நுட்பம் பற்றி சுருக்கமாகக் கூற முடியும். Understanding (K2)
CO4 தமிழர்களின் கவளொண்லம மற்றும் நீர்ப்பொசனத் மதொழில்நுட்பம் பற்றி விளக்க முடியும். Understanding (K2)
CO5 தமிழர்களின் அறிவியல் தமிழ் மற்றும் கைினித்தமிழ் பற்றி விளக்க முடியும். Understanding (K2)

CO1 3 3 2 2 3
CO2 3 3 2 2 3
CO3 3 3 2 2 3
CO4 3 3 2 2 3
CO5 3 3 2 2 3

Remembering Understanding Applying Analyzing Evaluating Creating
Test / Bloom’s Category* Total %
(K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) %
CAT1 40 60 100
CAT2 40 60 100
CAT3 40 60 100
ESE NA
* ±3% may be varied (CAT 1,2,3 – 50 marks)
22TAM02 - TAMILS AND TECHNOLOGY
Programme &
Branch
Preamble This course aims to impart the essential knowledge on the tamil culture and related technology
UNIT – I WEAVING AND CERAMIC TECHNOLOGY 3
Weaving Industry during Sangam Age – Ceramic technology – Black and Red Ware Potteries (BRW) – Graffiti on Potteries.
UNIT – II DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION TECHNOLOGY 3
Designing and Structural construction House & Designs in household materials during Sangam Age – Building materials and Hero
stones of Sangam age – Details of Stage Constructions in Silappathikaram – Sculptures and Temples of Mamallapuram – Great
Temples of Cholas and other worship places – Temples of Nayaka Period – Type study (Madurai Meenakshi Temple) – Thirumalai
Nayakar Mahal – Chetti Nadu Houses, Indo – Saracenic architecture at Madras during British Period.
UNIT – III MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGY 3
Art of Ship Building – Metallurgical studies – Iron industry – Iron smelting, steel – Copper and gold – Coins as source of history –
Minting of Coins – Beads making – industries Stone beads – Glass beads –Terracotta beads –Shell beads/ bone beats – Archeological
evidences – Gem stone types described in Silappathikaram.
UNIT – IV AGRICULTURE AND IRRIGATION TECHNOLOGY 3
Dam, Tank, ponds, Sluice, Significance of Kumizhi Thoompu of Chola Period, Animal Husbandry – Wells designed for cattle use –
Agriculture and Agro Processing – Knowledge of Sea – Fisheries – Pearl – Conche diving – Ancient Knowledge of Ocean – Knowledge
Specific Society.
UNIT – V SCIENTIFIC TAMIL & TAMIL COMPUTING 3
Development of Scientific Tamil – Tamil computing – Digitalization of Tamil Books – Development of Tamil Software – Tamil Virtual
Academy – Tamil Digital Library – Online Tamil Dictionaries – Sorkuvai Project.
Total:15
TEXT BOOK:
REFERENCES:
தமிழக வரலாறு - மக்களும் பண்பாடும் - கக கக பிள் ளள (வவளியீடு தமிழ் நாடு பாடநூல் மற் றும் கல் வியில்
1.
பணிகள் கழகம் ), உலகத் தமிழாராய் ச்சி நிறுவனம் , வசன்ளன, 2002
2. கணினித்தமிழ் முளனவர் இல. சுந்தரம் , விகடன் பிரசுரம் , 2016
3. கீழடி ளவளக நதிக்களரயில் சங் ககால நகர நாகரிகம் .(வதால் லியல் துளற வவளியீடு)
4. வபாருளந ஆற் றங் களர நாகரிகம் (வதால் லியல் துளற வவளியீடு

Historical Heritage of the Tamils (Dr.S.V.Subatamanian, Dr.K.D. Thirunavukarasu) (Published by : International Institute of Tamil
5.
Studies)
6. The Contribution of the Tamils to Indian Culture (Dr.M.Valarmathi)(Puplished by International Institute of Tamil Studies).
Keeladi – ‘Sangam City Civilzation on the banks of river Vaigai; (Jointly Published by: Department of Archaeology & Tamilnadu
7.
Text Book and Educational Services Corporation, Tamilnadu)
8. Studies in the History of India with Special Reference to Tamilnadu (dr.K.K.Pillay) (Published by : The Author)
9.
CO1 explain weaving and ceramic technology in tamil culture and tamil society. Understanding (K2)
CO2 Illustrate about the design and construction technology. Understanding (K2)
CO3 summarize about the manufacturing technology. Understanding (K2)
CO4 explain the agriculture and irrigation technology. Understanding (K2)
CO5 explain the significance of tamil in scientific and computing. Understanding (K2)

CO1 3 3 2 2 3
CO2 3 3 2 2 3
CO3 3 3 2 2 3
CO4 3 3 2 2 3
CO5 3 3 2 2 3

Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) % %
CAT1 40 60 100
CAT2 40 60 100
CAT3 40 60 100
ESE NA
22GCL11 – FOUNDATION ENGINEERING LABORATORY I
(Common to All BE/BTech branches)
Programme&
All BE/BTech branches Sem. Category L T P Credit
Branch
Prerequisites Nil 1/2 ES 0 0 6 3
This course is designed to provide foundational knowledge on engineering with hands-on experience
Preamble on developing a prototype model with the basic knowledge of Computer-aided Design, Manufacturing
Processes, 3D Printing Technology, Robotics and Embedded Control.
PART A – Manufacturing (30 Hours)
1. Selection of product, free hand sketching and detailing
2. Construction of model using Arc/TIG/MIG/Gas/Spot welding operations
3. Enhancing the model with sheet metal
4. Creating the parts of the model using lathe
5. Creating the parts of the model using milling and drilling machines
PART B – Product Design and Development (30 Hours)
1. Free hand sketching and detailing of the component
2. 3D part modelling of the component using CAD software
3. Engineering Analysis of the component model
4. Generate the component using 3D printer

Value addition to the produced component using CNC milling machine, CNC laser cutting machine and CNC
5.
router
PART C – Robotics (30 Hours)
1. Design of electronic circuit and its debugging
2. Interfacing of sensors, actuators and wireless communion modules with microcontroller
3. Assembly of Tracker Robot with accessories
4. Development of control strategies for motion control, path planning and obstacle avoidance
5. Demonstration and testing of Robot in static environment

Total:90
1. Laboratory Manual
2. AutoCAD 2020 and SOLID WORKS 2018 Software
develop the prototype model using mechanical operations like welding, forming and Applying (K3),
CO1
machining processes Precision (S3)
sketch 3D model and enhance the prototype using modern machines like 3D printer, CNC Applying (K3),
CO2
milling machine, CNC Laser cutter and CNC Router Precision (S3)
Applying (K3),
CO3 design and develop the autonomous robot for real-time applications
Precision (S3)

CO1 3 3 3 2 3 2 2
CO2 3 3 3 3 3 2 2
CO3 3 3 3 2 3 2 2
22GCL12 – FOUNDATION ENGINEERING LABORATORY II
(Common to all BE/BTech branches)
Programme&
Branch
Prerequisites Nil 1 /2 ES 0 0 6 3
Preamble This course is designed to provide a foundational knowledge on engineering with hands-on experience
on the house wiring, Internet of Things and Web Technologies.
PART A – Electrical Installation (30 Hours)
1. Develop wiring diagrams using software tools.
2. Identify and select suitable components for Energy Measurement and Circuit Protection
3. Design a wiring circuit integrating Energy Meter, MCB and RCCB
4. Develop a wiring circuit for incandescent lamp and fluorescent lamp
5. Develop and Investigate Simple and Staircase Wiring for Residential Applications
6. Design the Wiring Circuits for Calling Bell System and Dimmable Light
7. Create wiring circuits for power loads
8. Measurement of Earth Resistance and its connections.
PART B – Internet of Things (30 Hours)
1. Design a Single layer PCB layout designing
2. Fabricate Single layer PCB printing
3. Assembling, soldering and desoldering practice on single layer PCB
4. GPIO programming in ESP8266
5. Sensor and actuator interfacing with internet enabled microcontroller device
6. Sensor and actuator calibration
7. Integration of microcontroller based system with Cloud platform
PART C – Web Technologies (30 Hours)
1. Design a website for an application using HTML and CSS.
2. Convert the designed website into responsive website using Bootstrap.
3. Add dynamism to the website by using JavaScript and embed the Social Media components to the website.
4. Incorporate database interaction to the website.
5. Deploy the developed website in the server.
Total:90
Eric T.Freeman,Elisabeth Robson, ”Head First JavaScript Programming A Brain-Friendly Guide”, 1st Edition,
2.
O’Reilly , 2014.
3. Eric T.Freeman,Elisabeth Robson, ”Head First HTML and CSS”,2nd Edition, O’Reilly , 2012
4. Lynn Beighley,”Head First SQL”,1st Editin, O’Reilly,2007.

Applying(K3),
CO1 design electrical wiring circuits for buildings based on their requirement
Precision (S3)
Applying (K3),
CO2 develop IoT based solutions and PCB for real world use cases.
Precision (S3)
Applying(K3),
CO3 design and host an interactive dynamic website.
Precision (S3)

CO1 3 2 2 1 1
CO2 3 2 2 1 1
CO3 3 2 2 1 1
22EGT21 - COMMUNICATION SKILLS II
Programme &
Branch
Prerequisites Communication Skills I 2 HS 3 0 0 3
Preamble This course is designed to equip students with the necessary skills to listen, read, write and speak so as to
develop their linguistic and communicative competencies.
Unit – I Grammar, Vocabulary, Listening, Speaking, Reading & Writing 9
Grammar: Sentence Patterns - Simple, Compound & Complex sentences - Vocabulary: Portmanteau words - One word
substitution - Listening: Speeches from company CEOs - TV debates Speaking: Just-a-minute talk - Group discussion -
Reading: Reading for Gist - Writing: Job application letter with resume – Transcoding
Unit – II Grammar, Vocabulary, Listening, Speaking, Reading & Writing 9
Grammar: Concord - Vocabulary: Phrasal verbs - Idioms & Phrases - Listening: Listening to celebrity talks - Speaking:
Talking about celebrities - Practicing Pronunciation through web tools - Reading: Company correspondence, technical
texts/working principles of a machine - Writing: Description: Person, Place, Process, Product and Picture
Unit – III Grammar, Vocabulary, Listening, Speaking, Reading & Writing 9
Grammar: Discourse markers - Transitional words and phrases - Vocabulary: Commonly confused words - Listening:
Listening to guest lectures - Speaking: Technical & Non-technical presentations - Workshop presentations - Reading: Reputed
company profiles, Business Plans - Writing: a dream job/company - Letter to the Editor – Biography & Autobiography - Checklist
Unit – IV Grammar, Vocabulary, Listening, Speaking, Reading & Writing 9
Grammar: Degrees of Comparison - Punctuations – Fragments & run-ons - Vocabulary: British & American - Spelling & words -
Listening: Listening to global accents - listening to motivational speeches - Speaking: Narrating personal milestones - Sports
commentaries - Movie Enactment - Reading: Narrative passages - Writing: E mail - Agenda & Minutes of Meeting - Special &
Technical reports
Unit – V Grammar, Vocabulary, Listening, Speaking, Reading & Writing 9
Grammar: Purpose and Function - If clause - Error detection - Vocabulary: Coding & Decoding - Alphabet test - Listening:
Listening to sample HR Interviews - Speaking: Introduction to phonetics - Stress, rhythm & Intonation – Guided & unguided
speeches/conversations - Giving feedback – Debate - Reading: Key Note speeches - Newspaper reports - short technical texts
from journals Writing: Circulars - Critical Appreciation of a non-detailed text - Technical proposals
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
1. Sanjay Kumar & Pushp Lata, “Communication Skills”, 2nd Edition, Oxford University Press, New Delhi, 2018.
REFERENCES:
Meenakshi Raman and Sangeeta Sharma. “Technical Communication- Principles and Practice”. 4th Edition, Oxford
1.
University Press, New Delhi, 2022.
2. Murphy Raymond, "English Grammar in Use", 5th Edition, Cambridge University Press, New York, 2019.
Jack C. Richards and Chuck Sandy, “Passages” Student’s Book 2, 3 rd Edition, Cambridge University Press, New York,
3.
2014.
CO1 use functional grammar for improving communication skills Applying (K3)
CO2 listen and comprehend different accents and infer implied meanings Applying (K3)
speak clearly, initiate and sustain a discussion and negotiate using appropriate
CO3 Creating (K6)
communicative strategies
read different genres of texts, infer implied meanings and critically analyze and
evaluate them
produce different types of narrative, descriptive expository texts and understand
CO5 Creating (K6)
creative, critical, analytical and evaluative writing

CO1 2 1 3 1 1
CO2 2 3 1
CO3 2 3 2
CO4 1 3 1 1
CO5 3 2

Total %
Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) %
CAT1 37 30 33 100
CAT2 7 50 43 100
CAT3 17 50 33 100
ESE 15 45 40 100
22MAC21 - MULTIVARIABLE CALCULUS AND COMPLEX ANALYSIS
(Common to CIVIL, MECH, MTS, ECE, EEE, EIE & FT branches)
Programme &
B.E & Civil, Mech, MTS, ECE, EEE, EIE & FT branches Sem. Category L T P Credit
Branch
Prerequisites Nil 2 BS 3 1* 2* 4
Preamble To impart the knowledge of partial derivatives, evaluation of real and complex integrals, vector
calculus and analytic functions to the students for solving the problems related to various engineering
disciplines.
Unit – I Functions of Several Variables: 9
Functions of two or more variables – Partial derivatives – Total differential – Taylor’s series for functions of two variables
– Applications: Maxima and minima – Constrained maxima and minima – Lagrange’s multiplier method.
Unit – II Multiple Integrals: 9
Double integration in cartesian coordinates – Change of order of integration – Application: Area between two curves –
Triple integration in cartesian coordinates – Volume as triple integrals.
Unit – III Vector Calculus: 9
Directional derivative – Gradient of a scalar point function – Divergence of a vector point function – Curl of a vector –
Solenoidal and Irrotational vectors – Vector Integration: Introduction – Green’s, Stoke’s and Gauss divergence theorems
(without proof) – Verification of the above theorems and evaluation of integrals using them.
Unit – IV Analytic Functions: 9
Functions of a complex variable – Analytic functions – Necessary and sufficient conditions (excluding proof) – Cauchy–
Riemann equations (Statement only) – Properties of analytic function (Statement only) – Harmonic function –
Construction of analytic function – Applications: Fluid flow – Conformal mapping: w = z + a, az, 1/z – Bilinear
transformation.
Unit – V Complex Integration: 9
Introduction – Cauchy’s theorem (without proof) – Cauchy’s integral formula – Taylor’s and Laurent series – Singularities
– Classification – Cauchy’s residue theorem (without proof) – Applications: Evaluation of definite integrals involving sine
and cosine functions over the circular contour.

1. Finding ordinary and partial derivatives
2. Computing extreme values of function of two variables
3. Evaluating double and triple integrals
4. Finding the area between two curves
5. Computing gradient, divergence and curl of point functions

6. Applying Milne-Thomson method for constructing analytic function
7. Determination of Mobius transformation for the given set of points
8. Finding poles and residues of an analytic function

Lecture:45, Tutorials and Practical:15, Total:60
TEXT BOOK:
1.
New Delhi, 2018.
1. Kreyszig E, "Advanced Engineering Mathematics ", 10th Edition, John Wiley, New Delhi, India, 2016.
Kandasamy P., Thilagavathy K. and Gunavathy K., “Engineering Mathematics For First Year B.E/B.Tech”,
2.
Reprint Edition 2014, S.Chand and Co., New Delhi
Duraisamy C., Vengataasalam S., Arun Prakash K. and Suresh M., "Engineering Mathematics - I", 2nd Edition,
3.
Pearson India Education, New Delhi, 2018.
4. Grewal B.S, “Higher Engineering Mathematics" 44thEdition, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2018.
5. Multivariable Calculus and Complex Analysis Laboratory Manual.
Applying (K3),
CO1 compute the total derivatives and extreme values of multivariable functions.
Manipulation (S2)
evaluate multiple integrals and apply them to compute the area and volume of the Applying (K3),
CO2
regions. Manipulation (S2)
apply the concepts of derivatives and line integrals of vector functions in engineering Applying (K3),
CO3
problems. Manipulation (S2)
construct analytic functions and bilinear transformations and determine the image of Applying (K3),
CO4
given region under the given conformal mapping. Manipulation (S2)
apply the techniques of complex integration to evaluate real and complex integrals over Applying (K3),
CO5
suitable closed curves. Manipulation (S2)

CO1 3 3 2 3
CO2 3 3 2 3
CO3 3 3 3
CO4 3 3 2
CO5 3 3 3 2

Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) % %
CAT1 10 30 60 100
CAT2 10 30 60 100
CAT3 10 30 60 100
ESE 10 30 60 100
*Alternate week
22CYT25 - CHEMISTRY FOR ELECTRONICS AND INSTRUMENTATION ENGINEERING
Programme &
B.E & Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Sem. Category L T P Credit
Branch
Preamble This course aims to equip the engineering students to realize the importance of electrochemistry, corrosion,
metal finishing, electrochemical storage devices, fuel & combustion and the need for e-waste management.
Unit – I ELECTROCHEMISTRY AND CORROSION 9
Electrochemistry: Introduction – cells – types – representation of galvanic cell – electrode potential – Nernst equation (derivation
of cell EMF) – calculation of cell EMF from single electrode potential – reference electrode: construction, working and applications
of standard hydrogen electrode – potentiometric titrations (redox) – conductometric titrations – mixture of weak and strong acid Vs
strong base. Corrosion: Introduction – chemical corrosion – Pilling – Bedworth rule – electrochemical corrosion and it’s types–
galvanic corrosion – differential aeration corrosion with examples- galvanic series- factors influencing rate of corrosion –
measurement of corrosion (wt. loss method only).
Unit – II INDUSTRIAL METAL FINISHING 9
Introduction – technological importance of metal finishing- methods of metal finishing - essentials of metal finishing:
polarization, decomposition potential and overpotential – surface preparation – electroplating: process – effect of plating variables
on the nature of electrodeposit – electroplating of chromium and silver-electroless plating: process – various steps involved in
electroless plating – electroless nickel plating process-advantages of electroless plating- distinction between electroplating and
electroless plating –manufacturing of electronic component-printed circuit board (PCB) fabrication.
Unit – III ELECTROCHEMICAL STORAGE DEVICES 9
Batteries: Introduction- types of batteries – discharging and charging of battery – characteristics of battery – battery rating –
various tests on battery – primary battery: silver button cell – secondary battery: Ni-Cd battery –modern battery: lithium-ion battery
– maintenance of batteries – choice of batteries for electric vehicle applications. Fuel Cells: Introduction-Importance and
classification of fuel cells – description, principle, components and applications of fuel cells: H 2-O2 fuel cell, alkaline fuel cell, molten
carbonate fuel cell and direct methanol fuel cell.
Unit – IV FUELS AND COMBUSTION 9
Introduction – classification of fuels – characteristics of a good fuel – combustion – calorific values – gross and net calorific values
– theoretical calculation of calorific value by Dulong‘s formula – flue gas analysis by Orsat‘s method – solid fuels – coal and its
varieties – proximate analysis – significance – metallurgical coke – Otto-Hoffman byproduct method – liquid fuel – refining of
petroleum – manufacture of synthetic petrol – hydrogenation of coal – bergius process – knocking: spark ignition engine – octane
number, compression ignition engine – cetane number – power alcohol and biodiesel – gaseous fuel – water gas – introduction of
Bharat Stage Emission Standard (BSES) system.
Unit – V E-WASTE AND ITS MANAGEMENT 9
Introduction-E- Waste – definition – sources of e-waste– hazardous substances in e-waste – effects of e-waste on environment
and human health- need for e-waste management– e-waste handling rules – waste minimization techniques for managing e-waste
– recycling of e-waste – disposal treatment methods of e- waste- mechanism of extraction of precious metal from leaching solution
– global scenario of E-waste – E-waste in India- case studies.
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
Wiley Editorial Board,” Wiley Engineering Chemistry”, 2nd Edition, Wiley India Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi, Reprint 2019.for Unit-I,
1.
II, III, IV.
Palanisamy P.N., Manikandan P., Geetha A., Manjula Rani K.& Kowshalya V.N., “Environmental Science”, Revised
2.
Edition, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2019, for Unit-V.
REFERENCES:
Palanisamy P.N., Manikandan P., Geetha A.& Manjula Rani K., “Applied Chemistry”, 6 th Edition, Tata McGraw Hill
1.
Education Private Limited, New Delhi, 2019.
2. Payal B. Joshi, Shashank Deep, “Engineering Chemistry”, Oxford University Press, New Delhi, 2019.
3. Palanna O., “Engineering Chemistry”, McGraw Hill Education, New Delhi, 2018.
CO1 apply the principle of electrochemistry and corrosion for various applications Applying (K3)
CO2 apply the concept of plating techniques in industrial metal finishing Applying (K3)
CO3 use the concepts of batteries, fuel cells and their applications in various fields. Applying (K3)
CO4 apply the concepts of fuels and combustion for engineering applications Applying (K3)
CO5 utilize the knowledge to handle the e-waste and reduce its impacts on environment Applying (K3)

Cos/Pos PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 2 1 1
CO2 3 2 1 1
CO3 3 2 1 1
CO4 3 2 1 1
CO5 3 2 1 1 3

Test / Bloom’s Remembering Understanding Applying Analyzing Evaluating Total
Creating (K6) %
Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % %
CAT1 25 35 40 100
CAT2 25 35 40 100
CAT3 25 35 40 100
ESE 25 35 40 100
22EIC21- ELECTRIC CIRCUITS ANALYSIS
Programme & Branch
Preamble To establish a firm understanding of basic laws of electric circuits and networks, and to provide a
comprehensive insight into the techniques for analysing the circuits theoretically.
Unit – I DC Circuits: 9
Review of electric circuit elements and Kirchhoff’s Laws-Dependent and independent sources- open and short circuits- Source
transformation-Voltage and current relationship in R,L and C- Steady state analysis of RL, RC and RLC circuits.
Unit – II Network Theorems: 9
Mesh analysis-Nodal Analysis – Star-Delta transformation -Superposition theorem – Thevenin’s and Norton’s theorem-Maximum Power
transfer theorem.
Unit – III Network Synthesis: 9
Realizability of one port network- Hurwitz polynomials-Positive Real Functions- RL, RC network using Cauer methods, LC networks
using Foster method-applications of passive networks synthesize in filters.
Unit – IV Single phase and Three phase AC Circuits: 9
Single phase AC Circuits: Phase relation in resistor, inductor, capacitor-Phasor diagram-Series and parallel RLC circuits-power and
power factor. Three phase AC circuits: Interconnection of three phase sources and loads –line and phase quantities-voltage, current
and power in three phase star and delta connected balanced loads- Power measurement in three phase balanced circuits: Two
wattmeter method.
Unit – V Time and frequency domain analysis; 9
DC Transient response analysis: - RL, RC and RLC series circuits. Resonance analysis: Ideal RLC series and parallel resonance-
Impedance and current variations- Bandwidth-Q factor- Magnification factor.
1. Measurement of current, voltage, power and power factor in single phase load
2. RC transient response analysis
3. Frequency Response analysis of RLC circuits
4. Experimental verification of Maximum Power Transfer theorem
5. Three phase power measurement using two wattmeter method
6. Verification of superposition theorem in DC circuits
7. Determination of effective resistance in DC circuit using Star Delta transformation
TEXT BOOK:
Sudhakar A and Shyammohan S Palli , “Circuits and Networks Analysis and Synthesis”, 4th Edition , Tata
1.
McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2010.
REFERENCES:
1. Ravish R.Singh, “Networks Analysis and Synthesis”, 2nd Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2013.
William H. Hayt, Jr. Jack E. Kemmerly and Steven M. Durbin, “Engineering Circuit Analysis”, McGraw Hill
2.
Science Engineering, 8th Edition, 2016.
3. Charles K. Alexander, Mathew N.O. Sadiku, “Fundamentals of Electric Circuits”, 5th Edition, McGraw Hill, 2015.
CO1 determine the electrical parameters in the fundamental DC circuit Applying (K3)
CO2 interpret the behavior of DC resistive circuits using network theorems Analyzing (K4)
CO3 identify suitable network from the given transfer function Applying (K3)
CO4 determine the electrical parameters in single and three phase AC circuits Applying (K3)
CO5 assess the characteristics of RLC circuits in time and frequency domain Analyzing (K4)
Applying (K3),
CO6 determine the circuit parameters in DC circuits using network theorems
Precision (S3)
Applying (K3),
CO7 determine the circuit parameters in single phase and three phase AC circuits
Precision (S3)
Applying (K3),
CO8 analyze the time and frequency response of RLC circuits
Precision (S3)

CO1 3 3 1 1 1 3 3
CO2 3 3 2 2 2 3 3
CO3 3 3 1 1 1 3 3
CO4 3 3 1 1 1 3 3
CO5 3 3 2 2 2 3 3
CO6 3 2 1 3 1 1 1 2 3 1 3 3
CO7 3 3 1 3 1 1 1 2 3 1 3 3
CO8 3 3 1 3 1 1 1 2 3 1 3 3

Remembering Understanding Applying Analyzing Evaluating Creating Total
Test / Bloom’s Category*
(K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) % %
CAT1 5 30 65 100
CAT2 5 30 65 100
CAT3 100
ESE 5 30 65 100
22CSC22 – DATA STRUCTURES USING C
(Common to ECE, EEE, EIE and MTS Branches)
Programme &
BE - ECE, EEE, EIE and MTS Branches Sem. Category L T P Credit
Branch
Prerequisites Programming in C 2 PC 3 0 2 4
Preamble This course is indented to introduce the concept of elementary data structures and notion of algorithms to
novice learner from cross disciplines in Engineering and Technology.
Unit – I List: 9
Data Structures - Abstract Data Types (ADT) - List ADT and Array Implementation - Linked List - Doubly Linked List - Circular
Linked List – Application : Polynomial Addition
Unit – II Stack and Queues: 9
Stack ADT – Array and Linked List implementation of Stacks - Application: Balancing Parenthesis- Infix to Postfix Conversion -
Postfix Expression Evaluation - Queue ADT – Array and Linked List implementation of Queues - Applications
Unit – III Trees: 9
Trees-Preliminaries – Binary Trees –Binary Tree Traversals - The Search Tree ADT – Binary Search Trees–Priority Queues
(Binary Heap)- Application: Expression Tree
Unit – IV Graphs: 9
Graphs – Definitions – Elementary Graph Operations- Traversals – Shortest-Path Algorithms: Unweighted Shortest Paths –
Dijkstra‟s Algorithm – Minimum Spanning Tree: Prim‟s Algorithm- Kruskal‟s Algorithm – Applications: Biconnectivity.
Unit – V Sorting and Hashing: 9

Sorting - Preliminaries – Insertion Sort – Quicksort – Merge sort – Heapsort – Hashing – General Idea – Hash Function – Separate
Chaining – Open addressing.

1. Implementation of C programs using pointers
2. Implementation of singly linked list and its operations
3. Implementation of doubly linked list and its operations
4. Implementation of Stack and its operations
5. Implementation of Queue and its operations
6. Implementation of Stack and Queue using Singly Linked List
7. Convert a given In-fix Expression into Post-fix Expression using Stack ADT
8. Evaluate the Post-fix Expression using Stack ADT
9. Implementation of Binary Search Tree traversals
10. Implementation of sorting algorithms: Insertion and Quick sort
TEXT BOOK:
1. Weiss M. A., "Data Structures and Algorithm Analysis in C", 2nd Edition, Pearson Education Asia, New Delhi, 2016.

Horowitz Sahni, Andreson Freed, "Fundamentals of Data Structures in C", 2nd Edition, Universities Press, Hyderabad,
1.
2011.
Langsam Y.M., Augenstein J. and Tenenbaum A. M., “Data Structures using C and C++”, 2nd Edition, Pearson Education,
2.
2015.
CO1 apply List ADT for solving the given problems Applying (K3)
CO2 make use of arrays and linked lists to create Stack and Queue ADTs. Applying (K3)
CO3 utilize Tree ADT to develop simple application Applying (K3)
CO4 make use of Graph ADT for standard problems Applying (K3)
CO5 illustrate the use of standard sorting and Hashing Techniques Applying (K3)

CO1 3 2 1 1
CO2 3 2 1 1
CO3 3 2 1 1
CO4 3 2 1 1
CO5 3 2 1 1

Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) % %
CAT1 10 40 50 100
CAT2 5 35 60 100
CAT3 5 35 60 100
ESE 5 35 60 100
22EIT21 - ELECTRICAL MACHINES
Programme &
Branch
Prerequisites Nil 2 ES 3 0 0 3
Preamble This course discusses the construction, operation and behavior of various electrical machines used in real time
applications.
Unit – I DC Machines: 9
DC Generator: Principle of working – construction –classification – EMF equation – Applications. DC Motor: Construction and Principle of
Operation–Back EMF –Torque Equation, Characteristics of Series and Shunt motor – Starters : Three Point starter – Speed Control:
Armature and Field Control- Applications.
Unit – II Transformer: 9
Single Phase Transformer: Construction of a Transformer – Types– E.M.F. Equation– Voltage Transformation Ratio (K) –Simplified
Equivalent Circuit of a Loaded Transformer. Open-circuit Test – Short-circuit Test –Voltage Regulation– Efficiency of a Transformer.
Autotransformer: Principle of Operation and Applications.
Unit – III Induction Motors: 9
Three-phase Induction Motors: Construction –Squirrel Cage and Slip-Ring rotors - Principle of Operation – Slip – Torque-Slip Characteristics.
Methods of Starting of 3-Phase Induction Motors –Speed Control. Single-Phase Induction Motors: Types–Self-Starting –Split-Phase Induction
Motor – Capacitor-Start Motor – Capacitor-Start Capacitor-Run Motor – Shaded-Pole Motor- Applications.
Unit – IV Synchronous Machines: 9
Construction-Principle of Operation of generator and Motor– Types of rotors– EMF Equation of generator–Starting Methods of Synchronous
Motor-V Curves and Inverted V curves – Applications.
Unit – V Special Machines: 9
Construction, Principle of Operation and Applications: Universal Motor – Brushless D.C. Motor–Stepper Motor: Permanent Magnet-Variable
Reluctance –Hybrid. D.C. Servomotor – A.C. Servomotor.
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
1. Mehta V.K. and Rohit Mehta, “ Principles of Electrical Machines” , 2nd Edition, S.Chand & Co. Ltd., New Delhi, 2016.
REFERENCES:
1. Rajput R.K.,”Electrical Machines”, 6th Edition, Laxmi Publications, New Delhi, 2018
2. Gupta J.B., “Electrical Machines”, 4th Edition, S.K. Kataria& Sons, New Delhi, Reprint 2014
3. Theraja B.L. and Theraja A.K, “A text book of Electrical Technology”, Vol.II, S.Chand & Co. Ltd., New Delhi, Reprint-2012.
CO1 describe the construction and operation of DC Machines Understanding (K2)
CO2 assess the performance characteristics of machines Applying (K3)
CO3 outline the starting and speed control techniques of DC and AC Motors Understanding (K2)
CO4 identify suitable electrical machine for various applications Understanding (K2)
CO5 describe the construction and operation of special machines Understanding (K2)

CO1 3 1 2 2
CO2 3 2 1 1 1 3 3
CO3 3 1 2 2
CO4 3 1 2 2
CO5 3 1 2 2

Test / Bloom’s Remembering Understanding Applying Analyzing Evaluating (K5) Creating (K6) Total
Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % % % %
CAT1 20 60 20 100
CAT2 20 60 20 100
CAT3 20 60 20 100
ESE 20 60 20 100
22CYL11 - CHEMISTRY LABORATORY FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
(Common to ECE, EEE and EIE Branches)
Programme &
B.E - ECE, EEE & EIE Sem. Category L T P Credit
Branch
Prerequisites Nil 1/2 BS 0 0 2 1
Preamble This course aims to impart the basic concepts of volumetric, conductometric, potentiometric,
viscometry, spectrophotometric and pH metry experiments for the estimation of given samples and
thereby, to improve the analytical skills. This course also aims to impart the significance of DO,
alkalinity, Cu2+ and Cr6+ in electrical systems.
1. Iodometric analysis of copper content from discarded PCBs.
2. Volumetric analysis of chromium prepared from electroplating sludge.

Find the amount of mineral acids present in the given solution by conductometric based sensor electrode.
3.
4. Determination of concentration of H+ ion in a solution using H+ sensing electrode.
5. Potentiometric approach using a Pt electrode for the estimation of iron in the given sample.
6. Determination of molecular weight of a polymer / liquid by Ostwald viscometer.
7. Spectrophotometric method for the determination of Iron in steel.

Assessment of the given water sample for the suitability of drinking / industrial purpose by estimating the calcium,
8.
magnesium and total hardness by EDTA method.
9. Estimation of alkalinity of river and borewell water collected from different places.
10. Determination of dissolved oxygen in the given wastewater sample.
11. Electroplating process (Demonstration).
Proximate analysis of Coal- determine moisture, volatile matter and ash content of a given sample of
12.
coal (Demonstration).
Total:30

Palanisamy P.N., Manikandan P., Geetha A. and Manjula Rani K., “Chemistry Laboratory Manual”, 1st Edition,
1.
Rajaganapathy Publishers, Erode, 2022.
Applying (K3),
CO1 estimate the amount of hardness, alkalinity, DO, Cu and Cr present in the given sample.
Precision (S3)
Applying (K3),
CO2 analyze the amount of acids present in the given sample using conductivity and pH meter.
Precision (S3)
demonstrate the potentiometric and spectrophotometric method for the estimation of Fe Applying (K3),
CO3
and Viscometer for the determination of molecular weight of a polymer. Precision (S3)

CO1 3 2 1 3 3
CO2 3 2 1 3 3
CO3 3 2 1 3 2
22EIL21 - DEVICES AND MACHINES LABORATORY
Programme &
Branch
Prerequisites Nil 2 ES 0 0 2 1
Preamble This laboratory aims for a better understanding of the operation of electronic circuits and give practical
exposure to learn the characteristics of AC and DC machines
1. Clipper and clamper circuits using diodes
2. Determination of hybrid parameters in CE configuration
3. Determination of FET parameters.
4. BJT based RC Phase shift oscillator
5. Verification of UJT as relaxation oscillator
6. Load test on DC series motor
7. Speed control of DC shunt motor
8. Load test on squirrel cage induction motor
9. Predetermination of efficiency and regulation on single phase transformer
10. Load test on three phase alternator

Total:30
1. Devices and Circuits Lab Manual

Applying (K3),
CO1 Determine the characteristics and parameters of transistors
Precision (S3)
Applying (K3),
CO2 Generate waveforms using PN junction diode and BJT
Precision (S3)
Applying (K3),
CO3 demonstrate the performance characteristics of DC and AC machines
Precision (S3)

CO1 3 2 1 3 1 1 1 2 3 1 3 3
CO2 3 3 1 3 1 1 1 2 3 1 3 3
CO3 3 3 1 3 1 1 1 2 3 1 3 3
22ITC31 - JAVA PROGRAMMING
(Common to ECE,EEE,EIE,MTS Engineering Branches)
Programme&
ECE, EEE, EIE, MTS Sem. Category L T P Credit
Branch
Prerequisites Problem Solving and Programming in C 3 ES 3 0 2 4
Preamble This course provides the fundamental object-oriented concepts of Java programming including inheritance,
exception handling, multithreading, Generics, and Collections.
Unit – I Classes and Objects 9
History and Evolution of Java – An Overview of Java–Data Types, Variables and Arrays– Operators –Control Statements– Classes:
Class Fundamentals-objects – Assigning Object Reference Variables – Introducing Methods –Constructors – this keyword – Garbage
Collection – Stack Class.
Unit – II Inheritance, Packages, and Interfaces 9
Overloading Methods – Objects as Parameters –Argument Passing – Returning Objects –Recursion–Access Control–Static – Nested
and Inner Classes–Command–Line Arguments – Variable Length Arguments. Inheritance – Basics– Super keyword - Multilevel
Hierarchy-Method Overriding–Dynamic Method Dispatch –Abstract Classes – final with Inheritance. Packages and Interfaces:
Packages and Member Access- Importing Packages – Interfaces.
Unit – III Exception Handling and Multithreading 9
Exception Handling basics – Multiple catch Clauses – Nested try Statements – Java’s Built-in Exceptions – User-defined Exception.
Multithreaded Programming: Java Thread Model - Creating a Thread and Multiple Threads – Priorities – Synchronization – Inter
Thread Communication- Suspending – Resuming, and Stopping Threads –Multithreading.
Unit – IV I/O and Generics 9

Enumerations – Wrappers – Auto boxing – Annotation Basics. I/O Basics – Reading and Writing Console I/O –Reading and Writing
Files. Generics: Introduction – Generic Classes & Methods - Example–Parameters, Constructors and Interfaces
Unit – V String Handling and Collections 9

String Handling: String constructors – operations – Character Extraction – String Comparison – Searching Strings – Modifying
Strings – String Buffer. Collection Framework: Overview – Collection Interfaces – Collection Classes.

1. Write Java programs using operators, arrays, and control statements
2. Develop a stack and queue data structures using classes and objects
3. Program to demonstrate inheritance & polymorphism
4. Develop an application using interfaces by accessing superclass constructors and methods
5. Develop applications using packages and exception handling
6. Program to demonstrate thread concepts
7. Write Java program to illustrate file and string manipulations
8. Implement Java program to illustrate collection frameworks
TEXT BOOK:
1. Herbert Schildt, "Java: The Complete Reference", 11th Edition, McGraw Hill Education, New Delhi, 2019. (Units I - V)
1. Cay S.Horstmann, "Core Java Fundamentals", Eleventh Edition, Prentice Hall, 2018.

CO1 apply the concepts of classes and objects to solve simple problems Applying (K3)
CO2 develop programs using inheritance, packages, and interfaces Applying (K3)
make use of exception-handling mechanisms and multithreaded models to solve real-world
CO3 Applying (K3)
problems
CO4 develop Java applications with I/O packages and generics concepts Applying (K3)
CO5 apply string handling functions and collection classes and interfaces Applying (K3)

CO1 3 2 1 1
CO2 3 2 1 1
CO3 3 2 1 1
CO4 3 2 1 1
CO5 3 2 1 1

Test / Bloom’s Remembering Understanding Applying Analyzing Evaluating Total
Creating (K6) %
Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % %
CAT1 20 40 40 100
CAT2 10 20 70 100
CAT3 10 20 70 100
ESE 10 20 70 100
22EIT31-TRANSDUCERS ENGINEERING
Programme &
B.E. & Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Sem. Category L T P C
Branch
Preamble This course explains the concepts of measurement systems, units and standards. Also it imparts theoretical and
practical aspects of resistive, inductive, capacitive and other special types of transducers.
Unit – I Measurements and Instrumentation of Transducers: 9
Block diagram of a Measurement system. Fundamental and Derived units –Standards of Measurement. Classification of Errors: Error
analysis, Statistical methods, Odds and uncertainty. Classification of transducers – Selection of transducers.
Unit – II Characteristics of Transducers: 9
Static characteristics: Accuracy, Precision, Resolution, Threshold, Sensitivity, Linearity, Hysteresis, Range and Span. Dynamic
characteristics: Impulse and random response of Zero order transducer. Step and Ramp response of First and Second order
transducers.
Unit – III Variable Resistance Transducers: 9
Resistive Transducers: Resistance Potentiometer: Loading effect on Potentiometer. Resistance Strain gauges: Unbonded and Bonded
type strain gauges. Applications: Temperature Measurement using RTD and Thermistor – Gas flow measurement using hot-wire
Anemometer – measurement of moisture in solids and wood – level measurement using resistive tapes.
Unit – IV Variable Inductance Transducers: 9
Inductive Transducers: Simple inductance and Mutual inductance Transducers – Induction Potentiometers. Linear Variable Differential
Transformers – Variable reluctance transducers – Eddy current transducers. Applications: Displacement measurement - Thickness
Measurement – Position Measurement.
Unit – V Variable Capacitance Transducers and Other Transducers: 9
Capacitive Transducers: Variable area type – Variable dielectric type – Variable distance type. Applications: Capacitive Thickness
Transducers–Capacitive Moisture Transducers - Capacitive Level Transducer. Other Transducers: Piezoelectric Transducers -
Magnetostrictive Transducers – Hall Effect Transducers – SQUID Sensors –Film sensors – Smart sensors.
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
1. Vijayachitra S., "Transducers Engineering" 1st Edition, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi,2016.
REFERENCES:
1. Murthy D.V.S., “Transducers and Instrumentation”, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2010.
Doebelin E.A., “Measurement Systems: Applications and Design”, 5th Edition, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company, New
2.
Delhi, 2008.
CO1 explain the measurement of physical quantities, conversion and classification of transducers Understanding (K2)
CO2 summarize the concepts of various characteristics of Transducers Understanding (K2)
CO3 apply the selected types of resistive transducers for various applications Applying (K3)
CO4 apply the selected types of inductive transducers for various applications Applying (K3)
CO5 apply various types of capacitive transducers and other transducers for selected applications Applying (K3)

CO1 3 2 1 1 2 2
CO2 3 2 1 1 2 2
CO3 3 3 1 1 1 2 1 3 3
CO4 3 3 1 1 1 2 1 3 3
CO5 3 3 1 1 1 2 1 3 3

Test / Bloom’s Remembering Understanding Applying Analyzing Evaluating (K5) Creating
Total %
Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % % (K6) %
CAT1 30 70 100
CAT2 20 50 30 100
CAT3 20 50 30 100
ESE 20 50 30 100
22EIT32 - ANALOG INTEGRATED CIRCUITS
Programme &
B.E. &Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Sem. Category L T P Credit
Branch
Preamble Analog Integrated Circuits course dealt with circuits of signals free to vary from zero to full power supply
voltage. The contents in this course make use of integrated circuit components constructed using opamps and
special function ICs.
Unit – I Basics and Characteristics of OPAMP: 9
Introduction-Basics information of operational amplifier -Ideal operational amplifier –Operational amplifier Internal Circuit-Differential
Amplifier-Transfer Characteristics. DC Characteristics: Input bias current-Input offset current-Input offset voltage -Thermal drift. AC
characteristics: Frequency response-Frequency Compensation -Slew Rate.
Unit – II Applications of Operational Amplifier: 9
Introduction-Inverting, Non inverting, Voltage follower, Summing Amplifier, Subtractor, Differentiator, Integrator, Comparators. Wave
generators: Schmitt trigger, Astable and Monostable Multivibrator - RC phase shift oscillator. Precision diode. Active Filters: I order
Low pass filters.
Unit – III D-A and A-D Converters: 9
Characteristics: Resolution, Quantization, Range, Settling time. Digital to Analog Converter: Types: Weighted R, R-2R and Inverted
R-2R. Analog to Digital Converter: Types: Flash type, Dual slope, and Successive approximation, Sigma delta.
Unit – IV Special ICs: 9
Timer (IC 555) Introduction- Description of Functional block diagram - Monostable and Astable mode of operation. Voltage controlled
oscillator (IC 566) – Monolithic Phase locked loop (IC 565).Voltage regulator IC: Series op-amp regulator (78XX) –Switching Mode
Power Supply (SMPS).
Unit – V Analog Signal Conditioning: 9
Introduction- Analog Data Representation- Signal Level and Bias Changes, Linearization, conversions, Signal transmission: Current
to Voltage converter. Differential Instrumentation Amplifier –Common mode rejection, Differential and Common Mode gain. Analog
Controllers: Proportional, Integral and Derivative mode Controllers.
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
Roy Choudhury D. and Shail Bala Jain," Linear Integrated Circuits", 5 th Edition, Reprint, New Age International Publishers,
1.
New Delhi, 2018.
REFERENCES:
1. Curtis D. Johnson, “Process Control Instrumentation Technology”, 8th Edition, Pearson Education Limited, London, 2015.
Sergio Franco, “Design with Operational Amplifiers and Analog Integrated Circuits”, 4 th Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, New
2.
Delhi, 2016.
CO1 interpret the basics and characteristics of opamp Understanding (K2)
CO2 apply the circuit of opamp for mathematical operation, waveform generation and filter. Applying (K3)
CO3 implement A/D and D/A converters for real time application Applying (K3)
CO4 summarize the functional blocks of special ICs. Applying (K3)
CO5 develop analog signal conditioning circuits using opamp circuits Applying (K3)

CO1 3 2 2 2
CO2 3 3 1 1 1 3 3
CO3 3 3 1 1 1 3 3
CO4 3 3 1 1 1 3 3
CO5 3 3 1 1 1 3 3

Total %
Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) %
CAT1 10 50 40 100
CAT2 10 20 70 100
CAT3 10 20 70 100
ESE 10 20 70 100
22EIT33 - DIGITAL LOGIC CIRCUITS
Programme &
Branch
Preamble To impart the acquaintance about Boolean algebra, logic gates, combinational and sequential logic, logic
families, memory and programmable logic devices
Unit – I Boolean Algebra and Minimization Techniques: 9+3
Number systems and conversions – Boolean logic operations – Basic laws of Boolean Algebra – DeMorgan’s theorems – Sum of
Products and Product of Sums – Karnaugh Map (Two-variable, Three variable, Four-variable) – Quine McCluskey or Tabular method
of minimization of logic functions -Don’t care condition– Logic gates.
Unit – II Combinational Circuits: 9+3
Procedure for the Design of Combinational circuits – Half adder – Full adder – Half subtractor – Full subtractor – Multiplexers: 4-to-1
and 8-to-1 Multiplexers, Implementation of Boolean expressions using multiplexers – Demultiplexers: 1-to-4 and 1-to-8
Demultiplexers – Decoders: 3-to-8 and 4-to-16 Decoders. Encoders: Octal-to-Binary Encoder – Parity Checkers– Code Converters:
BCD-to-Binary converters, Binary-to-Gray code converters – Magnitude Comparators: Single bit Magnitude Comparator
Unit – III Synchronous Sequential Circuits: 9+3
Latches and Flip-flops: Latches – Flip-Flops – S-R, D, J-K and T Flip-flops – Triggering and Characteristics equations of Flip-flops- Master-
Slave Flip-flops Realization of one Flip-flop using other Flip-flops - Synchronous Sequential Circuits: General sequential circuit
model – Design of synchronous sequential circuits - State reduction and assignment - Analysis of synchronous sequential
circuits –Design of synchronous counters: Design of MOD-3 counter –Shift Registers: Universal shift registers.
Unit – IV Asynchronous Sequential Circuits: 9+3
Design of Fundamental mode asynchronous sequential circuits-primitive state / flow table- Problems in asynchronous circuits:
Cycles, Races, Hazards –Design of hazard free switching circuits: Static, Dynamic and Essential hazards elimination –
Asynchronous counter.
Unit – V Logic Families and Memory: 9+3
Logic Families: Introduction – Characteristics of Digital ICs: Speed of operation, Power dissipation, Fan-in, Fan-out, Noise
immunity or noise margin - Transistor Transistor Logic (TTL): Two input TTL NAND Gate – Emitter Coupled Logic (ECL):
Inverter. Memory and Programmable Logic Devices: Introduction – Classification of memories – Basic memory structure -
Read Only Memory (ROM) : Architecture and types – Random Access Memory (RAM) - Types of RAM: Static RAM, Dynamic
RAM - Introduction to PLA, PAL and FPGA.
Lecture:45, Tutorial:15, Total:60
TEXT BOOK:
1. Salivahanan S., and Arivazhagan S., "Digital Circuits and Design", 5th Edition, Oxford University Press, New Delhi, 2018.
REFERENCES:
M. Morris R. Mano, and Michael D. Ciletti, “Digital Design with an Introduction to the Verilog HDL, VHDL, and System
1.
Verilog”, 6th Edition, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2018.
2. AnandKumar A., “FundamentalsofDigitalCircuits”, 4th Edition, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2016.
CO1 simplify the boolean expressions Applying (K3)
CO2 implement the combinational logic circuits Applying (K3)
CO3 apply synchronous sequential logic for implementing digital circuits Applying (K3)
CO4 implement digital circuits using asynchronous sequential logics Applying (K3)
CO5 identify the role of logic families and memory devices Understanding (K2)

CO1 3 3 1 1 1 3 3
CO2 3 3 1 1 1 3 3
CO3 3 3 1 1 1 3 3
CO4 3 3 1 1 1 3 3
CO5 3 2 3 3

Total %
Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) %
CAT1 10 30 60 100
CAT2 10 30 60 100
CAT3 10 40 50
ESE 5 25 70 100
22EIT34 - ELECTRICAL MEASUREMENTS AND INSTRUMENTATION
Programme &
B.E. &Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Sem. Category L T P Credit
Branch
Preamble The course imparts the knowledge on Principles, Constructions, Dynamics of Electrical and Electronic
Measuring Instruments. It discusses the comprehensive techniques for measurement of current, voltage,
power energy with Instruments, Potentiometers and Bridges.
Unit – I Measurement of Voltage and Current: 9+3
Introduction to essential requirements of instruments- Three operating forces of analog instruments - Permanent Magnet Moving
Coil (PMMC): Construction of PMMC Instruments - Torque Equation- Ammeter Shunts- Voltmeter Multipliers. Moving Iron
Instruments: General Torque Equation - Classification – Construction - Comparison between Attraction and Repulsion types of
Instruments.
Unit – II Measurement of Power and Energy: 9+3
Introduction to Electrodynamometer type instruments- Electrodynamometer Wattmeter: Construction – Theory- Torque Equation-
Errors. Single Phase Induction Type Meters: Construction –Theory and Operation of Single Phase Induction Type Energy Meters
.Testing of Energy Meters: Phantom loading.
Unit – III Potentiometers and Instrument Transformers: 9+3
D.C. Potentiometers: Introduction - Basic Potentiometer Circuit – Standardization - Laboratory type (Crompton’s) potentiometer –
Applications.
Instrument Transformers: use of Instrument transformers- Ratios-Burden. Design Features of C.T Current Transformers (C.T) –
Potential Transformers (P.T). Difference between C.T and P.T. Measurement of Power using Instrument Transformers.
Unit – IV Measurement of Resistance and Impedance with Bridges: 9+3
Classification of Resistances- Measurement of Medium Resistance - Wheat Stone Bridge - Limitations of Wheat Stone Bridge. Low
Resistance- Kelvin Double Bridge. High Resistance – Meggar (Earth tester). A.C. Bridges: Introduction - Sources and Detectors -
Measurement of Self Inductance & Capacitance: Maxwell’s Inductance Bridge - Capacitance Bridge - Anderson’s Bridge - Schering
Bridge - Wien’s Bridge- Sources of Errors in Bridge Circuits.
Unit – V Digital Instrumentation (Block Diagram Approach): 9+3
Digital Multimeter, Cathode Ray Oscilloscope. Impedance Measurement: Q meter. RMS Measurement: True RMS Meters. Digital
meters: Time, Period and Frequency measurements. Digital Voltmeters: Ramp type Voltmeters. Shielding and Grounding.
TEXT BOOK:
Sawhney A.K. “A Course in Electronic Measurements and Instrumentation",2nd Edition, DhanpatRai & Co. Pvt. Ltd, New
1.
Delhi ,2015.
REFERENCES:
1. Robert B. Northrop, “Introduction to Instrumentation and Measurements”, 3rd Edition, CRC Press, 2017.
2. Kalsi, H.S., “Electronic Instrumentation”, 3rd Edition, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company, New Delhi, 2012.
CO1 utilize the working principle of meters for measurement of Voltage and Current Applying (K3)
CO2 utilize the working principle of meters for measurement of Power and Energy Applying (K3)
CO3 apply potentiometers and instrument transformers for measurement of electrical parameters. Applying (K3)
CO4 measure the unknown impedance using AC bridges Applying (K3)
CO5 explore the recent developments in Digital Measurements and Instruments Understanding (K2)

PSO
COs/POs PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO2
1
CO1 3 2 1 1 1 3 3
CO2 3 2 1 1 1 3 3
CO3 3 2 1 1 1 3 3
CO4 3 2 1 1 1 3 3
CO5 3 1 2 2

Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) % %
CAT1 10 60 30 100
CAT2 10 60 30 100
CAT3 10 75 15 100
ESE 10 60 30 100
22MNT31 - ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE
Programme &
All B.E/B.Tech Branches Sem. Category L T P Credit
Branch
Prerequisites Nil 3 MC 2 0 0 0
Preamble This course provides an approach to understand the various natural resources, ecosystem, bio-diversity,
pollution control & monitoring methods for sustainable life and also to provide knowledge and to create
awareness for engineering students on biological sciences.
Unit – I Environmental Studies and Natural Resources: 5
Introduction to Environmental Science – uses, over-exploitation and conservation of forest, water, mineral, food, energy and land
resources–case studies
Unit – II Ecosystem and Biodiversity: 5
Ecosystems: concept and components of an ecosystem -structural and functional features – Functional attributes (Food chain and
Food web only). Biodiversity: Introduction – Classification – Bio geographical classification of India- Values of biodiversity – Threats
and Conservation of biodiversity - case studies.
Unit – III Environmental Pollution: 5
Environmental Pollution: Definition – causes, effects and control measures of: (a) Air pollution - Climate change, global warming,
acid rain, ozone layer depletion (b)Water pollution (c) Soil pollution - Role of an individual in prevention of pollution - case studies.
Unit – IV Environmental Monitoring: 5
Sustainability -three pillars of sustainability- factors affecting environmental sustainability-approaches for sustainable development
- Introduction to EIA - objectives of EIA - environment protection act – air (prevention and control of pollution) act – water
(prevention and control of pollution) act.
Unit – V Introduction to Biological Science: 5
Functions of Carbohydrates, lipids, proteins and nucleic acids - Cells and its organelles - plasma membrane, mitochondria and
nucleus- Heredity and DNA - organization of DNA in cells - Genes and chromosomes- Cell division -Types of cell division- mitosis
& meiosis - Cell cycle and molecules that control cell cycle.
Total:25
TEXT BOOK:
Anubha Kaushik, and Kaushik C.P., “Environmental Science and Engineering”, 6th Multicolour Edition, New Age
1.
International Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2018, for Unit-I, II, III, IV.
Rastogi.SC, “Cells and Molecular Biology”, 2nd Edition, reprint, New Age International (P) Limited Publishers, New Delhi,
2.
2008, for Unit-V.
REFERENCES:
Palanisamy P.N., Manikandan P., Geetha A., Manjula Rani K., Kowshalya V.N., “Environmental Science”, Pearson
1.
Education, New Delhi, Revised Edition 2019.
2. Mukhtar Ahmad, “Text book of modern biochemistry", Volume I & II, Oxford & IBH Publishing Co. Pvt. LTD, Delhi, 1995.
CO1 illustrate the various natural resources and role of individual for its conservation Understanding (K2)
CO2 elaborate the features of ecosystem and biodiversity to find the need for conservation. Understanding (K2)
CO3 manipulate the sources, effects and control methods of various environmental pollution. Applying (K3)
CO4 make use of the knowledge of EIA and environmental legislation laws towards sustainability. Applying (K3)
CO5 explain the functions of carbohydrates, lipids, proteins, nucleic acids, Cells and its organelles Understanding (K2)

CO1 2 1 3
CO2 2 1 3
CO3 3 2 1 3
CO4 3 2 1 3
CO5 3 1

Total %
Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) %
CAT1 25 35 40 100
CAT2 25 35 40 100
CAT3 NA
ESE NA
* ±3% may be varied (CAT 1, 2 – 50 marks)
22TAM02 - தமிழரும் மதொழில்நுட்பமும்
Programme &
Branch
Prerequisites Nil 3 HS 1 0 0 1
முன்னுலர தமிழ் கலொச்சொரத்கதொடு ஒன்றிய மதொழில் நுட்பங்கலள பற்றிப் எடுத்துலரத்தல்
அலகு – I மநசவு மற்றும் பொலன மதொழில்நுட்பம் 3

சங்க கொலத்தில் மநசவு மதொழில் – பொலனத் மதொழில்நுட்பம் கருப்பு சிவப்பு பொண்டங்கள் – பொண்டகளில்
கீ றல் குறியீடுகள்
அலகு – I I வடிவலமப்பு மற்றும் கட்டிடத் மதொழில்நுட்பம் 3

சங்க கொலத்தில் வடிவலமப்பு மற்றும் கட்டுமொனங்கள் & சங்க கொலத்தில் வட்டுப்மபொருட்களில்
ீ
வடிவலமப்பு – சங்க கொலத்தில் கட்டுமொன மபொருட்களும் நடுகல்லும் – சிலப்பதிகொரத்தில் கமலட
அலமப்பு பற்றிய விவரங்கள் – மொமல்லபுரச்சிற்பங்களும், ககொவில்களும் – கசொழர் கொலத்து
மபருங்ககொயில்கள் மற்றும் பிற வழிபொட்டுத் தலங்கள் – நொயக்கர் கொலக் ககொயில்கள் –
மொதிரிகட்டலமப்புகள் பற்றி அறிதல், மதுலர மீ னொட்சி அம்மன் ஆலயம் மற்றும் திருமலல நொயக்கர்
மஹொல் – மசட்டிநொட்டு வடுகள்
ீ – பிரிட்டிஷ் கொலத்தில் மசன்லன இந்கதொ-சொகரொமசனிக் கட்டிடக் கலல.
அலகு – I I I உற்பத்தித் மதொழில்நுட்பம் 3
கப்பல் கட்டும் கலல – உகலொகவியல் – இரும்புத் மதொழிற்சொலல – இரும்லப உருக்குதல், எஃகு –
வரலொற்றுச்சொன்றுகளொக மசம்பு மற்றும் தங்க நொையங்கள் – நொையங்கள் அச்சடித்தல் – மைி
உருவொக்கும் மதொழிற்சொலலகள் – கல்மைிகள் – கண்ைொடி மைிகள் – சுடுமண் மைிகள் – சங்கு
மைிகள் – எலும்புத்துண்டுகள் – மதொல்லியல் சொன்றுகள் – சிலப்பதிகொரத்தில் மைிகளின் வலககள்.
அலகு – I V கவளொண்லம மற்றும் நீர்ப்பொசனத் மதொழில்நுட்பம் 3
அலை, ஏரி, குளங்கள், மதகு – கசொழர்கொல குமிழித் தூம்பின் முக்கியத்துவம் – கொல்நலட பரொமரிப்பு –
கொல்நலடகளுக்கொக வடிவலமக்கப்பட்ட கிைறுகள் – கவளொண்லம மற்றும் கவளொண்லம சொர்ந்த
மசயல்பொடுகள் – கடல்சொர் அறிவு – மீ ன்வளம் – முத்து மற்றும் முத்துக்குளித்தல் – மபருங்கடல் குறித்த
பண்லடய அறிவு – அறிவுசொர் சமூகம்.
அலகு – V அறிவியல் தமிழ் மற்றும் கைினித்தமிழ் 3
அறிவியல் தமிழின் வளர்ச்சி – கைினிதத்தமிழ் வளர்ச்சி – தமிழ் நூல்கலள மின்பதிப்பு மசய்தல் – தமிழ்
மமன்மபொருட்கள் உருவொக்கம் – தமிழ் இலையக் கல்விக்கழகம் – தமிழ் மின் நூலகம் – இலையத்தில்
தமிழ் அகரொதிகள் மசொற்குலவத் திட்டம்.
Total:15
TEXT BOOK:
தமிழக வரலொறு - மக்களும் பண்பொடும் - கக கக பிள்லள (மவளியீடு தமிழ்நொடு பொடநூல் மற்றும்

1.
கல்வியில் பைிகள் கழகம்), உலகத் தமிழொரொய்ச்சி நிறுவனம், மசன்லன, 2002
2. கைினித்தமிழ் முலனவர் இல. சுந்தரம், விகடன் பிரசுரம், 2016
REFERENCES:
1. கீ ழடி-லவலக நதிக்கலரயில் சங்ககொல நகர நொகரிகம்.(மதொல்லியல் துலற மவளியீடு)
2. மபொருலந-ஆற்றங்கலர நொகரிகம் (மதொல்லியல் துலற மவளியீடு)
5.
Tamil Studies)
6. The Contribution of the Tamil to Indian Culture (Dr.M.Valarmathi) (Puplished by International Institute of Tamil Studies).
Keeladi – ‘Sangam City Civilzation on the banks of river Vaigai; (Jointly Published by: Department of Archaeology &
7.
Tamilnadu Text Book and Educational Services Corporation, Tamilnadu)
8. Studies in the History of India with Special Reference to Tamilnadu (Dr.K.K.Pillay) (Published by: The Author)
9.
படிப் பப முடித்தவுடன், மாணவர்கள் (Highest Level)
தமிழ் கலொச்சொரம் மற் றும் தமிழ் சமூகத்தினுலடய மநசவு மற்றும் பொலன
மதொழில்நுட்பம் பற்றி விளக்க முடியும் .
தமிழர்களின் வடிவலமப்பு மற்றும் கட்டிடத் மதொழில்நுட்ப ஆற்றல் பற் றி விளக்க
முடியும் .
CO3 தமிழர்களின் உற்பத்தித் மதொழில்நுட்பம் பற் றி சுருக்கமாகக் கூற முடியும் . Understanding (K2)
தமிழர்களின் கவளொண்லம மற்றும் நீர்ப்பொசனத் மதொழில்நுட்பம் பற் றி விளக்க
முடியும் .
CO5 தமிழர்களின் அறிவியல் தமிழ் மற்றும் கைினித்தமிழ் பற்றி விளக்க முடியும். Understanding (K2)

CO1 3 3 2 2 3
CO2 3 3 2 2 3
CO3 3 3 2 2 3
CO4 3 3 2 2 3
CO5 3 3 2 2 3

Remembering Understanding Applying Analyzing Evaluating Creating
Test / Bloom’s Category* Total %
(K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) %
CAT1 40 60 100
CAT2 40 60 100
CAT3 40 60 100
ESE NA
22TAM02 - TAMILS AND TECHNOLOGY
Programme &
Branch
Preamble This course aims to impart the essential knowledge on the tamil culture and related technology
UNIT – I WEAVING AND CERAMIC TECHNOLOGY 3
Weaving Industry during Sangam Age – Ceramic technology – Black and Red Ware Potteries (BRW) – Graffiti on Potteries.
UNIT – II DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION TECHNOLOGY 3
Designing and Structural construction House & Designs in household materials during Sangam Age – Building materials and Hero
stones of Sangam age – Details of Stage Constructions in Silappathikaram – Sculptures and Temples of Mamallapuram – Great
Temples of Cholas and other worship places – Temples of Nayaka Period – Type study (Madurai Meenakshi Temple) – Thirumalai
Nayakar Mahal – Chetti Nadu Houses, Indo – Saracenic architecture at Madras during British Period.
UNIT – III MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGY 3
Art of Ship Building – Metallurgical studies – Iron industry – Iron smelting, steel – Copper and gold – Coins as source of history –
Minting of Coins – Beads making – industries Stone beads – Glass beads –Terracotta beads –Shell beads/ bone beats – Archeological
evidences – Gem stone types described in Silappathikaram.
UNIT – IV AGRICULTURE AND IRRIGATION TECHNOLOGY 3
Dam, Tank, ponds, Sluice, Significance of Kumizhi Thoompu of Chola Period, Animal Husbandry – Wells designed for cattle use –
Agriculture and Agro Processing – Knowledge of Sea – Fisheries – Pearl – Conche diving – Ancient Knowledge of Ocean – Knowledge
Specific Society.
UNIT – V SCIENTIFIC TAMIL & TAMIL COMPUTING 3
Development of Scientific Tamil – Tamil computing – Digitalization of Tamil Books – Development of Tamil Software – Tamil Virtual
Academy – Tamil Digital Library – Online Tamil Dictionaries – Sorkuvai Project.
Total:15
TEXT BOOK:
REFERENCES:
தமிழக வரலாறு - மக்களும் பண்பாடும் - கக கக பிள் ளள (வவளியீடு தமிழ் நாடு பாடநூல் மற் றும் கல் வியில்
1.
பணிகள் கழகம் ), உலகத் தமிழாராய் ச்சி நிறுவனம் , வசன்ளன, 2002
2. கணினித்தமிழ் முளனவர் இல. சுந்தரம் , விகடன் பிரசுரம் , 2016
3. கீழடி ளவளக நதிக்களரயில் சங் ககால நகர நாகரிகம் .(வதால் லியல் துளற வவளியீடு)
4. வபாருளந ஆற் றங் களர நாகரிகம் (வதால் லியல் துளற வவளியீடு

Historical Heritage of the Tamils (Dr.S.V.Subatamanian, Dr.K.D. Thirunavukarasu) (Published by : International Institute of Tamil
5.
Studies)
6. The Contribution of the Tamils to Indian Culture (Dr.M.Valarmathi)(Puplished by International Institute of Tamil Studies).
Keeladi – ‘Sangam City Civilzation on the banks of river Vaigai; (Jointly Published by: Department of Archaeology & Tamilnadu
7.
Text Book and Educational Services Corporation, Tamilnadu)
8. Studies in the History of India with Special Reference to Tamilnadu (dr.K.K.Pillay) (Published by : The Author)
9.

CO1 explain weaving and ceramic technology in tamil culture and tamil society. Understanding (K2)
CO2 Illustrate about the design and construction technology. Understanding (K2)
CO3 summarize about the manufacturing technology. Understanding (K2)
CO4 explain the agriculture and irrigation technology. Understanding (K2)
CO5 explain the significance of tamil in scientific and computing. Understanding (K2)

CO1 3 3 2 2 3
CO2 3 3 2 2 3
CO3 3 3 2 2 3
CO4 3 3 2 2 3
CO5 3 3 2 2 3

Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) % %
CAT1 40 60 100
CAT2 40 60 100
CAT3 40 60 100
ESE NA
22EIL31 – TRANSDUCERS AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY
Programme &
Branch
Preamble To infer the characteristics of various transducers and Perform various electrical measurements using
Instruments and Bridges.
Measurement of temperature using thermocouple, thermistor and resistance temperature detector and
1.
infer their I-O characteristics
Measurement of strain using strain gauge and load cell and infer their characteristics as resistance
2.
transducers.
(a) Measurement of displacement using inductive transducer and test its characteristics
3.
(b) Test the characteristics of DC potentiometer as resistance transducer
4. Measurement of speed using photoelectric tachometer and proximity sensor
(a) Test the characteristics of Hall effect transducers
5.
(b) Test the characteristics of Piezoelectric transducer.
6. Range extension for DC ammeter and Voltmeter.
Calibration of single phase Energy meter and LPF Wattmeter using Phantom loading and Verification with
7.
Trivector meter
8. Measurement of Current and Voltage using CT and PT
9. Measurement of Resistance using Wheatstone bridge and Kelvin double bridge
10. Measurement of Inductance and Capacitance using Anderson’s bridge and Schering bridge
Total:30

grasp and perform the measurements of different physical parameters using transducers Applying(K3),
CO1
and realize the characteristics Precision (S3)
Applying(K3),
CO2 follow the measurement of various electrical quantities using instruments
Precision (S3)
determine the unknown resistance, capacitance and inductance using various bridge Applying(K3),
CO3
circuits proficiently Precision (S3)

CO1 3 2 1 3 1 2 1 2 3 1 3 3
CO2 3 2 1 3 1 2 1 2 3 1 3 3
CO3 3 2 1 3 1 2 1 2 3 1 3 3
22EIL32 - ANALOG AND DIGITAL INTEGRATED CIRCUITS LABORATORY
Programme &
Branch
Preamble This course provides practical knowledge on Integrated circuits design for given specification. It enables to
design and verify analog, digital circuits using lCs and simulation software.
1. Design and Verification of Full adder and Full Subtractor circuits, JK Flip flop, D Flip flop,
2. Design and implementation of Binary to Gray and Gray to Binary code converters
3. Design and implementation of Encoder, Decoder and Multiplexers
4. Design and implementation of 4 – bit modulo counters
5. Design and implementation of 4-bit shift registers
6. Design and implementation of inverting and non-inverting amplifiers using operational amplifier
7. Design and implementation of Adder & Comparator circuits using operational amplifier
8. Design and implementation of Integrator and Differentiator circuits using operational amplifier
9. Implementation of NE/SE 555 timer in Astable and Monostable modes
10. Simulation of opamp based circuits Anadigam and Implementation in FPAA

Total:30
1. Lab Manual
2. Software: Anadigm tool

Applying(K3),
CO1 Design Combinational and Sequential digital circuits using ICs.
Precision (S3)
Applying(K3),
CO2 Design linear, non linear, data converters and wave shaping circuits using operational amplifier
Precision (S3)
Applying(K3),
CO3 Design circuits with IC555 timer and perform simulation with CAD tools
Precision (S3)

CO1 3 2 1 3 1 2 1 2 3 1 3 3
CO2 3 2 1 3 1 2 1 2 3 1 3 3
CO3 3 2 1 3 1 2 1 2 3 1 3 3
22EGL31 - COMMUNICATION SKILLS DEVELOPMENT LABORATORY

Programme &
All B.E./B.Tech Branches Sem. Category L T P Credit
Branch
Preamble This course is designed to impart necessary skills to listen, speak, read and write in order to obtain better
professional communication skills.
1. Self Introduction & Mock Interview
2. Job Application letter with Resume
3. Presentation: A Technical topic / Project report & a Case study
4. Situational Dialogues / Telephonic Conversations
5. Group Discussion
6. Reading Aloud
7. Listening Comprehension
8. Writing Company Profiles
9. Preparing reviews of a book/product/movie
10. Pronunciation Test
Total: 30
2. Orell Digital Language Lab Software

Understanding (K2),
CO1 enhance effective listening and reading skills
Imitation (S1)
Applying (K3),
CO2 acquire professional skills required for workplace/higher education
Naturalization (S5)
Applying (K3),
CO3 use English language skills effectively in various situations
Articulation (S4)
COs/
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
POs
CO1 2 3 3
CO2 2 2 2
CO3 2 2 2
22MAT42 - TRANSFORMS AND PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS
(Common to EEE & EIE Branches)
Programme &
BE & Electrical and Electronics Engineering Sem. Category L T P Credit
Branch
Preamble To provide the skills for handling discrete and continuous time signals by applying Fourier
transform and Z-Transform and impart knowledge in partial differential equations and express
functions in terms of Fourier series.
Unit – I Fourier Series: 9+3
Dirichlet’s conditions – General Fourier series – Change of interval – Odd and even functions – Half range Sine
series – Half range Cosine series – Harmonic analysis.
Unit – II Fourier Transform: 9+3
Fourier Integral theorem (without proof) – Fourier transform pair – Properties (without proof) – Transforms of simple
functions – Fourier Sine and Cosine transforms – Properties (without proof) – Convolution theorem and Parseval's
identity (Statement and applications only).
Unit – III Z –Transform: 9+3
Definition – Z-transform of some basic functions – Elementary properties – Inverse Z-transform: Partial fraction
method – Residue method – Convolution theorem – Applications of Z-transforms: Solution of difference equations.
Unit – IV Partial Differential Equations: 9+3
Formation of partial differential equations by elimination of arbitrary constants and arbitrary functions – Lagrange’s
linear equation – Solution of homogeneous linear partial differential equations of higher order with constant
coefficients.
Unit – V Applications of Partial Differential Equations: 9+3
Classification of second order quasi linear partial differential equations – Solutions of one dimensional wave equation
– One dimensional heat equation – Steady state solution of two dimensional heat equation (excluding insulated
edges).
TEXT BOOK:
1.
New Delhi, 2018.
REFERENCES:
1. Veerarajan T., “Transforms and Partial Differential Equations”, 3rd Edition, Tata Mc Graw Hill Education Pvt.
Ltd., New Delhi, 2013.
2. Erwin Kreyszig, “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, 10th Edition, John Wiley & Sons, Limited, 2019.
3. Grewal B S, “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, 44th Edition, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2015.
CO1 express the given function or data in terms of Fourier series. Applying (K3)
understand the concept of Fourier transform and its properties which will provide the
ability to formulate and solve physical problems in engineering.
CO3 possess knowledge of Z transform to analyze linear time invariant systems. Applying (K3)
CO4 formulate and solve higher order partial differential equations. Applying (K3)
apply Fourier series techniques in solving one and two dimensional heat flow problems
CO5 Applying (K3)
and one dimensional wave equations.

CO1 3 2 1 2
CO2 3 3 2 3
CO3 3 3 2
CO4 3 2 1 1
CO5 3 3 2 1

Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) % %
CAT1 10 30 60 100
CAT2 10 30 60 100
CAT3 10 30 60 100
ESE 10 30 60 100
22ITC41 - PROGRAMMING IN PYTHON

(Common to ECE, EEE, EIE, MTS Engineering branches )
Programme&
ECE,EEE,EIE,MTS Sem. Category L T P Credit
Branch
Prerequisites ProblemSolvingandProgramming in C 4 ES 3 0 2 4
Preamble This course introduces the core Python programming. It emphasizes developing Python programs with all data
types, functions, classes, objects and NumPy
Problem-solving strategies – program design tools –Types of errors – Testing and Debugging - Basics: Literals–variables and
identifiers – data types- input operation – comments – reserved words – indentation – Operators and Expressions–Decision
Control Statements: Introduction–conditional statement–iterative statements – Nested Loops–break, continue and pass
statements–elseinloops.
Unit – II Lists,Tuples and Dictionary: 9
Lists:Access, update, nested, cloning, operations, methods, comprehensions, looping- Tuple: Create, utility, access, update,delete,
operations, assignments, returning multiple values, nested tuples, index, and count method - Dictionary: Create, access, add and
modify, delete, sort, looping, nested, built-in methods–listvstuplevs dictionary.
Unit – III Strings and Regular Expressions: 9
Strings:Concatenation,append, multiply on strings–Immutable–formatting operator–Built-instring methods and functions–slice
operation–functions–operators–comparing –iterating –string module–Regular Expressions–match, search,sub, findall and finditer
functions–flag options.
Unit – IV Functions and Modules: 9
Functions: Introduction- definition–call–variable scope and lifetime – returnstatement–function arguments–lambda function–
documentation strings–programming practices recursive function - Modules: Modules–packages–standard library methods–
function redefinition.
Unit – V Object Orientation: 9
Class and Objects: Class and objects – class methods and self – constructor – class and object variables–destructor–public and
private data member.NumPy: NumPyArrays–Computationon NumPyArrays. MatplotLib:Lineplots–ScatterPlots

1. Programs using conditional and looping statements
2. Implementation of list and tuple operations
3. Implementation of dictionary operations

4. Perform various string operations
5. Use regular expressions for validating inputs
6. Demonstration of different types of functions and parameter passing

7. Develop programs using classes and objects
8. Perform computation on NumPyarrays
9. Draw different types of plots using Matplotlib
TEXT BOOK:
1. ReemaThareja.,“Python Programming using problem solving approach”,3 rd impression,Oxford University Press.,NewDelhi,

2017.
1. Nageswara Rao,“Core Python Programming”, 2ndEdition, Dream Tech Press, NewDelhi, 2018.
st
2. Jake Vander Plas,”Python Data Science Handbook Essential Tools for Working with Data”,O’Reillypublishers,1 Edition, 2016.

Applying(K3),
CO1 use basic Python constructs to build simple programs
Precision(S3)
Applying(K3),
CO2 apply list, tuple, and dictionary to handle a variety of data.
Precision(S3)
Applying(K3),
CO3 apply strings and regular expressions for searching and retrieval
Precision(S3)
Applying(K3),
CO4 solve the problems using functions and modules.
Precision(S3)
Applying(K3),
CO5 apply object-oriented concepts and perform basic data science operations using Python
Precision(S3)

P PO1 PO1 PSO
COs/POs PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO12 PSO2
O1 0 1 1
CO1 3 2 1 1
CO2 3 2 1 1
CO3 3 2 1 1
CO4 3 2 1 1
CO5 3 2 1 1

Test / Bloom’s Remembering Understandin Applying Analyzing Evaluating (K5) Creating
Total %
Category* (K1) % g (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % % (K6) %
1 15 7 1
CAT1 0 5 0
0
1 15 7 1
CAT2 0 5 0
0
1 15 7 1
CAT3 0 5 0
0
1 15 7 1
ESE 0 5 0
0
22EIT41 - MICROCONTROLLER AND ITS APPLICATIONS
Programme &
Branch
Prerequisites Digital Logic Circuits 4 PC 3 0 0 3
Preamble To get acquaintance with the architecture of 8085 processor and 8051 microcontroller, apply the embedded
programming concepts for interfacing peripherals with the controller and to implement the applications of
microcontrollers.
Unit – I 8085 Microprocessor: 9
Introduction to 8085 Microprocessor-Architecture-Pin configuration-Interrupts–Instruction Set –Addressing Modes–Timing Diagrams–
Memory Interfacing –Simple Assembly Language Programs for arithmetic operations.
Unit – II 8051 Microcontroller: 9
Introduction to 8051 Microcontroller- Architecture- Memory Organization- Special function registers – Program Counter – PSW
register –Stack - Instruction set-Addressing modes.
Unit – III 8051 Programming: 9
I/O Ports – Timer (Mode 1) / Counter– Serial Communication - Interrupt (Timer, Serial communication) – Programming in Embedded
C: I/O port programming- Timer programming-Counter programming-Serial port programming-Interrupt programming
Unit – IV Peripheral Interfacing with 8051: 9
Programming in Embedded C: Keypad- LCD – Sensors- A/D and D/A converters- DC Motor -Stepper motor – Servo motor.
Unit – V Applications of Microcontrollers(Block Diagram Approach): 9
Smart Card reader, Automated Meter Reading System, Washing machine, Speedometer, Healthcare monitoring systems, 3D
Printers, Smart Home automation system.
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
Senthil Kumar N., Saravanan M., Jeevananthan S., “Microprocessors and Microcontrollers”, 2 nd Edition, Oxford University
1.
Press, New Delhi, 2016.
REFERENCES:
Gaonkar R.S, “Microprocessor Architecture, Programming, and Applications with the 8085”, 6 th Edition, Prentice Hall of India,
1.
New Delhi, 2013.
Soumitra Kumar Mandal, “Microprocessors and Microcontrollers Architecture Programming and System Design 8085,8086
2.
and 8051”, 8th Edition, McGraw Hill Education (India) Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi,2013.
Muhammad Ali Mazidi, Janice GillispieMazidi, Rolin D. McKinlay , “The 8051 Microcontroller and Embedded Systems Using
3.
Assembly and C”, 2nd Edition, Pearson Education, New Delhi ,2013.
CO1 infer the basic concepts of 8085 microprocessor Understanding(K2)
CO2 summarize the basic concepts of 8051 microcontroller Understanding(K2)
CO3 write embedded c programs for 8051 Applying(K3)
CO4 interface peripheral devices with 8051 microcontroller Applying(K3)
CO5 interpret the applications of microcontroller Understanding(K2)

CO1 3 2 2 1 2 2
CO2 3 2 2 1 2 2
CO3 3 3 1 1 1 2 1 3 3
CO4 3 3 1 1 1 2 1 3 3
CO5 3 2 2 1 2 2

Total %
Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) %
CAT1 5 35 50 10 100
CAT2 5 25 35 35 100
CAT 3 5 25 35 35 100
ESE 5 25 35 35 100
22EIT42 - CONTROL SYSTEMS
Programme &
Branch
Preamble This course provides the concepts of the mathematical modeling, response and stability analysis of linear systems
in time and frequency domain
Unit – I Mathematical Modeling: 9+3
Open loop and closed loop systems-Derivation of transfer function models and state space models(phase variable): Electrical Systems
and Mechanical Systems with single and two degree of freedom, Electromechanical Systems: DC Motor - conversion of state model to
transfer function- Electrical Analogy of Mechanical Systems. Transfer function derivation using block diagram reduction and signal flow
graphs.
Unit – II Time Response of Systems: 9+3
Poles, Zeros and System Response-Type and Order of System -Significance of Test Signals-Step response analysis and
specifications of first order system and second order under damped System. Steady State Error and Error Constant –State Transition
Matrix- time domain solutions of state models of second order systems with impulse input using Laplace transform method.
Unit – III Stability Analysis in Time Domain: 9+3
Concepts of Stability - Pole Locations and Stability - Routh Hurwitz Criterion - Root Locus Technique: conditions – angle and
magnitude criterion – root locus construction –design of control loop gain.
Unit – IV Frequency Response of Systems: 9+3
Concept of Frequency Response, Frequency Response Analysis: Bode Plot and Polar Plot-gain margin and phase margin-deriving
transfer function model from bode plot-Stability analysis in Frequency Domain: Nyquist Stability Criterion.
Unit – V Compensators and Controllers in Time Domain: 9+3
Effect of addition of poles and zeros on second order system response and system stability - Need for Compensator - Ideal
Compensation on Time Response: P, PI, PD and PID controller - Design procedure of Lag and Lead Compensator via Root Locus.
TEXT BOOK:
1. Norman S. Nise," Control Systems Engineering", 7thEdition, Reprint, Wiley-India Publishers, New Delhi, 2022.
REFERENCES:
1. Nagrath I.J., Gopal M., “Control Systems Engineering”, 6th Edition, New Age International Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2017
2. Ogata K., “Modern Control Engineering”, 5th Edition, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2010.
CO1 derive mathematical models by identifying various components of the control system Applying (K3)
CO2 analyze transient and steady state response of first and second order systems Analyzing (K4)
CO3 examine the stability of the systems in time domain. Analyzing (K4)
CO4 analyze the frequency response of the systems. Analyzing (K4)
CO5 examine the performance of Compensators Analyzing (K4)

CO1 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 3 3
CO2 3 3 2 2 2 1 2 1 3 3
CO3 3 3 2 2 2 1 2 1 3 3
CO4 3 3 2 2 2 1 2 1 3 3
CO5 3 3 2 2 2 1 2 1 3 3

Total %
Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) %
CAT1 5 25 35 35 100
CAT2 5 25 35 35 100
ESE 5 25 35 35 100
22EIT43 - INDUSTRIAL INSTRUMENTATION I
Programme & B.E. & Electronics and Instrumentation

Engineering Sem. Category L T P Credit
Branch
Preamble This course imparts the knowledge of instruments used for the measurement of Temperature and Pressure with
their principles. It will also provide the methods for the measurement of Force, Torque, Speed, Acceleration and
Vibration.
Unit – I Temperature Measurement I: 9
Physical Effects utilized to measure Temperature – Temperature Scales – Mechanical Thermometers: Filled system Thermometers –
Metallic - Expansion Thermometers – Special Temperature Indicating Devices – Bulb Installations– Solid state temperature sensors
Unit – II Temperature Measurement II: 9
Electrical Thermometers: Resistance Thermometers – Thermistors – Thermocouples – Radiation Pyrometers. Fiber-optic
Temperature measurement systems – Ultrasonic Thermometers –Temperature switch.
Unit – III Pressure Measurement I: 9
Units of pressure – Mechanical Pressure Measurement: Manometers – Elastic type pressure gauges: Bourdon type– Metallic
Diaphragm – Capsule – Bellows. Electrical Methods of Pressure Measurement: Strain-Gauge – Capacitance – Potentiometric –
Resonant Wire – Piezoelectric – Magnetic– Optical.
Unit – IV Pressure Measurement II: 9
Vacuum sensors: Mechanical Vacuum Gauges: McLeod gauge – Thermal Vacuum Gauges: Knudsen gauge – Pirani gauge –
Thermocouple vacuum gauge – Ionisation Vacuum Gauges – Testing and Calibration of Pressure Detectors: Dead weight tester –
Pressure Switches.
Unit – V Force, Torque, Speed, Acceleration and Vibration: 9
Force(Weight) Measurement: Mechanical Load Cells – Elastic deflection force transducers – Torque Measurement: Rotary torque
sensors – Stationary Sensors – Torque measurement using proximity sensors – Speed Measurements: Stroboscopic tachometers –
AC tachometer generator – DC tachometer generator – Eddy current drag-cup tachometer – Acceleration Measurement: Seismic
acceleration pickups – variable reluctance accelerometers – Vibration measurement: Mechanical vibration sensors.
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
Krishnaswamy K. & Vijayachitra S. "Industrial Instrumentation", 2 nd Edition, New Age International Publishers, New Delhi,
1.
2019
REFERENCES:
1. Singh S. K.,” Industrial Instrumentation and Control”, 3rd Edition, Mcgraw Hill Education India, New Delhi, 2017.
2. Patranabis D., “Principles of Industrial Instrumentation”, 3 rd Edition, Mcgraw Hill Education India, New Delhi, 2017.
Understanding (K2)
CO1 explain the theory and working behind temperature measurement and mechanical thermometers
interpret the working of various types of electrical thermometers and determine the unknown Applying (K3)
CO2
temperature
Applying (K3)
CO3 interpret the theory and working of pressure measuring instruments for various industrial applications
Understanding (K2)
CO4 explain the construction and working of vacuum measuring instruments
summarize the various measuring parameters such as force, torque, speed, acceleration and Understanding (K2)
CO5
vibration for industrial applications

CO1 3 2 2 1 2 2
CO2 3 3 1 1 1 2 1 3 3
CO3 3 3 1 1 1 2 1 3 3
CO4 3 2 2 1 2 2
CO5 3 2 2 1 2 2

Total %
Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % % (K6) %
CAT1 20 50 30 100
CAT2 20 50 30 100
CAT3 20 50 30 100
ESE 20 50 30 100
* ±3% may be varied (CAT 1,2,3–50 marks & ESE– 100 marks)
22EIL41 - MICROCONTROLLER AND INTERFACING LABORATORY
Programme &
Branch
Preamble To incorporate practical exposure on programming and interfacing concepts in processor and controller and
implement programming using Verilog HDL
1. Arithmetic operations using 8085 microprocessor
2. Code conversion using 8085 microprocessor
Interfacing of Peripherals with 8051 microcontroller:
3. Interfacing of switches and relays
4. Interfacing of LED and Seven segment display
5. Interfacing of Keypad and LCD
6. Interfacing of ADC and DAC
7. Interfacing of DC motor
8. Interfacing of stepper motor
9. Design and Simulation of Combinational and Sequential Circuits using Verilog HDL
10. Design and Implementation of Digital circuits in FPGA using Verilog HDL
Total:30
2. V- RIDE Software
3. Xilinx Software

Applying(K3),
CO1 build programs using embedded C
Precision (S3)
Applying(K3),
CO2 design interfacing circuits with 8051 microcontroller
Precision (S3)
Analyzing(K4),
CO3 develop Verilog HDL programming for digital circuits and implement in FPGA
Precision (S3)

CO1 3 2 1 3 1 2 1 2 3 1 3 3
CO2 3 2 1 3 1 2 1 2 3 1 3 3
CO3 3 3 2 3 2 2 1 2 3 1 3 3
22EIL42- INSTRUMENTATION DESIGN AND CONTROL SYSTEMS LABORATORY
Programme &
Branch
Preamble To design signal conditioning circuits for various instrumentation systems and also to analyze the response of
composite systems in time and frequency domain.
1. Design of instrumentation amplifiers
2. Design of first order active filters using operational amplifiers.
3. Design of signal conditioning circuit for RTD
4. Design of signal conditioning circuit for strain gauge
5. Preparation of Piping and Instrumentation diagram , documentation of instrumentation project and project scheduling
6. Derivation of Transfer function of DC motor.
7. Time response analysis of first and second order systems.
8. State space analysis of second order systems using MATLAB.
9. Stability analysis in time and frequency domain using MATLAB.
10. Effect of P, PI and PID controller on time response.

Total:30
2. MATLAB User Manual

Develop signal conditioning circuits and prepare Piping and Instrumentation diagram for various Applying(K3),
CO1
process applications Precision S3)
Applying(K3),
CO2 derive the transfer function of the systems using the measured parameters
Precision S3)
Analyzing(K4),
CO3 analyze the response and stability in time and frequency domain.
Precision S3)

CO1 3 2 1 3 1 2 1 2 3 1 3 3
CO2 3 2 1 3 1 2 1 2 3 1 3 3
CO3 3 3 2 3 2 2 1 2 3 1 3 3
22GCL41 - PROFESSIONAL SKILLS TRAINING I
(Common to All BE/ BTech Engineering and Technology branches)
Programme &
All BE/ BTech Engineering and Technology branches Sem. Category L T P Credit
Branch
Prerequisites Nil 4 EC 0 0 80 2
Preamble This subject is to enhance the employability skills and to develop career competency
Unit – I Soft Skills – I : 20
Soft skills and its importance: Pleasure and pains of transition from an academic environment to work environment-Need for
change- Fear, stress and competition in the professional world-Importance of positive attitude- Self motivation and continuous
knowledge upgradation-Self-confidence. Professional grooming and practices: Basics of corporate culture-Key pillars of business
etiquette- Basics of etiquette-Introductions and greetings-Rules of the handshake, earning respect, business manners-Telephone
etiquette- Body Language.
Unit – II Quantitative Aptitude and Logical Reasoning – I: 30
Problem solving level I: Number System-LCM &HCF-Divisibility test-Surds and indices-Logarithms- Ratio-proportions and
variation-Partnership-Time speed and distance-Data interpretation-data representation. Logical reasoning: Family tree-
Deductions-Logical connectives-Binary logic Linear arrangements- Circular and complex arrangement
Unit – III Written Communication & Verbal Aptitude: 30
Writing Skills: Writing strategies and formats Importance of Résumés Writing a Cover letter -Responding to Job Advertisements
Professional e-mail Writing Responding to e-mails and business letters Technical Report writing Interpretation of Technical Data
(Transcoding) Writing One-page Essays. Verbal Aptitude Synonyms Antonyms Homonyms One word substitution Idioms and
Phrases Paired words Analogies Spelling test Cloze test using suitable verb forms using appropriate articles and prepositions;
Spotting Errors Sentence Correction and Formation Grammar Based questions (Transformation : Active-Passive & Direct-Indirect);
Rearranging Jumbled Sentences & Jumbled paragraphs, Identifying Facts, Inferences and Judgements statements
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
Edgar Thorpe and Showick Thorpe, “Objective English for Competitive Examination”, 6th Edition, Pearson India Education
1.
Services Pvt Ltd, 2017.
REFERENCES:
1. Stephen Bailey, “Academic Writing: A practical guide for students”, Routledge, New York, 2011.
Meenakshi Raman and Sangeeta Sharma. “Technical Communication- Principles and Practice”. 4th Edition, Oxford
2.
University Press, New Delhi, 2022.

develop the soft skills of learners to support them work efficiently in an organization as Applying (K3),
CO1
an individual and as a team Precision (S3)
Applying (K3),
CO2 solve real time problems using numerical ability and logical reasoning
Precision (S3)
Apply communication skills effectively to understand and deliver information in various Applying (K3),
CO3
written discourses grammatically with accuracy Precision (S3)

CO1 3 2 3 3 3 3 2
CO2 3 2 3 3 3 3 2
CO3 2 3 3 3 3 3 2
Test / Bloom’s Remembering Understanding Applying Analyzing Evaluating Creating (K6)
Total %
Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % %
CAT1 20 50 30 100
CAT2 50 50 100
CAT3 50 50 100
ESE NA
* ±3% may be varied (CAT 1,2,3 - 50 marks )
22EIT51 - INDUSTRIAL INSTRUMENTATION II
Programme &
Branch
Prerequisites Industrial Instrumentation I 5 PC 3 0 0 3
Preamble To impart the knowledge of instruments used for the measurement of flow and level with their principles and
also to provide the methods for the measurement of density, viscosity, humidity and moisture.
Unit – I Flow Measurement I: 9
Mechanical Flow Meters – Orifice Flow Meter – Venturi Tubes – Flow Nozzle – Dall Tube – Installation of Head Flow Meters – Pitot
Tube – Differential Pressure Transmitters - Quantity Meters -Inferential Flow Meters.
Unit – II Flow Measurement II: 9
Mass Flow Meters – Electrical Flow Meters: Electromagnetic Flow meter –Ultrasonic Flow Meters. Other Types of Flow Meters:
Vortex Shedding Flow Meter – Cross correlation flow meter. Solid flow Measurement – Flow Switches – Flow Meter Calibration –
Flow Meter Selection.
Unit – III Level Measurement: 9
Float Type Level Measurement – Boiler Drum Level Measurement- Weight based Level Measurement – Air purge system –
Electrical Methods: Resistance Tapes – Capacitance Probes – Radiometric Level Detection and Measurement –Ultrasonic
Sensors – Level Switches.
Unit – IV Density and Viscosity: 9
Measurement of Density: Displacement and Float Type Densitometers – Hydrostatic Densitometer – Ultrasonic and sonic
densitometers – Radiation densitometers – Thermal Conductivity Density Gauges. Measurement of Viscosity: Capillary
Viscometers – Efflux Cup Viscometers – Float Viscometers.
Unit – V Humidity and Moisture: 9
Measurement of Humidity: Dry and Wet bulb Psychrometers - Hair Hygrometers – Dew point Hygrometers – Electrolytic
Hygrometers. Measurement of Moisture in Gases and Liquids: Capacitance Hygrometer - Piezoelectric Hygrometer - Infrared
Absorption Hygrometer – Measurement of Moisture in Solids.
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
Krishnaswamy K., & Vijayachitra S., "Industrial Instrumentation", 2nd Edition, New Age International Publishers, New
1.
Delhi, 2019.
REFERENCES:
1. Singh S. K., ‘Industrial Instrumentation and Control’, 3rd Edition, McGraw Hill Education India, New Delhi, 2017.
2. Patranabis D., ‘Principles of Industrial Instrumentation’, 3rd Edition, McGraw Hill Education India, New Delhi, 2017.
CO1 determine the flow rate using various types of mechanical flow meters Applying (K3)
examine the flow through mass type flow meter, electrical type flow meter and infer about
CO2 Applying(K3)
calibration and selection of flow meter.
CO3 determine the fluid level using various types of level measuring instruments Applying(K3)
CO4 illustrate the construction and working of density and viscosity measuring instruments Understanding(K2)
CO5 interpret the construction and working of humidity and moisture measuring instruments Understanding(K2)

CO1 3 2 1 1 1 2 1 3 3
CO2 3 2 1 1 1 2 1 3 3
CO3 3 2 1 1 1 2 1 3 3
CO4 3 1 1 2 2
CO5 3 1 1 2 2

Total %
Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) %
CAT1 20 50 30 100
CAT2 20 50 30 100
CAT3 20 50 30 100
ESE 20 50 30 100
22EIT52 - PROCESS CONTROL
Programme &
Branch
Prerequisites Control Systems 5 PC 3 0 0 3
Preamble This Course enhances the students to apply the concepts of process modeling with transfer function approach
and empirical approach. The controller designs, tuning and final control elements with multi-loop control are
discussed.
Unit – I Process Modeling and Characteristics: 9
Need for automatic process Control - Process control terminology - Mathematical modeling of process: First order level, thermal and
pressure process - Second order interacting and non-interacting systems: Liquid level process - Processes with inverse response:
Boiler drum level control. Process Characteristics: Continuous and Batch process - Self regulation: CSTR with cooling jacket - Servo
and Regulatory operations.
Unit – II Empirical Modeling: 9
Model development using Linear or non-linear regression: Model building procedure-Linear regression-Non-linear regression.
Graphical fitting of first-order and second-order models using step tests: Graphical techniques for second- order models-Regression
of Step Response data- Approximation of Higher-Order Systems.
Unit – III Controller Characteristics and Tuning: 9
Controller modes: Two position mode, Floating mode, proportional, integral and derivative modes, P+I, P+D, P+I+D modes-
Electronic PID controller- Evaluation criteria-Controller Tuning: Process reaction curve method- Ziegler-Nichols method- Damped
oscillation method-Frequency response method of tuning.
Unit – IV Final Control Elements: 9
Signal conversions: I/P converter - Actuators: Electric and Pneumatic type -Valve positioner – Characteristics of control valves -
Valve bodies - Control valve sizing - Cavitations and Flashing - Selection of control valves.
Unit – V Multi-loop Control: 9
Feed Forward control - Cascade control - Ratio control - Selective control systems - Split-Range control - Inferential control -
Introduction to multivariable control. Case studies: Boiler, Reactor, Distillation Column.
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
Krishnaswamy K.," Process Control", 2nd Edition(Reprint), New Age International (P) Ltd., Publishers, New Delhi, 2015 for
1.
Unit 1,3,4 and 5.
Dale E. Seborg, Duncan A. Mellichamp, Thomas F. Edgar, and Francis J. Doyle, “Process Dynamics and Control”, 4 th
2.
Edition, John Wiley and Sons, USA, 2016 for Unit 2.
REFERENCES:
1. Surekha Bhanot, “Process Control: Principles and Applications”, 4th Edition, Oxford University Press, United Kingdom, 2017.
Wayne Bequette. B, “Process Control: Modeling, Design, and Simulation”,2 nd Edition, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi
2.
2013.
George Stephanopoulos, “Chemical Process Control - An Introduction to Theory and Practice”, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall of
3.
India, New Delhi, 2016.
CO1 develop mathematical modeling for various processes Applying (K3)
CO2 determine the real time models using empirical modeling Applying (K3)
CO3 determine the controller gains and tuning methods for various applications Applying (K3)
CO4 explain the control valve accessories and its operational characteristics Understanding (K2)
CO5 apply the concepts of multi-loop control to various applications Applying (K3)

CO1 3 2 1 1 1 2 1 3 3
CO2 3 2 1 1 1 2 1 3 3
CO3 3 2 1 1 1 2 1 3 3
CO4 3 1 2 1 2 2
CO5 3 2 1 1 1 2 1 3 3

Total %
Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) %
CAT1 10 30 60 100
CAT2 10 30 60 100
CAT3 10 40 50 100
ESE 10 30 60 100
22EIT53 - DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING
Programme &
Branch
Preamble To impart the fundamental knowledge and applications of Digital Signal Processing.
Unit – I Continuous and Discrete Time Signals: 9+3
Introduction-Classification- Analog to Digital conversion- Sampling – Aliasing - Signal representation: step, ramp, parabolic,
sinusoidal and exponential-Periodical signals-Odd and Even signals-Energy and Power signals - Signal transformations-
Trigonometric form of Fourier series of periodical signals in
continuous and discrete domain.
Unit – II Continuous and Discrete Time Systems: 9+3
Classification of systems: static and dynamic -time variant and invariant – linear and nonlinear - stable and unstable- causal and
non causal-recursive and non recursive. Relation between Laplace and Z transform-Response analysis of linear systems with
impulse and step input in continuous and discrete domain using Laplace and Z transform-Linear and Circular convolution
Unit – III Transforms: 9+3
Fourier transform of aperiodical signals in continuous and discrete domain- Parseval’s theorem-Discrete Time Fourier Transform-
Discrete Fourier Transform –Fast Fourier Transform – Decimation in Time FFT algorithm – Decimation in Frequency FFT algorithm
– IDFT using FFT.
Unit – IV FIR and IIR Filters: 9+3
FIR Filter :Need, advantages and disadvantages of digital filters- Design of FIR filter (Low Pass Filter only) using windowing
techniques (Rectangular, Hanning and Hamming) – Location of zeros of FIR filter - Linear phase realization of FIR filter
IIR Filter : Design of analog IIR filter (Low Pass Filter only) –Mapping techniques from s domain to z domain : Impulse invariant,
Bilinear Transformation --Design of digital IIR filter using Bilinear Transformation technique –Comparison of FIR and IIR filters-
Direct form realization of IIR filter.
Unit – V Finite Word Length Effect and Digital Signal Processor: 9+3
Finite Word Length Effect: Introduction-Digital representation of numbers-Binary number system-Fixed point number
representation – Floating point number representation-Fixed point quantization errors-Overflow-Limit cycle oscillations-Coefficient
quantization- Coefficient quantization of FIR filters.
Digital Signal Processor: Architecture of Digital Signal Processor-Selection of Digital Signal Processor-Addressing modes-On Chip
peripherals – TMS320C6748 DSP development kit - Integrated development environment.
TEXT BOOK:
Esakkirajan S., Veerakumar T., and Badri N Subudhi, ”Digital Signal Processing”,1 st Edition, Tata McGraw hill, New
1.
Delhi,2021
REFERENCES:
John G. Proakis & Dimitris G. Manolakis., “Digital Signal Processing: Principles, Algorithms and Applications”, 4 th Edition,
1.
Pearson Prentice Hall, New Delhi, 2014.
Rodger Ziemer, William Tranter & D. Fannin, “Signals and Systems: Continuous and Discrete”, 4th Edition, Pearson,
2.
New Delhi, 1998.
3. Salivahanan S. “Digital Signal Processing”, 4th Edition, Tata McGraw Hill , New Delhi, 2020.
CO1 examine continuous and discrete time signals Applying (K3)
CO2 examine continuous and discrete time systems Applying (K3)
CO3 apply Fourier transform to determine the frequency response of LTI discrete system Applying (K3)
CO4 design and realize FIR and IIR filters Applying (K3)
CO5 examine the effect of word length and role of DSP Processor Applying (K3)

CO1 3 2 1 1 1 2 1 3 3
CO2 3 2 1 1 1 2 1 3 3
CO3 3 2 1 1 1 2 1 3 3
CO4 3 2 1 1 1 2 1 3 3
CO5 3 2 1 1 1 2 1 3 3

Total %
Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % %
CAT1 5 20 75 100
CAT2 5 20 75 100
CAT3 5 20 75 100
ESE 5 15 80 100
22EIT54 - VLSI SYSTEMS
Programme &
Branch
Prerequisites Digital Logic Circuits 5 PC 3 0 0 3
Preamble To impart the knowledge on MOS transistor characteristics, fabrication, programming in Verilog Hardware
Description Language and testing of ICs.
Unit – I MOS Transistor Theory: 9
MOS Transistor Theory: NMOS enhancement transistor – PMOS enhancement transistor – Threshold voltage – Body effect.MOS
transistor switches. Basic D.C. equations – Second order effects: Threshold voltage – Body effect – Sub threshold region –Channel
length modulation – Mobility variation – Fowler- Nordheim tunneling – Drain punch through – Hot electron effect.
Unit – II CMOS Logic and Circuit Design: 9
CMOS Logic: Inverter – Combinational logic – NAND gate – NOR gate – Compound gates –Multiplexers – Memory – Latches and
registers. Complementary CMOS inverter - DC characteristics – βn/βp ratio, Noise margin. Switching characteristics: Fall time –
Rise time – Delay time. Power dissipation for CMOS logic: Static dissipation – Dynamic dissipation – Short circuit dissipation.
Layout design rules and Stick diagram for inverter, NAND and NOR.
Unit – III CMOS Fabrication Technology: 9
Basic CMOS technology: N-Well CMOS process – P-Well process – Twin tub process – Silicon on Insulator. Latchup: Physical
origin of latchup – Latchup triggering – Latchup prevention – Internal latchup prevention techniques –I/O latchup prevention. FPGA:
Programmable Logic – Programmable Logic structures – Programmable Interconnect – Xilinx Programmable Gate Arrays – Design
flow.
Unit – IV Verilog HDL: 9
Typical design flow, Basic concepts: Lexical conventions – Data types, Modules and Ports, Gate level modeling, Dataflow
modeling: Continuous assignment, Behavioral modeling: Structured procedure – Procedural assignments. Switch level modeling:
MOS switches – CMOS switches – Bidirectional switches. Implementation of logic using Verilog HDL: Half Adder, Full Adder,
Ripple Carry Adder, Multiplexer, D-Flip-Flop.
Unit – V CMOS Testing and Verification: 9
Introduction: Logic Verification, Debugging, Manufacturing Test- Manufacturing test principles: Fault Models , Observability,
Controllability , Repeatability , Survivability , Fault Coverage Automatic Test Pattern Generation (ATPG). Design strategies for test:
Built in Self Test (BIST).
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
Neil Weste, & David Harris, “CMOS VLSI Design-A circuits & System Perspective” , 4th Edition, Pearson education,
1.
New Delhi,2022 for Units 1,2,3 and 5.
Palnitkar Samir, " Verilog HDL: Guide to Digital Design and synthesis", 2nd Edition, Pearson Education, New Delhi,
2.
2021 for Unit 4.
REFERENCES:
1. Pucknell, Douglas A.,& Eshragian K., “Basic VLSI Design”, 3 rd Edition, PHI Learning, New Delhi,2012.
2. Wayne wolf , “FPGA Based System Design”, Prentice Hall of India, CDR Edition, New Delhi,2004
Sung Mo Kang, Yousf Leblebici & Chulwoo Kim, “CMOS Digital Integrated circuits, Analysis and Design”4 th edition,
3.
McGraw Hill Education, New Delhi, 2019.
CO1 examine the characteristics and the second order effects in designing MOSFET Applying (K3)
CO2 discuss the CMOS logics and its characteristic for different logics Applying (K3)
CO3 discuss the various fabrication techniques for chip development Applying (K3)
CO4 develop programming for VLSI systems using Verilog Hardware Description Language Applying (K3)
CO5 explain the testing process involved in chip design. Understanding (K2)

CO1 3 2 1 1 1 1 3 3
CO2 3 2 1 1 1 1 3 3
CO3 3 2 1 1 1 1 3 3
CO4 3 2 1 1 1 1 3 3
CO5 3 1 1 2 2

Total %
Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) %
CAT1 30 20 50 100
CAT2 10 45 45 100
CAT3 10 45 45 100
ESE 10 40 50 100
22EIL51 - INDUSTRIAL INSTRUMENTATION LABORATORY
Programme &
Branch
Prerequisites Industrial Instrumentation I & II 5 PC 0 0 2 1
Preamble To measure various industrial parameters such as flow, level, temperature, and infer the characteristics

Measurement of flow rate and comparison of the characteristics of the following flow meters.
1.
a) Orifice b) Electro Magnetic flow meters
Measurement of flow rate and comparison of the characteristics of the following flow meters.
2.
a) Turbine Flow Meter b) Ultrasonic flow meter
a) Measurement of Pressure Gauges using Deadweight Tester
3.
b) Measurement of Vacuum Pressure using McLeod Gauge
a) Measurement of torque and angle of the given cantilever beam
4.
b) Measurement of pH, Conductivity, Turbidity and TDS in different test samples
a)Measurement of level in Linear Tanks using Ultrasonic level Transmitter
5.
b)Measurement of level in Non- Linear Tanks using Differential Pressure Transmitter
6. Calibration of Safety Relief Valves and DPT with HART Communicator
7. Measurement of level and pressure in linear tank using optical sensor
a) Control of kettle Temperature using Temperature switch
8. b) Control of drum pressure using Pressure switch
c) Control of flow process system using Flow switch
9. Measurement of non-electrical parameters of a person
10. Measurement of Bio-potential parameters of a person

Total:30

1. Industrial instrumentation Laboratory Manual

Applying (K3),
CO1 measure the various industrial process parameter using appropriate sensing meters
Precision (S3)
Applying (K3),
CO2 calibrate the various industrial instruments
Precision (S3)
Applying (K3),
CO3 measure the electrical and non electrical human physiological parameters
Precision (S3)

CO1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 2 3 1 2 2 1 3 3 3
CO3 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 3 3
22EIL52 - PROCESS CONTROL LABORATORY
Programme &
Branch
Preamble This laboratory gives a practical exposure to the students to analyze the characteristics of level,
temperature, pressure and flow processes. Selected multi-loop control systems and characteristics of
control valve are experimented.
1. Empirical modeling of non-interacting and interacting second order system
2. Closed loop analysis of flow process with servo and regulatory control
3. Closed loop analysis of temperature process with servo and regulatory control
4. Closed loop analysis of pressure process with servo and regulatory control
5. Tuning of controller parameters for temperature process
6. Response of ratio control for the pressure process
7. Response of feed forward control of liquid level system
8. Response of Cascade control of Continuous Stirred Tank Reactor
9. Characteristics of control valves (Quick opening valve, Linear valve, Equal percentage valve)
10. Empirical modeling of single conical tank system

Total:30

Analyzing (K4),
CO1 analyze the response of different control schemes in process applications
Precision (S3)
Analyzing (K4),
CO2 analyze the controller parameters for optimal control of temperature process
Precision (S3)
Analyzing (K4),
CO3 demonstrate the characteristics of pneumatic control valve
Precision (S3)

CO1 3 3 2 3 1 2 1 2 3 1 3 3
CO2 3 3 2 3 1 2 1 2 3 1 3 3
CO3 3 3 2 3 1 2 1 2 3 1 3 3
22GCL51 - PROFESSIONAL SKILLS TRAINING II
(Common to All BE/ BTech Engineering and Technology branches)
Programme &
All BE/ BTech Engineering and Technology branches Sem. Category L T P Credit
Branch
Preamble This subject is to enhance the employability skills and to develop career competency
Unit – I Soft Skills – II : 20
Group discussions: Advantages of group discussions-Structured GD- Team work: Value of team work in organizations- Definition
of a team, why team-Elements of leadership, disadvantages of a team, stages of team formation- Group development activities.
Facing an interview: Foundation in core subject- industry orientation / knowledge about the company- professional personality-
Communication skills-Activities before Interview, upon entering interview room, during the interview and at the end Mock
interviews.
Unit – II Quantitative Aptitude and Logical Reasoning – II: 30
Problem solving level II: Money related problems-Mixtures-Symbol base problem-Clocks and calendars-Simple-linear-quadratic
and polynomial equations-Special, equations-Inequalities-Sequence and series-Set theory-Permutations and combinations-
Probability-Statistics-Data sufficiency- Geometry-Trigonometry-Heights and distances-Co-ordinate geometry-Mensuration. Logical
reasoning: Conditionality and grouping-Sequencing and scheduling- Selections-Networks:-Codes; Cubes-Venn diagram in logical
reasoning- Quant based reasoning-Flaw detection- Puzzles-Cryptarithms.
Unit – III Reading & Speaking Skills: 30
Reading: Reading comprehension– Effective Reading strategies – Descriptive, Inferential, & Argumentative reading passages –
Identifying and locating factual information within a text – global reading/skimming for general understanding – selective
comprehension / scanning for specific information – detailed comprehension / intensive reading – understanding the development
of an argument – identifying the writer’s attitude and opinions – Reading news articles in business magazines, newspapers –
Reading notices and book reviews –Interpreting graphic data & Advertisements. Speaking: Mock Interviews –Self-Introduction –
Sharing of Real Time Experience; Conversational Practices –Role Play – Short Talks / TED Talks –Extempore; Giving a
Presentation on Various Topics – Technical / Non-Technical Topics – Project Review Presentation – Oratory and Effective Public
Speaking; Pair Discussion – Group Discussion – The process of Group Discussion – Strategies to be adopted – Skills Assessed –
Telephonic Conversations & Skills – Negotiating Skills.
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
Edgar Thorpe and Showick Thorpe, “Objective English for Competitive Examination”, 6th Edition, Pearson India Education
1.
Services Pvt Ltd, 2017.
REFERENCES:
1. Aruna Koneru, “Professional Speaking Skills,” Oxford University Press India, New Delhi, 2015.
2. Thorpe, Showick and Edgar Thorpe, “Winning at Interviews,” 5th edition, Pearson Education, India, 2013.
3. Rizvi, Ashraf M, “Effective Technical Communication,” 2nd Edition, McGraw Hill Education India, 2017.
develop the soft skills of learners to support them work efficiently in an organization as an Applying (K3), Precision
CO1
individual and as a team (S3)
Applying (K3), Precision
CO2 solve real time problems using numerical ability and logical reasoning
(S3)
Applying (K3), Precision
CO3 apply reading and speaking skills effectively for various academic and professional purposes
(S3)

CO1 3 2 0 0 0 3 3 0 3 0 3 2
CO2 3 2 0 0 0 3 3 0 3 0 3 2
CO3 2 0 0 0 3 3 0 3 3 3 3

Total %
Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) %
CAT1 20 40 40 100
CAT2 50 50 100
CAT3 50 50 100
ESE NA
* ±3% may be varied (CAT 1,2 & 3 – 50 marks )
22EIT61 - INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION USING PLC AND DCS
Programme &
Branch
Prerequisites Process Control 6 PC 3 0 0 3
Preamble To control industrial processes without manual intervention with the use of control devices such as
PLC/DCS/SCADA etc. and also to discuss the logic and control systems with its hardware and software
modules for implementing monitoring and control systems
Unit – I Programmable Logic Controllers (PLCs): 9
Programmable Logic Controllers - Parts of a PLC - Principles of operation - PLCs versus Computers - PLC size and application –
Discrete I/O modules – Analog I/O modules – Special I/O modules – The Central Processing Unit(CPU) –Memory types –
Programming terminal devices – Human Machine Interfaces(HMIs). Basics of PLC Programming: Program scan – PLC
programming languages - Entering the ladder diagram
Unit – II PLC Programming: 9
Programming timers: On-Delay timer instruction – Off-Delay timer instruction – Retentive timer - Programming counters: Counter
instructions – Up counter – Down counter – Cascading counters – Combining counter and timer functions - Program control
instructions: Master control reset instruction – Jump instruction - Subroutine Functions. Data manipulation instructions: Data
manipulation – Data compare instructions. Sequencer Instructions.
Unit – III Distributed Control Systems: 9
Evolution of Distributed Control Systems: Emergence of the Distributed Control System architecture. Local control unit architecture:
Basic elements of a microprocessor based controller – Functional blocks: An introduction. Security design issues for the local control
unit: Redundant controller designs.
Unit – IV DCS Operator Interfaces: 9
Operator interfaces: Introduction – Low level operator interface – High level operator interface: Architectural alternatives, Hardware
elements in the operator interface, Operator displays. Engineering interfaces: Engineering interface requirements.
Unit – V PLC and DCS Applications: 9
Process control and Data Acquisition systems: Closed loop container filling process - ON/OFF liquid heating system- PLC control of
a PID loop. DCS applications: Power Plants- Cement plants – Pulp and Paper plants – Introduction and architecture of SCADA.
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
1. Frank D. Petruzella, “Programmable Logic Controllers", 5th Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2019.
REFERENCES:
1. Michael P.Lukas, “Distributed Control System”, Van Nostrand Reinhold Co., Canada 1986.
John W.Webb, Ronald A.Reis. “Programmable Logic Controllers: Principles and Applications”, 5th Edition, PHI Learning Pvt.
2.
Ltd., New Delhi, 2013.
3. Stuart A. Boyer, “SCADA: Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition”, 4 th Edition, ISA Press, USA, 2009.
explain the hardware components and I/O modules and operation of Programmable Logic
Controllers
CO2 apply PLC timer, counter, control and data manipulation instructions Applying (K3)
CO3 describe the architecture of Distributed Control Systems Understanding (K2)
CO4 choose the operator Interfaces and displays in DCS Applying (K3)
CO5 apply PLC and DCS for select applications Applying (K3)

CO1 3 1 1 1 2 2
CO2 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 3 3
CO3 3 1 1 1 2 2
CO4 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 3 3
CO5 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 3 3

Total %
Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % %
CAT1 10 60 30 100
CAT2 10 60 30 100
CAT3 10 20 70 100
ESE 10 40 50 100
22EIT62 - INDUSTRY 4.0 WITH INDUSTRIAL IoT
Programme &
Branch
Preamble To transform the industrial processes through the integration of modern technologies such as sensors,
communication, and computational processing
Unit – I Introduction to Industrial IoT and Industry 4.0: 9
Introduction - IoT Background and History, IIoT key technologies, IoT and IIoT similarities and differences – Innovations and the
IIoT – Intelligent devices – Key opportunities and benefits: Digital and human workforce – Industrial Internet use-cases - Industry
4.0: Characteristics and design principles.
Unit – II IIoT Architectures: 9
IIoT Reference Architecture – Industrial Internet Architecture Framework – Five Functional domains – Three tier architecture
topology – Connectivity: Key system characteristics, Connectivity security and functional characteristics – Functions of
communication layer – Overview of Predictive Maintenance Architecture.
Unit – III IIoT WAN Technologies and Protocols: 9
Need of Protocols – Legacy Industrial protocols – Modern Communication protocols: Industrial Ethernet, Encapsulated Field Bus,
Standard Ethernet. IIoT device Low-Power WAN optimized technologies for M2M: SigFox, LoRaWAN, nWave, Dash7, Ingenue
RPMA, Low Power Wi-Fi, LTE Category-M, Weightless, Millimeter Radio.
Unit – IV Industrial IoT Security and Governance: 9
Introduction – Security threats and vulnerabilities of IoT – Industrial challenges – Evolution of Cyber attacks: cyber attacks and
solutions – Strategic principles of cyber security – cyber security measures - Industrial IoT security architecture: IIoT architecture
patterns – four Tier IIoT security model- Management risks with IIoT.
Unit – V Industrial IoT Analytics and Applications: 9
Software Defined Networks: Difference between SDN and NFV – Cloud and Fog - Big Data and Analytics in IIoT. Recent
Technological components of Robots: Industrial Robotic applications – Industrial application of AR: Maintenance, assembly,
operation and training.
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
1. Alasdair Gilchrist, “Industry 4.0: The Industrial Internet of Things”, 1st Edition, Apress Media, NewYork, 2016.
REFERENCES:
Alp Ustundag and EmreCevikcan, “Industry 4.0: Managing the Digital Transformation”, Springer series in Advanced
1.
Manufacturing, Switzerland, 2018.
DimitriosSerpanos and Marilyn Wolf, “Internet-of-Things (IoT) Systems, Architectures, Algorithms, Methodologies”,
2.
Springer International Publishing AG, Switzerland, 2018.
CO1 explore the basics of industrial internet of things Understanding (K2)
CO2 interpret the concepts of various architectures and components Understanding (K2)
CO3 design and implement protocols and sensors for IIoT Applying (K3)
CO4 impart the knowledge of IIoT security layers Understanding (K2)
CO5 apply IIoT in real time Industrial applications Applying (K3)

CO1 3 1 1 1 1
CO2 3 1 1 2 2
CO3 3 2 1 1 1 1 3 3
CO4 3 1 1 2 2
CO5 3 2 1 1 1 1 3 3

Total %
Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) %
CAT1 15 85 100
CAT2 10 50 40 100
CAT3 5 35 60 100
ESE 10 50 40 100
22EIL61 - PLC AND DCS LABORATORY
Programme &
Branch
Prerequisites Industrial Automation using PLC and DCS 6 PC 0 0 2 1
Preamble The PLC and DCS laboratory is a crucial component, where students are trained in the design,
implementation, and maintenance of industrial control systems using Programmable Logic Controllers
(PLCs) and Distributed Control Systems (DCS). Through hands-on experience, students will learn to
program, simulate and troubleshoot these systems, preparing them for careers in the automation and
control industry.
1. Implementation of a simple on/off control of a traffic light system using PLC.
2. Control of speed and direction of a motor using PLC and SCADA
3. Counting and sorting objects on a conveyor belt using PLC and HMI
4. Control of the timing of a filling process operation using PLC and SCADA
5. Implementation of a sequential control of a process using PLC and SCADA
6. Implementation of pressure and flow control system using DCS.
7. Implementation of an alarm and notification system for a process using DCS.
8. Implementation of a cascade control level system using DCS.
9. Implementation of Packaging Line Control using Factory I/O software
10. Development of simple logic circuits with digital inputs and outputs using Phoenix Contact PLC.
Total:30
2. Next-Gen PLC Training - Factory I/O (factoryio.com)
3. PLCnext Technology | PHOENIX CONT https://www.phoenixcontact.com/en-pc/industries/plcnext-technology ACT

Applying (K3)
CO1 develop Industrial automation applications using PLC
Precision (S3)
Applying (K3)
CO2 develop Industrial automation applications using DCS
Precision (S3)
Applying (K3)
CO3 develop advanced industrial automation application using factory I/O and Phoenix Contact
Precision (S3)

CO1 3 3 2 3 2 2 1 2 3 1 3 3
CO2 3 3 2 3 2 2 1 2 3 1 3 3
CO3 3 3 2 3 2 2 1 2 3 1 3 3
22EIL62 - VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION AND INDUSTRIAL IoT LABORATORY
Programme &
Branch
Preamble To impart the practical knowledge on LabVIEW programming and industrial Internet of Things concept.

1. Programming with basic functions
2. Programming with FOR Loop, While Loop, Local and Global variables
3. Programming with Array, Cluster and Structures
4. Data acquisition and analysis using DAQ.
5. Data acquisition and analysis using NI-ELVIS.
6. Monitoring data from Wireless Temperature Transmitter using LoRA and IoT 2040
7. Monitoring and Controlling of PLC from cloud platform through IoT 2040
8. Interfacing and transfer of data from LoRa nodes to LoRa Gateway
9. Interfacing Factory I/O and PLCnext with LoRa Gateway using MQTT
10. Emergency Start / Stop of Industrial Machines using LoRa IoT sensors
Total:30
1. LabVIEW Software user Manual.
2. Siemens S7 1200 PLC and IoT 2040 User Manual
3. PLCnext User Manual

Applying (K3)
CO1 create LabVIEW programs for real time applications
Precision (S3)
Applying (K3)
CO2 develop Industrial automation applications using PLC and IoT gateway
Precision (S3)
Applying (K3)
CO3 develop advanced industrial automation application using factory I/O and Phoenix PLCnext
Precision (S3)

CO1 3 3 2 3 2 2 1 2 3 1 3 3
CO2 3 3 2 3 2 2 1 2 3 1 3 3
CO3 3 3 2 3 2 2 1 2 3 1 3 3
22EIP61 - PROJECT WORK I
Programme &
Branch

Creating (K6)
formulate a problem with proper objectives to meet the need of the Society and Industry after
CO1 Characterization (A5)
detailed literature review
Articulation (S4)
Creating (K6)
design the Model considering all mathematical calculations meeting required standards
prescribe by professional bodies
Articulation (S4)
Evaluating (K5)
select proper instruments for the designed model and develop the model with proper project and
finance management and demonstrate the proper working of the model
Articulation (S4)
Evaluating (K5)
articulate the project report and presentations with neat presentation incorporating all
parameters
Articulation (S4)
Evaluating (K5)
CO5 contribute individually and in team for the development and final working of the project Characterization (A5)
Articulation (S4)

CO1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
22GCT31- UNIVERSAL HUMAN VALUES
Programme&
Branch
Preamble To make the student to know what they ‘really want to be’ in their life and profession, understand the
meaning of happiness and prosperity for a human being. Also to facilitate the students to understanding of
harmony at all the levels of human living, and live accordingly
Need and Basic Guidelines of Value Education – Content and Process of Value Education – Self Exploration – purpose of self-
Exploration – Content and Process of Self exploration – Natural Acceptance – Realization and Understanding – Basic Human
Aspirations – Continuous Happiness and Prosperity – Exploring Happiness and Prosperity – Basic Requirement for Fulfillment of
Human Aspirations – Relationships – Physical Facilities – Right Understanding.
Unit – II Harmony in the Self and Body: 6
Human Being and Body – Understanding Myself as Co–existence of Self (‘I’) and Body, Needs of the Self and Body, Activities in
the Self and Body, Self (‘I’) as the Conscious Entity, the Body as the Material Entity – Exercise – Body as an Instrument– Harmony
in the Self (‘I) – Understanding Myself – Harmony with Body.
Unit – III Harmony in the Family and Society: 6
Harmony in the Family – Justice – Feelings (Values) in Human Relationships – Relationship from Family to Society – Identification
of Human Goal – Five dimensions of Human Endeavour.
Unit – IV Harmony in Nature and Existence: 6
Order of Nature – Interconnectedness – Understanding the Four order – Innateness – Natural Characteristic – Basic Activity –
Conformance – Introduction to Space – Co–existence of units of Space – Limited and unlimited – Active and No–activity –
Existence is Co–existence.
Unit – V Implications of the above Holistic Understanding of Harmony on Professional Ethics: 6
Values in different dimensions of Human Living – Definitiveness of Ethical Human Conduct –Implications of Value based Living –
Identification of Comprehensive Human Goal – Humanistic Education – Universal Human Order – Competence and Issues in
Professional Ethics.
Total:30
TEXT BOOK:
Gaur R.R., Sangal R., Bagaria G.P., “A Foundation Course in Human Values and Professional Ethics”, 1 st edition, Excell
1.
Books Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2016.
REFERENCES:
1. Ivan Illich, “Energy & Equity”, The Trinity Press, USA, 1974.
2. Schumacher E.F., “Small is Beautiful: a study of economics as if people mattered”, Britain, 1973.

restate the meaning of happiness and prosperity and do a correct appraisal of the current Applying (K3)
CO1
scenario in the society
distinguish between the Self and the Body, understand the meaning of Harmony in the Self, the Applying (K3)
CO2
Co–existence of Self and Body
infer the value of harmonious relationship based on trust, respect and other naturally acceptable Applying (K3)
CO3
feelings in human–human relationships and explore their role in ensuring a harmonious society
transform themselves to co-exist with nature by realising interconnectedness and four order of Applying (K3)
CO4
nature
distinguish between ethical and unethical practices, and extend ethical and moral practices for a Applying (K3)
CO5
better living
CO1 3 2 1 1
CO2 3 2 1 1
CO3 3 2 1 1
CO4 3 2 1 1
CO5 3 2 1 1
Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) % %
CAT1 25 75 100
CAT2 25 75 100
ESE NA 100
* ±3% may be varied (CAT 1 & 2 – 50 marks & ESE – 100 marks)
22GCT71 - ENGINEERING ECONOMICS AND MANAGEMENT
Programme &
Branch
Preamble The aim of the course is to create fundamental knowledge on management by introducing concepts like
economics, national income, marketing, operations management, accounting principles etc.
Unit – I Micro Economics 9
Economics – Basics Concepts and Principles – Demand and Supply – Law of demand and Supply – Determinants – Market
Equilibrium – Circular Flow of Economic Activities and Income.
Unit – II Macro Economics, Business Ownership and Management concepts 9
National Income and its Measurement Techniques. Inflation - Causes of Inflation – Controlling Inflation – Business Cycle - Forms of
Business – Ownership Types. Management concepts: Taylor and Fayol’s Principles – Functions of Management - Managerial
Skills - Levels of Management - Roles of Manager.
Unit – III Marketing Management 9
Marketing - Core Concepts of Marketing - Four P‘s of Marketing - New Product Development – Intellectual Property Rights (IPR),
Product Life Cycle - Pricing Strategies and Decisions.
Unit – IV Operations Management 9
Operations Management - Resources - Types of Production System - Site Selection, Plant Layout, Steps in Production Planning
and Control - Inventory - EOQ Determination.
Unit – V Financial Management 9
Accounting Principles – Financial Statements and its Uses – Depreciation - Straight Line and Diminishing Balance Method – Break
Even Analysis – Capital Budgeting - Significance –Traditional and Discounted Cash Flow Methods.
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
Compiled by Department of Management Studies, Kongu Engineering College, "Economics and Management for
1.
Engineers", 1st Edition, McGraw Hill Education, Noida, 2013.
REFERENCES:
1. Geetika, Piyali Ghosh and Purba Roy Choudhury, “Managerial Economics”, 3 rd Edition, McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2018.
2. William J. Stevenson, “Operations Management”, 14 th Edition, McGraw-Hill Education, 2021.
William G. Nickels, James M. McHugh, Susan M. McHugh, “Understanding Business”, 12 th Edition, McGraw-Hill
3.
Education, New York, 2019.
CO1 identify market equilibrium and interpret national income calculations and inflation issues Applying (K3)
CO2 choose a suitable business ownership for their enterprise and illustrate managerial functions Applying (K3)
CO3 infer marketing management decisions Understanding (K2)
CO4 apply appropriate operation management concept in business situations Applying (K3)
CO5 interpret financial and accounting statements and evaluate new proposals Applying (K3)

CO1 1 1 2 3 2 2 2 3 2
CO2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 2
CO3 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 3 2
CO4 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 3 2
CO5 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 2

Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) % %
CAT1 20 40 40 100
CAT2 20 40 40 100
CAT3 20 40 40 100
ESE 20 40 40 100
22EIP71 - PROJECT WORK II PHASE I
Programme &
Branch

formulate a problem with proper objectives to meet the need of the Society and Industry after Creating (K6)
CO1
detailed literature review Articulation (S4)
design the Model considering all mathematical calculations meeting required standards Creating (K6)
CO2
prescribe by professional bodies Articulation (S4)
select proper instruments for the designed model and develop the model with proper project and Evaluating (K5)
CO3
finance management and demonstrate the proper working of the model Articulation (S4)
articulate the project report and presentations with neat presentation incorporating all Evaluating (K5)
CO4
parameters Articulation (S4)
Evaluating (K5)
CO5 contribute individually and in team for the development and final working of the project
Articulation (S4)

CO1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
22EIP81 - PROJECT WORK II PHASE II
Programme &
Branch

formulate a problem with proper objectives to meet the need of the Society and Industry after Creating (K6)
CO1
detailed literature review Articulation (S4)
design the Model considering all mathematical calculations meeting required standards Creating (K6)
CO2
prescribe by professional bodies Articulation (S4)
select proper instruments for the designed model and develop the model with proper project and Evaluating (K5)
CO3
finance management and demonstrate the proper working of the model Articulation (S4)
articulate the project report and presentations with neat presentation incorporating all Evaluating (K5)
CO4
parameters Articulation (S4)
Evaluating (K5)
CO5 contribute individually and in team for the development and final working of the project
Articulation (S4)

CO1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
22EIE01 - BIOMEDICAL INSTRUMENTATION
Programme &
Branch
Prerequisites Nil 5 PE 3 0 0 3
Preamble To impart the knowledge of some human anatomy and measuring bio potentials using bio electrodes with
specific instruments which is most commonly used in hospitals. Also understand the fundamental concept of
various biomedical imaging techniques and learn the advanced physiological assistive medical devices.
Unit – I Human Physiological Systems: 9
Cell and its structure-Resting and action potentials - Skeletal system - Circulatory system – Respiratory System - Components of the
Bio medical instrumentation system. Bio Potential Electrodes: Micro electrode - depth and needle electrode - surface electrodes.
Unit – II Biomedical Electrical Signal Measurement: 9
ECG – Einthoven’s triangle – 3 lead ECG system, EEG - 10- 20 electrode system, EMG, ERG and EOG: Origin and characteristics
- Lead systems, recording methods and typical waveforms.
Unit – III Biomedical Non-Electrical Signal Measurement: 9
Digital stethoscope - Phonocardiography (PCG) - Blood pressure Measurement: Sphygmomanometer, MEMS based catheter tip
pressure sensor, ultrasonic blood pressure monitor – Spirometer – Capnography - Blood pH measurement - Measurement of blood
pCO2 - Blood pO2 measurement - Pulse oximeter - Lung volumes, respiration.
Unit – IV Biomedical Imaging Systems: 9
X-ray machine - Computer tomography - Ultrasonic imaging systems - Magnetic resonance imaging - PET - SPECT -FMRI –
Magnetic Particle Imaging.
Unit – V Physiological Assist Devices: 9
Ventricular asynchronous pacemaker - AC Defibrillator- Heart lung machine - Kidney machine - Audiometer – Biothesiometry
Vibroscreen - Ophthalmoscope –Biotelemetry – Telemedicine.
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
1. Khandpur R.S," Handbook of Biomedical Instrumentation", 2nd Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill ,New Delhi , 2017.
REFERENCES:
1. John G. Webster, “Medical Instrumentation Application and Design”, 4 th Edition, John Wiley and Sons, NewYork, 2015.
Andrew G. Webb, “Principles of Biomedical Instrumentation” 1st Edition, Cambridge University Press, United Kingdom,
2.
2018
3. Arumugam. M, “Bio-Medical Instrumentation”, 2nd Edition, Anuradha Agencies, Kumbakonam, 2014.
CO1 interpret the basic principles and phenomena of Biomedical Engineering Understanding (K2)
CO2 record the bioelectric potentials using bio potential electrode through bio signal recording devices Applying (K3)
CO3 measure biomedical signal parameters through medical instruments Applying (K3)
CO4 summarize the basic principles in medical imaging techniques Understanding (K2)
CO5 illustrate the physiological assist devices Applying (K3)

CO1 3 1 2 1 2 2
CO2 3 2 1 1 1 2 1 3 3
CO3 3 2 1 1 1 2 1 3 3
CO4 3 1 2 1 2 2
CO5 3 2 1 1 1 2 1 3 3

Test / Bloom’s Remembering Understanding Applying Analyzing Creating
Evaluating (K5) % Total %
Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K6) %
CAT1 20 40 40 100
CAT2 10 40 50 100
CAT3 10 40 50 100
ESE 10 40 50 100
22EIE02 - EMBEDDED SYSTEMS
Programme &
Branch
Prerequisites Microcontroller and its Applications 5 PE 3 0 0 3
Preamble To impart the fundamental knowledge and programming concepts of Microcontroller and Embedded systems.
Unit – I Introduction to PIC18 Microcontrollers: 9
Architecture of PIC 18 - Pin Description – Memory Organization: Program Memory – Data Memory: Register Organization
– Oscillator and Reset Circuits – Addressing Modes – Introduction to Instruction sets and C Programming.
Unit – II PIC 18 Programming: 9
Assembly Language/ C Programming to Interface I/O Ports – Timers – Counters – Capture/Compare Mode – PWM.
Unit – III Interfacing Peripherals with PIC18 Microcontroller: 9
Interfacing and Assembly Language/ C Programming of ADC – DAC – Temperature Sensor – LCD – Keyboard – Motor Control:
DC motor and Stepper motor.
Unit – IV Embedded Systems and Interfacing with Arduino 9
Classification of Embedded Systems – Structural units in Embedded processor – Physical device – Arduino Interfaces, Hardware
requirement for Arduino, Connecting remotely over the network using VNC, GPIO Basics, Controlling GPIO Outputs Using a Web
Interface, – Programming, APIs / Packages- Quark SOC processor, programming, Arduino Boards using GPIO
Unit – V RTOS Concepts and case study: 9
Introduction to RTOS – Types of RTOSs – Tasks – Process – Task scheduling – Task Communication – Priority Inversion
Problem. Case Study: Automatic Chocolate Vending Machine – Smart Card Reader – Mobile phone software for Key inputs.
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
Danny Causey, Muhammad Ali Mazidi, Rolin McKinlay, “PIC Microcontroller and Embedded Systems using Assembly
1.
and C for PIC 18”, 2nd Edition, Pearson Education Micro Digital Ed, 2017.
REFERENCES:
1. Rajkamal, “Embedded Systems Architecture, Programming and Design”, 3rd Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2015.
2. Shibu. K.V, “Introduction to Embedded Systems”, 2nd Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2009.
3. Vijay Madisetti and Arshdeep Bahga, Internet of Things (A Hands-on-Approach), 1st Edition, VPT, 2016
CO1 understand the basic concepts of PIC microcontroller Understanding (K2)
CO2 acquire adequate knowledge in the interfacing concepts of PIC Microcontroller Applying (K3)
CO3 apply the programming skills to interface peripherals with PIC Microcontroller Applying (K3)
infer knowledge in basics of embedded systems and Interface analog/digital sensors with
Arduino
CO5 explain the applications of embedded system using RTOS Understanding (K2)

CO1 3 1 1 2 2
CO2 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 3 3
CO3 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 3 3
CO4 3 1 1 2 2
CO5 3 1 1 2 2

Test / Bloom’s Remembering Understanding Applying Analyzing Evaluating
Creating (K6) % Total %
Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) %
CAT1 10 65 25 100
CAT2 10 30 60 100
CAT3 15 85 100
ESE 5 60 35 100
22EIE03 - INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEM DESIGN
Programme &
Branch
Prerequisites Industrial instrumentation 5 PE 3 0 0 3
Preamble To design controllers and signal conditioning circuits for instrumentation systems.
Unit - I Design of Analog Signal Conditioning: 9
Analog Signal Conditioning: Analog Data Representation - Principles Of Analog Signal Conditioning-divider circuits- Guidelines for
Analog Signal Conditioning Design - Analog Signal Conditioning Design for various industrial parameters.
Unit - II Design Digital Signal Conditioning: 9
Digital Signal Conditioning : Introduction – Converters: Comparator, Digital to Analog Converters, Analog to Digital Converters -
Data-Acquisition Systems: Different types of DAS
Unit - III Design Of Final Control Elements: 9
Introduction - Final Control Operation - Signal Conversions: Analog Electrical Signals, Digital Electrical Signals–Design Actuators:
Electrical Actuators -Control Elements: Electrical, Fluid Valves.
Unit - IV Design Of Analog Controllers: 9
Introduction – continuous controller modes -General Features of analog controller –Design of Electronic Controllers: Error Detector,
Single Mode, and Composite Mode.
Unit - V Computer-Based Control: 9
Introduction - Digital Applications: Alarms, Two-Position Control - Computer-Based Controller: Hardware Configurations, - Other
Computer Applications: Data Logging, Supervisory Control - Control System Networks: Development, General Characteristics,
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
1. Curtis D. Johnson, “Process Control Instrumentation Technology”, 8th Edition, Pearson Education Limited, London, 2015
REFERENCES:
1. Dale E Seborg ,”Process Dynamics and Control”, 3rd Edition, Wiley India, New Delhi, 2016.
Surekha Bhanot, "Process Control: Principles and Applications", 4thEdition, Oxford University Press, United Kingdom,
2.
2017.
3. Daniel H Sheingold, "Transducer Interfacing Handbook", 1 st Edition, Analog devices Inc, America, 1980.
CO1 narrate the role of signal conditioning circuits in instrumentation Understanding (K2)
CO2 develop signal transmitter circuits for various process parameter Applying (K3)
CO3 design final control elements and actuators Applying (K3)
CO4 design controllers for various applications Applying (K3)
CO5 describe the role of computer based control systems Understanding (K2)

CO1 3 1 2 2
CO2 3 2 1 1 1 3 3
CO3 3 2 1 1 1 3 3
CO4 3 2 1 1 1 3 3
CO5 3 1 2 2

Total %
Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) %
CAT1 5 25 70 100
CAT2 5 25 70 100
CAT3 5 25 70 100
ESE 5 25 70 100
22EIE04 - ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION
Programme &
Branch
Preamble To provide fundamentals of the Electronic Instruments in the field of Instrumentation Engineering. It
discusses the concepts of digital instruments, signal generators, display devices and calibration.
Unit – I Digital Instruments 9
Block diagram of Digital Instrument-Digital Voltmeters: Dual slope Integrating type -Digital Multimeters-True RMS Meter-Digital
Frequency meter-Digital Measurement of Time- Universal counter-Decade counter- Generalized Data Acquisition System (DAS).
Unit – II Measuring Instruments 9
Output Power meters-Field strength meter-Stroboscope-Phase meter-Vector Impedance meter: Direct Reading, Commercial
vector Impedance meter-Rx meters-Automatic Bridges.
Unit – III Signal Generators 9
Introduction – Fixed Frequency AF Oscillator– Variable AF Oscillator - Basic Standard Signal Generator (Sine Wave)– Modern
Laboratory Signal Generator - AF Sine and Square Wave Generator – Function Generator– Square and Pulse Generator
(Laboratory Type)- Random Noise Generator- Sweep Generator.
Unit – IV Display Devices 9
Displays-Classification-LED & LCD-LCOS-Bar graph display-Segmental and Dot matrix display-Plasma Display-OLED-FOLED-
simple CRO.
Unit – V Instrument Calibration 9
Introduction-Comparison methods- Digital multimeters as standard Instruments-Calibration instruments-Potentiometers-
Potentiometer calibration methods-Multifunction calibrators-Multiproduct calibrators-Automated calibration.
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
1. Kalsi H.S. “Electronic Instrumentation”, 3rd Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2019 for Unit 1,2,3,4.
David A Bell, Electronic Instrumentation and Measurements, 2 nd Edition, Oxford University Press, New Delhi, 2003 for
2.
Unit 5
REFERENCES:
1. Betty Lincoln, “Digital Electronics”, 1st Edition, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2014.
2. R.S.Sedha, “Electronic Measurements And Instrumentation” 1st Edition, S Chand & Company ,2013
CO1 interpret the fundamentals of digital instruments in various measurements Understanding (K2)
CO2 employ the functions of measuring instruments Applying(K3)
CO3 make use of various instruments to generate the waveforms Applying (K3)
CO4 infer the types of displays used in electronics instruments Understanding (K2)
CO5 illustrate the calibration methods for standard instruments Understanding (K2)
Mapping of COs with Pos and PSOs

CO1 3 1 1 2 2
CO2 3 2 1 1 1 1 3 3
CO3 3 2 1 1 1 1 3 3
CO4 3 1 1 2 2
CO5 3 1 1 2 2

Total %
Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) %
CAT1 40 30 30 100
CAT2 50 20 30 100
CAT3 60 40 100
ESE 40 40 20 100
22EIE05 - INDUSTRIAL ELECTRONICS AND DRIVES
Programme &
Branch
Preamble To impart the knowledge on Power semiconductor devices and their characteristics, Controlled rectifiers,
Choppers, DC drives, Variable Frequency Drives and to understand the specific applications of different
drives.
Unit – I Introduction to Power semiconductor devices 9
Classification of power semiconductors – Control characteristics of power devices – Types of power electronic circuits – Elements
in the design of power electronics equipment – Thyristor: Operating principle – Behaviour under biased condition – Gate triggering
– Commutation methods.
Unit – II Controlled rectifiers 9
Principle of phase controlled converter operation– Single phase half controlled rectifier - Single phase full converter – - Single
phase half controlled Bridge converter - Three phase fully controlled Bridge Rectifiers – Three phase dual converters – Three phase
semi converters – Inverting mode of a converter - Effect of source and load inductances.
Unit – III Choppers and Inverters 9
Principle of DC chopper - Step up and Step down Choppers – Classification of choppers - Quadrants of operation – Switching
mode Regulators - Buck, Boost and Buck-Boost Regulators. Introduction to Inverters: Principle of Operation- Single phase bridge
inverters.
Unit – IV DC Drives and AC Drives 9
Basic characteristics of DC motors – Operating modes – Single phase semi converter and dual converter drives- Three phase half
wave and full converter drives – Control modes - Power control, Regenerative brake control, Rheostatic brake control, Combined
regenerative and rheostatic brake control. Introduction to AC drives: Introduction to Variable Frequency Drives.
Unit – V Drives for specific applications 9
Drive considerations for textile mills – Steel rolling mills – Cranes and Hoist Drives – Cement mills – Sugar mills- Paper mills.
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
Rashid, M. H.,”Power Electronics –Circuits, Devices and Applications”, 4th Edition ,Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2017.
1.
Unit 1,2,3 and 4
Vedam Subrahmanyam, "Electric Drives-Concepts and Applications", 2nd Edition, McGraw Hill Education (India) Private
2.
Limited, New Delhi, 2017 for Unit 5.
REFERENCES:
Moorthi V.R., “Power Electronics - Devices, Circuits and Industrial Applications”, Oxford university press, New Delhi, 1 st
1.
edition, 2012.
2. Gopal K. Dubey, “Fundamentals of Electrical Drives”, Narosa Publishing House, Reprint, New Delhi, -2019
CO1 interpret the power electronic devices for industrial drives Understanding(K2)
CO2 describe the various controlled devices Understanding(K2)
CO3 interpret the different types of choppers, inverters and their working Understanding(K2)
develop the operating and control modes of DC drives and learn about variable frequency AC Applying (K3)
CO4
drives
Applying (K3)
CO5 select suitable DC drives and simple AC drives for industrial applications

CO1 3 1 2 2
CO2 3 1 2 2
CO3 3 1 2 2
CO4 3 2 1 1 1 3 3
CO5 3 2 1 1 1 3 3

Total %
Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) %
CAT1 15 85 100
CAT2 15 85 100
CAT3 10 45 45 100
ESE 5 70 25 100
22EIE06 - SOFT COMPUTING TECHNIQUES
Programme &
Branch
Preamble Emphasis of this course will be on Artificial Neural Networks, Fuzzy Logic, Meta-heuristic techniques like
Genetic Algorithms and Neuro fuzzy Systems and their applications to different computational problems.
Unit – I Introduction to Optimization Techniques: 9
Introduction – Hard Computing – Soft computing – Hybrid Computing. Optimization and Some Traditional Methods: Introduction to
Optimization – Traditional methods of Optimization. Overview of Non-Traditional Optimization methods: Simulated Annealing –
Particle Swarm optimization.
Unit – II Fundamentals of Neural Networks : 9
Evolution of Neural Networks – Basic models of Artificial Neural Network- Important Terminologies of ANNs - Linear Separability-
Perceptron Networks – Adaptive Linear Neuron – Supervised Learning Network: Back Propagation Network - Radial Basis Function
network.
Unit – III Unsupervised Learning Networks and Fuzzy Logic Systems: 9
Unsupervised Learning Networks: Associative Memory Network: Hopfield Networks – Discrete Hopfield Network. Unsupervised
Learning Networks: Kohonen Self Organizing Map.
Fuzzy Logic Systems: Introduction to fuzzy logic –Classical sets (Crisp sets) - Fuzzy sets. Classical Relation and Fuzzy Relation:
Introduction –Membership functions: Introduction – Features of the Membership Functions.
Unit – IV Fuzzy Inference Systems: 9
Fuzzification – Methods of Membership Value Assignments. Defuzzification: Introduction - Lambda-Cuts for fuzzy sets and fuzzy
relations, Defuzzification methods. Fuzzy Rule Base and Approximate Reasoning: Aggregation of Fuzzy Rules – Fuzzy Reasoning
– Fuzzy Inference systems (FIS): – Methods of FIS.
Unit – V Neuro-Fuzzy System and Genetic Algorithm: 9
Neuro-Fuzzy System: Characteristics of Neuro–Fuzzy Hybrids – Adaptive Neuro - Fuzzy Inference System (ANFIS).
Genetic Algorithm: Introduction – Biological Background – Traditional Optimization and Search Techniques - Basic Terminologies in
GA – Operators in GA – Problem solving using Genetic Algorithm: Maximizing a Function.
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
1. Dr.S.N.Sivanandam & Dr.S.N.Deepa, “Principles of Soft Computing”, 3 rd Edition, Wiley, New Delhi, 2018.
REFERENCES:
1. Dilip K.Pratihar ,”Soft computing fundamentals and Applications,”Narosa Publishing House Pvt. Ltd.,2015.
2. Timothy J. Ross, “Fuzzy Logic with Engineering Applications”, 3 rd Edition, Wiley, New Delhi, 2010.
David E. Goldberg, “Genetic algorithms in search, optimization, and machine learning”, 3rd Edition, Addison Wesley
3.
Longman Publishing Co, 2013.
CO1 explain the fundamentals and the concepts of optimization techniques Understanding(K2)
develop the various neural network algorithms for classification and function approximation and
CO2 Applying(K3)
clustering
CO3 explain the fundamental concepts of fuzzy logic systems Understanding(K2)
CO4 design the controller using Fuzzy Inference System Applying (K3)
CO5 apply Genetic Algorithm and Neuro-Fuzzy concepts for specific applications Applying (K3)

CO1 3 1 2 2
CO2 3 2 1 1 1 3 3
CO3 3 1 2 2
CO4 3 2 1 1 1 3 3
CO5 3 2 1 1 1 3 3

Total %
Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) %
CAT1 20 40 40 100
CAT2 20 30 50 100
CAT3 10 40 40 100
ESE 20 30 50 100
22EIE07 – ANALYTICAL INSTRUMENTATION
Programme &
Branch
Prerequisites Transducers Engineering 6 PE 3 0 0 3
Preamble Analytical Instrumentation provides qualitative and quantitative techniques for analysis in chemical,
pharmaceutical, clinical, oil refineries and in pollution monitoring and control. The conventional and modern
analytical techniques along with their principle, instrumentation and applications are included in the course.
Unit – I Colorimeters and Spectrophotometers: 9
The Electromagnetic Spectrum–Laws relating to absorption of radiation–Ultraviolet and Visible Absorption Spectroscopy–
Spectrophotometers: IR spectroscopy: Basic components of IR Spectrophotometers – Types of IR Spectrophotometers– FTIR
spectrophotometers – Flame Photometers: Principle of Flame Photometers and Construction Details of Flame Photometers –Atomic
Absorption Spectroscopy.
Unit – II Chromatography and pH Measurement: 9
Basic definitions – Gas chromatography – Liquid chromatography –Types of Liquid Chromatography – High Pressure Liquid
Chromatography (HPLC). pH Meters: Principle of pH Measurement – Electrodes for pH measurement: Hydrogen electrodes – Glass
electrodes – Reference electrodes – Combination electrode – Selective-ION Electrodes – Ammonia Electrode –Fluoride Electrode.
Unit – III Industrial Gas Analyzers: 9
Types of gas analyzers – Paramagnetic oxygen analyzer –Electrochemical Methods- Infrared gas analyzers – Thermal conductivity
analyzers – Analyzers based on Gas density –––Method based on Ionization of gases.
Unit – IV Radio Chemical Techniques: 9
Fundamentals of radiochemical methods – Radiation detectors: Ionization chamber – Geiger-Muller counter – Proportional counter –
Scintillation counter – Semiconductor detectors – X-ray spectrophotometer – Mass Spectrometers: Basic Mass Spectrometer-
Principle of Operation – Types of Mass Spectrometers: Magnetic deflection mass spectrometer and the Time-of-flight mass
spectrometer. NMR Spectrometer: Principle and construction details.
Unit – V Applications of Analytical Instrumentation: 9
Scanning Electron Microscope, Scanning Probe Microscopes and Particle size analyzers. Air Pollution Monitoring Instruments: CO
analyzer, SO2analyzer, Ozone analyzer. Water Pollution Monitoring Instruments: Dissolved oxygen, oxidation-reduction potential,
Turbidity meter.
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
1. Khandpur R.S., “Handbook of Analytical Instruments” 3rd Edition, McGraw-Hill Education India Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi , 2015.
REFERENCES:
1. Ewing G.W., “Instrumental Methods of Chemical Analysis”, 6 th Edition, McGraw-Hill, New York, 2007.
Douglas A. Skoog, F. James Holler, Stanley R. Crouh, “Principles of Instrumental Analysis”, 7th Edition, Thomson Brooks
2.
Cole, San Francisco, 2020.
3. Bela G. Liptak, “Analytical Instrumentation”, 2nd Edition, New York: McGraw-Hill Book Co., 2018.
CO1 summarize on analytical instruments which utilize electromagnetic spectrum as source Understanding (K2)
explain the chromatographic methods and electrodes used in pH
measurement
CO3 make use of analyzers for measuring industrial gases and liquids Applying (K3)
CO4 interpret the sample data with radiochemical techniques Understanding (K2)
CO5 apply analytical techniques for industrial requirements Applying (K3)

CO1 3 1 2 2
CO2 3 1 2 2
CO3 3 2 1 1 1 3 3
CO4 3 1 2 2
CO5 3 2 1 1 1 3 3

Total %
Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % % (K6) %
CAT1 30 70 100
CAT2 10 50 40 100
CAT3 10 50 40 100
ESE 20 50 30 100
22EIE08 - VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION
Programme &
Branch
Preamble Virtual instrumentation is a powerful concept for control, measuring, testing and analysis of real time
problems. This course aims at giving an adequate exposure and practice in LabVIEW programming and DAQ
system to overcome the limitations of classical methods.
Unit – I Introduction to Virtual Instrumentation: 9
Virtual Instrumentation- Programming Requirements- Drawbacks of Recent Approaches- Virtual Instruments Versus Traditional
Instruments- Advantages of VI- Creating Virtual Instruments Using LabVIEW- Virtual Instrumentation in the Engineering Process-
Graphical Programming and Textual Programming- Advantages of LabVIEW- LabVIEW Environment- Dataflow Programming- G
Programming.
Unit – II Basic Tools, Loops and Graphs: 9
Front Panel-Block Diagram Tools and Palettes- Repetition and Loops: FOR Loop, While Loop, Shift Registers, Tunnels, Feedback
Nodes, Local and Global Variables – Arrays-Clusters-Waveform Charts-Waveform Graphs-XY Graphs-Intensity Graphs and
Charts-Digital Waveform Graph-3D Graphs.
Unit – III Programming with Structures: 9
Structures: Case Structure, Sequence Structures, Customizing Structures, Timed Structures, Formula Nodes, Event Structure,
MathScript-Strings-File I/O-State Machine.
Unit – IV Data Acquisition: 9
Interface Buses: RS 232, RS422, RS485, GPIB and USB. Hardware Aspects: Signal Grounding-Signal Conditioning-Digital I/O
Techniques-Data Acquisition in LabVIEW-Hardware Installation and Conﬁguration-Components of DAQ-DAQ Signal Accessory-
DAQ Assistant-DAQ Hardware- DAQ Software.
Unit – V Tools and Applications: 9
Signal processing and Analysis Tools-Control System Design and Simulation Tools-Signal, Voltage and Current measurement
using general purpose DAQ Card-Bio-Medical Signal Acquisition using NI-ELVIS –Temperature Measurement.
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
S.Sumathi , P.Surekha, “LabVIEW based Advanced Instrumentation Systems”, 1 st Edition, Springer Berlin, Heidelberg,
1.
2007.
REFERENCES:
1. Jovitha Jerome, “Virtual Instrumentation Using LabVIEW”, 3 rd Edition, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2012.
CO1 explain the Virtual Instrumentation concepts Understanding (K2)
CO2 apply structured programming concepts in developing LabVIEW programs Applying (K3)
CO3 build LabVIEW programs using structures, nodes and state machine concepts Applying (K3)
CO4 utilize DAQ System to solve real time problems Applying (K3)
CO5 apply knowledge on various tools in practical works Applying (K3)

CO1 3 1 2 2
CO2 3 2 1 1 1 3 3
CO3 3 2 1 1 1 3 3
CO4 3 2 1 1 1 3 3
CO5 3 2 1 1 1 3 3

Total %
Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) %
CAT1 20 50 30 100
CAT2 15 40 45 100
CAT3 15 60 30 100
ESE 20 40 40 100
22EIE09 - DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING
Programme &
Branch
Prerequisites Digital Signal Processing 6 PE 3 0 0 3
Preamble To impart the fundamental knowledge and applications of Digital Image Processing.
Unit – I Introduction to Image Processing: 9
Overview to Image Processing – Nature of Image Processing – Image Processing and Related Fields – Digital Image
Representation – Types of Images – Fundamental Steps in Image Processing. Digital Image Processing Operations: Basic
Relationships and Distance Metrics – Classification of Image Processing Operations – Arithmetic Operations: Image Addition,
Image Subtraction, Image Multiplication, Image Division – Logical Operations: AND/NAND, OR/NOR, XOR/XNOR, NOT.
Unit – II Image Transform: 9
Need for Image Transforms – 2D Discrete Fourier transform – 2D Discrete Cosine Transform – Haar Transform – SVD Transforms.
Unit – III Image Enhancement: 9
Image Quality and Need for Image Enhancement – Image Enhancement Point Operations – Linear and Non-linear Functions –
Piecewise Linear Functions: Intensity Slicing, Bit-plane Slicing – Histogram Equalization – Spatial Filtering Concepts: Design of
Discrete Gaussian Mask, Order-statistics Filters (Median, Maximum, Minimum) – Image Smoothing in Frequency Domain – Image
Sharpening in Frequency Domain.
Unit – IV Image Segmentation: 9
Introduction – Classification of Image Segmentation Algorithms – Detection of Discontinuities – Edge Detection: Stages in Edge
Detection, Types of Edge Detectors –Edge Detectors: Roberts Operator, Prewitt Operator, Sobel Operator – Canny Edge Detection
– Principle of Thresholding: Histogram and Thresholding, Global Thresholding Algorithms – Principle of Region-growing.
Unit – V Image Processing Applications: 9
Theory and Case study: Image Registration – Image Fusion – Image Mosaicking – Digital Watermarking.
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
1. Sridhar S. “Digital Image Processing”, 2nd Edition, Oxford University Press, India, 2016
REFERENCES:
1. Jayaraman S, Veerakumar T, Esakkirajan S. “Digital Image Processing”. 1 st Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2009.
2. Tamal Bose. “Digital Signal and Image Processing”, 1st Edition, Wiley, USA, 2003.
3. Rafael C. Gonzalez and Richard E. Woods. “Digital Image Processing”. Pearson, 4 th edition, New Delhi, 2018.
CO1 perform the basic operations of image processing Applying (K3)
CO2 apply various 2D transforms for images Applying (K3)
CO3 implement image enhancement techniques to improve the image quality Applying (K3)
CO4 apply various algorithms for image segmentation Applying (K3)
CO5 construct case study on image processing applications Understanding (K2)

CO1 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 3 3
CO2 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 3 3
CO3 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 3 3
CO4 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 3 3
CO5 3 1 1 1 2 2

Total %
Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % %
CAT1 10 35 55 - - - 100
CAT2 10 35 55 - - - 100
CAT3 15 40 45 - - - 100
ESE 10 35 55 - - - 100
22EIE10 - POWER PLANT INSTRUMENTATION
Programme &
Branch
Preamble To provide an overview of various methods of power generation and the basic concepts and practical aspects
of Instrumentation and Control in Thermal Power Plant and Nuclear Power plant.
Unit – I Overview of Power Generation: 9
Brief survey of Conventional and non-conventional methods of power generation – Nonconventional: Wind power – Solar power –
Geothermal Power – Biomass Power. Conventional: Hydropower – Steam Power – Comparison of various power plants – Piping
and Instrumentation diagram – Cogeneration of Power – Control rooms
Unit – II Instrumentation and Control in Water Circuit: 9
Water circuit – Boiler Feed water circulation – Measurements in water circuit: Water and Steam flow measurement – Drum water
level measurement – Controls in water circuit: Boiler Drum Level Control – Superheated Steam temperature control – Impurities in
water and Steam: Impurities in Raw water – Effect of impurities – Measurement of impurities.
Unit – III Instrumentation and Control in Air-Fuel Circuit: 9
Air-Fuel circuit – Measurements in air-fuel circuit – Controls in Air- Fuel circuit: Combustion control – Furnace draft control.
Analytical Measurement: Oxygen measurement in Flue gas – Measurement of Carbon Dioxide in Flue gas – Combustibles
Analyser (CO+H2) – Infrared Flue Gas Analysers – Smoke detector – Dust monitor – Chromatography
Unit – IV Power Plant Management and Turbine Monitoring and Control: 9
Master control – Boiler Efficiency – Maintenance of Measuring Instruments – Interlocks for Boiler operation – SCADA – Application
of DCS in Power Plants.
Classification of turbines–Turbine Steam inlet system – Turbine Measurements: Process parameters – Turbine control system:
Safety control systems – Process control systems –Lubrication for Turbo-Alternator – Turbo-Alternator Cooling System.
Unit – V Instrumentation and Control in Nuclear Power Plant: 9
Nuclear Power Plant components – Sensors and measurement system – Reactor control: Pressurized Water Reactor (PWR) –
Boiler Water Reactor (BWR) – Liquid Metal Cooled Reactor (LMCR) – Digital architectures in nuclear power plants – Radiation
protection and monitoring – Case study: Three mile island – Chernobyl nuclear power plant – Fukushima nuclear power plant.
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
1. Krishnaswamy K. & Ponni Bala M., “Power Plant Instrumentation”, 2 nd Edition, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi, 2013.
REFERENCES:
SwapanBasu, Ajay Debnath., “Power Plant Instrumentation and Control Handbook”, United States, 1 st Edition, Academic
1.
Press Publications, 2014.
2. Philip Kiameh, “Power Plant Instrumentation and Controls”, 1st Edition, McGraw-Hill Professional, New Delhi, 2014.
interpret the knowledge about the basics of power plants and various methods of power
generation
build the instrumentation and control techniques involved in water circuit of thermal power
CO2 Applying (K3)
plant
recognize various measurement and control techniques applied to air- fuel circuit of thermal
power plant
CO4 apply DCS, SCADA, interlock circuits and turbine controls in thermal power plant Applying (K3)
develop the concepts of different reactor controlled methods, safety and radiation measures in
CO5 Applying (K3)
nuclear power plants

CO1 3 1 1 1 2 2
CO2 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 3 3
CO3 3 1 1 1 2 2
CO4 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 3 3
CO5 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 3 3

Total %
Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) %
CAT1 10 50 40 100
CAT2 10 40 50 100
CAT3 10 40 50 100
ESE 10 40 50 100
22EIE11 - WIRELESS INSTRUMENTATION
Programme &
Branch
Preamble To impart knowledge on wireless technology for instrumentation, wireless components and its applications.
To provide adequate technical information on power sources, wireless protocols and network implementation
Unit – I Wireless Instrumentation Technology: 9
Introduction – Instruments and Instrumentation: Measurement systems – Multiplexing structures – Wireless instruments and
communication protocols – RF interfaces and examples – Networks of wireless instruments – Sensor node components:
Computing subsystem – Communication subsystem – Power subsystems – Sensing subsystems.
Unit – II Powering Autonomous Sensors: 9
Autonomous sensors – Ambient energy sources and transducers – Energy storage units – Power considerations of wireless
instruments – Energy harvesting: Solar and wind energy harvesting, RF energy harvesting, Energy harvesting from vibration,
Thermal energy harvesting – Energy management techniques – Calculation for battery selection – Understanding RSSI and LQI
values.
Unit – III Wireless Systems/Standards for Automation: 9
Wireless HART: Protocol stack – Network components – Addressing control – Coexistence techniques. ISA100.11a: Introduction –
Scope – Working group of ISA 100 – Features – Sensor classes – System configuration and architecture of ISA 100.11a –
Comparison between ISA100.11a and WHART protocol stacks.
Unit – IV Design of Wireless Devices and LoRa: 9
Wireless sensor and instrument network design – Wireless integrated network sensors – Plug-and-play sensors and networks –
Industrial wireless networks and automation.
Introduction – Communication Methods – Difference between LoRa and LoRaWAN – LoRaWAN architecture – LoRaWAN classes.
Unit – V Wireless Sensor and Instrument Applications: 9
Application specific wireless sensors and instruments – Commercial wireless sensors and instruments – Industrial wireless sensor
and instrument networks – Wireless human health monitoring and environmental applications – Radio frequency identification –
Consumer products and other applications – Applications in Transportation and Agriculture.
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
John G. Webster, Halit Eren, “Measurement, Instrumentation, and Sensors Handbook”, 2nd Edition, CRC Press - Taylor &
1.
Francis Group, LLC, Boca Raton, Florida, 2017
REFERENCES:
Subhas Chandra Mukhopadhyay, “Smart Sensors, Measurement and Instrumentation”, 2 nd Edition , Springer Science &
1.
Business Media, Heidelberg, Germany, 2013
Sunit Kumar Sen, “Fieldbus and Networking in Process Automation”, 1 st Edition, Taylor & Francis Group, LLC, London,
2.
2017
3. Halit Eren, “Wireless Sensors and Instruments: Networks, Design, and Applications”, 1 st Edition, CRC Press, 2006
CO1 identify different instrumentation systems and fundamentals of wireless technology Understanding (K2)
CO2 indicate the power sources and energy storage units used for autonomous sensors Understanding (K2)
CO3 recognize the different wireless protocols and network standards for wireless instruments Understanding (K2)
CO4 discover design concepts and procedure for wireless devices and LoRA Applying (K3)
demonstrate the various applications of wireless sensor and instrument systems and
CO5 Applying (K3)
networks

CO1 3 1 2 2
CO2 3 1 2 2
CO3 3 1 2 2
CO4 3 2 1 1 1 3 3
CO5 3 2 1 1 1 2 3 3

Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) %
CAT1 15 85 100
CAT2 15 85 100
CAT3 15 50 35 100
ESE 10 70 20 100
22EIE12 – CONTROL SYSTEM COMPONENTS
Programme
& Branch
Prerequisites Control Systems 6 PE 3 0 0 3
Preamble To emphasize the engineering principles and fundamental characteristics of components and to explain their
functions in composite systems
Unit – I Mechanical Components: 9
Control system parameters- CAM: Components- Classification-CAM profile-CAM as a mechanical function generator-3D CAM.
Gears: Types – Gears for load matching- Backlash in gears-Manufacture of gears. Gyroscope: Gyroscopic effect- Construction-
Precession and velocity of precession-Generalised equations- Application.
Unit – II Electromechanical Components: 9
Potentiometer: Types – Applications –Selection. Synchros: Construction and operation – Characteristics – Application – Synchro pair
as error detector. Relays: Classification –Relay circuits – Construction-Characteristics of electromechanical and reed relays – Relay
problems and remedies.
Unit – III Actuators: Servomotors: 9
Theory of operation and transfer function of DC servomotors and AC servomotors. Stepper motor: Types – Construction and working –
Driver circuits – Applications. Tachogenerators: Characteristic requirements – EMF equation – Commutation and armature reaction
problem- AC induction tachogenerators-Working – Sources of errors- Applications
Unit – IV Amplifiers and Modulators: 9
Rotating amplifiers: Types – Amplidyne generator- Working principle –transfer function. Magnetic amplifiers: Series connected –
Parallel connected- Magnetic amplifiers with feedback. Servo amplifiers: Features – AC and DC servo amplifiers – Performance
characteristics. Modulators and demodulators: Amplitude modulation theory- Half and full wave balanced modulator- Amplitude
modulator circuit.
Unit – V Hydraulic systems: 9
Components – Classifications- Hydraulic pumps – Hydraulic transmission lines- Hydraulic power supply. Hydraulic valves: Spool type-
Nozzle valve- Flapper valve- Pulsed operation of control valves. Pneumatic systems: Pneumatic power supply – Compressor
efficiency – Accessories for air compressor- Flow control. Pneumatic control valves: Operating mechanism – Direction control valves-
P,PI and PID pneumatic control valves.
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
st
1. Desai M.D., “Control System Components”, 1 Edition, PHI learning Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi, 2008.
REFERENCES:
1. Gibson J.E. & Tuteur F.B. “Control System Components”, 1st Edition, McGraw Hill, Newyork, 2013.
nd
2. Andrew W. G. &. William H.B, “Applied Instrumentation in the Process Industries”, 2 Edition, Gulf
Professional, Houston,1979.
th
3. Liptak. B.G, “Instrument Engineers’ Handbook”, 4 Edition, CRC Press, USA, 2011.
On completion of the course, the students will be able to (Highest level)
recognize the working and applications of mechanical components used for
CO1 Applying (K3)
measuring angular displacement
distinguish the working and applications of electric mechanical components used for
CO2 Applying (K3)
measuring angular displacement
CO3 identify the suitable actuators used for closed loop control system applications Applying (K3)
CO4 recognize the working and applications of amplifiers used for composite systems Applying(K3)
realize the working and applications of pneumatic and hydraulic components used Applying (K3)
CO5
in control applications

CO1 3 2 1 1 1 1 3 3
CO2 3 2 1 1 1 1 3 3
CO3 3 2 1 1 1 1 3 3
CO4 3 2 1 1 1 1 3 3
CO5 3 2 1 1 1 1 3 3

Total %
Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % %
CAT1 30 30 40 100
CAT2 30 30 40 100
CAT3 30 30 40 100
ESE 20 20 60 100
22EIE13 - FIBER OPTICS AND LASER INSTRUMENTS
Programme &
Branch
Preamble The course will enable the students to learn about basic concepts and properties of optical fibers and lasers. The
course will provide students with adequate knowledge about industrial application of optical fibers and lasers,
holography and medical applications of lasers.
Unit – I Optical Fibers and their Properties: 9
Ray theory transmission – Optical fibers – Preparation of optical fibers: Liquid-phase (melting) techniques, Vapor–phase deposition
techniques – Transmission characteristics of optical Fibers: Attenuation, Material Absorption losses in silica glass fibers, Linear
scattering losses, Dispersion, Chromatic dispersion, Intermodal dispersion, Overall fiber dispersion – Optical fiber connection: Fiber
splices, Fiber connectors.
Unit – II Industrial Applications of Optical Fibers: 9
Fiber optic sensor fundamentals – Intensity-modulated sensors – Phase-modulated sensors – Displacement sensors – Strain
sensors – Temperature sensors – Pressure sensors – Magnetic and electric field sensors – Rotation rate sensors( Gyroscopes).
Unit – III Laser Fundamentals: 9
Laser rate equations: Introduction, The two-level system, The three-level laser system, The four-level laser system – Pulsed
operation of lasers: Q-switching, Mode locking – Properties of lasers: Laser beam characteristics – Laser safety: Physiological
effects, Laser safety practices and standards.
Unit – IV Industrial Applications of Lasers: 9
Introduction – Applications in material processing: Laser welding, hole drilling, laser cutting – Laser tracking –Lidar – Precision length
measurement – Laser interferometry: Homodyne and heterodyne interferometry – Velocity measurement – Lasers in information
storage, Bar code scanner – Applications for surface treatment: Hardening, glazing, laser alloying, laser cladding.
Unit – V Hologram and Medical Applications: 9
Principles of holography: Formation of holograms, The holographic process, Hologram types and efficiency – Applications of
holography: Holographic interferometry – Light and matter: Reflection and refraction, Absorption, Scattering – Interaction
mechanisms – Medical applications of lasers: Lasers in ophthalmology, Lasers in neurosurgery, Lasers in angioplasty and cardiology,
Lasers in dermatology.
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
John.M. Senior, “Optical Fibre Communication – Principles and Practice”, 3rd Edition, Pearson Education India, New Delhi,
1.
2014 for Unit 1.
David A. Krohn, Trevor W. MacDougall, & Alexis Mendez, “Fiber Optic Sensors: Fundamentals and Applications”, 4 th Edition,
2.
SPIE Press, Bellingham, 2015 for Unit 2.
Thyagarajan K, Ajoy Ghatak, “Lasers: Fundamentals and Applications’ 2 nd Edition, Springer Science & Business Media,
3.
New York, 2011 for Units 3, 4 & 5.
REFERENCES:
1. John F. Ready, “Industrial Applications of Lasers”, 2nd Edition, Academic Press, San Diego, 1997.
Markolf H. Niemz, “Laser Tissue Interaction: Fundamentals and Applications”, 4 th Edition, Springer Science and Business
2.
Media, Switzerland, 2019.
CO1 infer about the basics of optical fibres Understanding(K2)
CO2 use fibre optic sensors for various industrial applications Applying(K3)
CO3 interpret the working of various types of laser sources Understanding(K2)

apply the laser based instrumentation systems for various applications in industries apply the
CO4 Applying(K3)
laser based instrumentation systems for various applications in industries
CO5 predict the applications of lasers in medical field and holography Applying(K3)

CO1 3 1 2 2
CO2 3 2 1 1 1 3 3
CO3 3 1 2 2
CO4 3 2 1 1 1 3 3
CO5 3 2 1 1 1 3 3

Total %
Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % %
CAT1 30 40 30 100
CAT2 30 40 30 100
CAT3 30 40 30 100
ESE 30 40 30 100
22EIE14 - WEARABLE TECHNOLOGY
Programme &
Branch
Preamble A category of electronic devices that discuss the worn accessories, embedded in clothing, implanted in the
user’s body. The devices are hands-free gadgets with practical uses, powered by microprocessors and
enhanced with the ability to send and receive data via the Internet.
Unit – I Introduction to Wearable Technology: 9
An overview of wearable technology – Brief history – Applications of wearable Technology- Wearable Technology in Medicine and
Health Care – Smart Glasses – Conventional Textile Wearable Integration Techniques.
Unit – II Components and Technologies: 9
Introduction to components and technologies – Microprocessors and Microcontrollers – Operating Systems – Sensors – Wireless
connectivity unit – Battery technology – Displays and other user interface elements – Microphones and Speakers. Wearable
Technologies and Force Myography for Healthcare: Moving Monitoring – Accelerometers – Inertial Measurement Units – Data
Gloves – Myography – Force Myography
Unit – III Product Development and Design Considerations: 9
Introduction to Production development process – Engineering analysis – prototyping – Testing and validation – Production –
Design considerations –Various factors and requirements – Operational power packing and material – Maintenance.
Unit – IV Security Issues and Privacy Concerns: 9
Security issues – Privacy issues – Potential solutions – Product case examples: Blood Glucose Meters - Blood Pressure Monitors
- Weighing and Body Analysis Scale – Pulse Oximeters – Electrocardiogram.
Unit – V Psychological and Social Impact: 9
Psychological effects of wearables – Social implications – Technology acceptance factors – Electromagnetic radiations – Specific
absorption rate – Thermal effects. Health Issues: Cancers – Fertility – Vision and sleep disorder – Pain and discomfort –
Electromagnetic intolerance and other risks.
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
1. Haider Raad , “The Wearable Technology Handbook” ,1 st Edition, United Scholars Publications, USA, 2017
REFERENCES:
Raymond Kai-Yu Tong, “Wearable Technology in Medicine and Health Care”, Academic Press, 1 st Edition, United States,
1.
2018.
Fernando Jose Velez and Fardin Derogarian Miyandoab, “Wearable Technologies and Wireless Body Sensor Networks
2.
for Healthcare”, The Institution of Engineering and Technology, 1 st Edition, United Kingdom, 2019.
CO1 infer the recent technology used as wearable devices in medical and health care Understanding (K2)
CO2 describe the functions, operations of various components and technologies in wearable devices Understanding (K2)
CO3 analyze the development process and design consideration in wearable products Applying (K3)
CO4 interpret the security and privacy issues in wearable technology Understanding (K2)
explore the psychological and social impact, health concerns in wearable devices

CO1 3 1 2 2
CO2 3 1 2 2
CO3 3 2 1 1 1 3 3
CO4 3 1 2 2
CO5 3 1 2 2

Total %
Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) %
CAT1 30 70 100
CAT2 10 40 50 100
CAT3 40 60 100
ESE 10 70 20 100
22EIE15 - DEEP NEURAL NETWORKS FOR COMPUTATIONAL IMAGING
Programme
& Branch
Preamble This course will familiarize the students with computing techniques such as Neural networks, Deep learning and apply
the above techniques to real world applications to get the desired optimal solution
Unit – I Applied Math and Machine Learning Basics: 9
The Math Behind Machine Learning: Linear Algebra and Statistics – Methods behind machine learning basics – Logistic Regression,
Evaluating models – Building an understanding of machine learning.
Fundamentals of Neural Network: Neural Networks - Biological Neuron – The Perceptron – Multilayer Feed forward Networks – Back
Propagation Learning.
Unit – II Fundamentals of Deep Learning and Networks: 9
Activation Functions – Loss Functions – Hyper parameters. Deep Learning: Definition – Common Architectural Principles of Deep
Networks – Building Blocks of Deep Networks: RBMs.
Unit – III Major Architectures of Deep Networks: 9
Unsupervised Pretrained Networks: Deep Belief Networks – Generative Adversarial Networks – Convolutional Neural Networks
(CNN): Convolution and Pooling as an Infinitely strong Prior - Variants of the basic Convolution Function – Structured Outputs –Data
Types – Efficient Convolution Algorithms – Recurrent Neural Networks
Unit – IV Review of Digital Image Processing: 9
Basic Relationship and Distance Metrics – Classification of Image Processing Operations – Arithmetic Operations – Geometric
Operations – Image Interpolation Techniques – 2D Convolution and Correlation Operations. First Order Edge Detection Operators.
Principle of Region Growing.
Unit – V Applications of DNN: 9

Solving XOR Problem using Back Propagation Neural Nets -Classification of multispectral image data - Graphical Illustrations of the
functions performed by CNN - Recognition of simple images using CNN - Recognition of Handwritten numerals using CNN -
Recognition of natural images using CNN - Image Classification using YOLO algorithm
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
Josh Patterson & Adam Gibson, “Deep Learning, A Practioner’s Approach”, 1st Edition, O’Reilley Media,Inc, USA,
1.
2017 for Unit s 1,2.3 & 5
2. Sridhar S., “Digital Image Processing”, Fourth Impression, Oxford University Press, New Delhi, 2013 for Units 4 and 5.
REFERENCES:
Ian God fellow, Yoshua Bengio, & Aaron Courvillie, “Deep Learning”, The MIT Press, Cambridge Massachusetts, 2 nd
1.
Edition, 2016.
Gonzales R C,Woods and R E, Eddins S L, “Digital Image Processing using MATLAB”, Pearson Prentice
2.
Hall,Newyork,1st Edition,2004
apply basics of Linear Algebra and Statistics to machine learning and understand the
CO1 Applying (K3)
fundamentals of Neural Network
CO2 explain the fundamentals of deep learning and networks Understanding(K2)
CO3 summarize the major architectures of Deep Networks Understanding(K2)
CO4 Perform various image processing operations Applying(K3)
CO5 apply deep networks for computational image analysis Applying(K3)

CO1 3 2 1 1 1 3 3
CO2 3 1 2 2
CO3 3 2 1 1 1 3 3
CO4 3 2 1 1 1 3 3
CO5 3 2 1 1 1 3 3

Total %
Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) %
CAT1 20 30 50 100
CAT2 20 40 40 100
CAT3 25 35 40 100
ESE 20 40 40 100
22EIE16 - INSTRUMENTATION TECHNIQUES IN AGRICULTURE
Programme &
Branch
Prerequisites Transducers Engineering 7 PE 3 0 0 3
Preamble To discuss the sensing and automation technology associated with agriculture.
Unit – I Necessity of Instrumentation: 9
Necessity of instrumentation & control for agriculture and food processing requirement, World Agriculture Scenario, Indian Agriculture
sector – A synoptic Review- Areas of Concern. Information, Interpretation and Instruction Systems – Agri Instrumentation. Introduction
to Transducers – Characteristics.
Unit – II Agri Transducers 9
Technology Trend – Conventional and Silicon transducers, Capacitive gauges, Silicon Displacement transducer, Silicon Temperature
transducer, Silicon Pressure Transducer. Grain Moisture transducers, soil moisture transducers, Humidity transducers, pH
transducers, Gas transducers, Intelligent Sensors.
Unit – III Automation in Agriculture 9
Microprocessor based Grain moisture measurement- Introduction, Sensing Mechanism, I/O requirement analysis. Microprocessor
based Soil Nutrient Estimation Systems- Soil nutrients and their role, collection of samples, soil nutrient estimation, sensing
mechanism. Preparation of soil extract for estimation of N,P,K and S, I/O requirement Analysis. SCADA Based system for Agriculture
process monitoring.
Case Study : Interfacing of agri sensors with Microcontroller.
Unit – IV Drip Irrigation and Precision Agriculture 9
Introduction-Sensors, Hardware block Schematic, system operation, I/O Requirement Analysis, Hardware Systems.
Precision: Introduction, need for precision agriculture. Subsystem and components- GPS, Agri sensors, DAS, Communication
System. Precision agriculture status – Working Philosophy.
Unit – V Green House cultivation: 9
Designs and classification of greenhouse- Orientation of Greenhouse / Poly house- Components of green house- Plant growing
structures/containers in green house production- Environmental factors influencing greenhouse cultivation- Media preparation and
fumigation- Drip irrigation and fertigation systems greenhouse cultivation- Problem management in greenhouse cultivation.
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
1. Krishna Kant , “Microprocessor Based Agri Instrumentation”, 1st Edition, PHI Private Limited, New Delhi, 2010.
REFERENCES:
Suchismita Satapathy, Debesh Mishra, Arturo Realyvasquez, Arturo Realyvásquez Vargas, “Innovation in Agriculture with
1.
IoT and AI”, Springer nature, Switzerland, 2021.
2. Sidney Walter Reginald Cox, Filby D E , “Instrumentation in Agriculture”, Lockwood Publishers, UK, 2011.
CO1 explain the necessity of instrumentation for agriculture Understanding (K2)
CO2 familiarize with the soil parameters and tranducers in agricultural instrumentation Understanding (K2)
CO3 Illustrate the techniques of agriculture using Microprocessor and SCADA Applying(K3)
CO4 Outline the fundamentals of drip Irrigation and Precision Agriculture Understanding (K2)
CO5 Utilize the concepts of instruments in Green house cultivation Understanding (K2)

CO1 3 1 2 2
CO2 3 1 2 2
CO3 3 2 1 1 1 3 3
CO4 3 1 2 2
CO5 3 1 2 2

Total %
Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) %
CAT1 30 70 100
CAT2 20 60 20 100
CAT3 40 60 100
ESE 20 60 20 100
22EIE17 - INSTRUMENTATION IN BUILDING AUTOMATION
Programme&
Branch
Preamble Building Management System is computer-based control system installed in building that controls and monitors
the total MEP (Mechanical – Electrical – Plumbing) and security Structure. Itconsist of both Hardware and
software. This subject will help the students to understand the various aspects of different systems seen in well-
structured building.
Unit – I Introduction and Fire Alarm System: 9
Introduction: Concept and application of Building Management System (BMS) and Automation, requirements and design
considerations and its effect on functional efficiency of building automation system, architecture and components of BMS.
Fire Alarm: Fundamentals – FAS Components – Fire control panels- Field Components, Panel Components- FAS Architectures-
FAS loops – Fire Standards- Concept of IP enabled fire & alarm system, design aspects and components of PA system.
Unit – II Access Control System: 9
Access Control System: Access Components, Access control system Design. CCTV: Camera: Camera Applications, DVR Based
system, DVM, Network design, Storage design. Components of CCTV controlling system. CCTV Applications: CCTV Applications.
Security Systems Fundamentals: Introduction to Security Systems, Concepts. Security Design: Security system design for – RFID
enabled access control with components, Computer system access control – DAC, MAC, RBAC.
Unit – III HVAC system: 9
HVAC system Fundamentals: Introduction to HVAC, HVAC Fundamentals, Basic Processes Human Comfort: Human comfort zones,
Effect of Heat, Humidity, Heat loss. Processes: Heating Process & Applications. Cooling Process & Applications, Ventilation Process
& Applications, Unitary Systems.
Unit – IV Energy Management System: 9
Energy Management System: ASHRAE Symbols Energy Management: Energy Savings concept & methods, Lighting control,
Building Efficiency improvement, Green Building (LEED) Concept & Examples –Energy conservation and Sustainability
Unit – V Building Management System: 9
Building Management System: IBMS (HVAC, Fire & Security) project cycle, Project steps BMS. Verticals: Advantages & Applications
of BMS, Examples Integration: IBMS Architecture, Normal & Emergency operation. Advantages of BMS.
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
1. Jim Sinopoli , “Smart Buildings”, 2nd Edition, Butterworth-Heinemann imprint of Elsevier , 2010
REFERENCES:
Shengwei Wang, “Intelligent Buildings and Building Automation”, 1 st Edition, Spon Press (an imprint of the Taylor & Francis
1.
Group), USA,2010.
NJATC, “Building Automation Control Devices and Applications”, 1 st Edition, American Technical
2.
Publishers,Homewood,USA, 2008.
3. Albert Ting-Pat So, WaiLok Chan, “Intelligent Building Systems”, 3rd Edition, Kluwer Academic Publishers, 2012
Realize current philosophy, technology, terminology, and practices used in building
automation
CO2 Interpret different safety and security standards for building management system Understanding (K2)
CO3 Understand various hardware and software requirement for given HVAC system Understanding (K2)
CO4 Evaluate energy management and communication for efficient Building Management System Applying (K3)
CO5 Use various tools and techniques in BMS for Design of Secure, Safe and Green building Applying (K3)

CO1 3 1 1 1 2 2
CO2 3 1 1 1 2 2
CO3 3 1 1 1 2 2
CO4 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 3 3
CO5 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 3 3

Total %
Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % %
CAT1 20 80 100
CAT2 20 80 100
CAT3 20 80 100
ESE 15 60 25 100
22EIE18 - ADVANCED CONTROL TECHNIQUES
Programme &
Branch
Preamble To understand and analyse the performance of linear and nonlinear system in state space domain with and
without controllers.
Unit – I State Space Analysis in Continuous domain: 9
Review of state variable representation and state variable models in continuous systems. Conversion from transfer function to
various state space model – Conversion of state space to transfer function-Non-uniqueness of state model – Eigen values and
eigen vectors – State transition matrix and its properties. Solutions of state equations — Free and forced responses.
Unit – II State Feedback Controllers and Observers: 9
Controllability and observability – Relation between transfer function and state model – Effect of sampling time on controllability
and observability - State feedback controllers. State estimators: Full and reduced order observer. Steady state error in state
model-PI feedback controller- Deadbeat Observers- Dead beat Control.
Unit – III Phase Plane Analysis: 9
Behaviour of non-linear systems, jump resonance, sub-harmonic oscillation- Singular points Phase plane analysis: Linear and
nonlinear systems – Construction of phase portraits using isoclines- Limit cycle analysis.
Unit – IV Describing function Analysis: 9
Typical non-linearities Describing Function of nonlinearities –Review of Nyquist criterion for linear system –Nyquist stability criteria
for nonlinear system–Limit cycle oscillations- Accuracy of Describing Function method.
Unit – V Lyapunov Stability Analysis: 9
Stability in the sense of Lyapunov – Second method of Lyapunov – Lyapunov stability analysis of linear time invariant systems
and non linear system- Krasovski’s theorem- Variable gradient method of generating Lyapunov functions. Lyapunov analysis for
non autonomous systems.
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
1. Gopal M. “Digital Control and State Variable Methods”, 4th Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi,2008 for Unit-1, 2 & 3
REFERENCES:
1. Slotine and Li , “Applied Nonlinear Control”, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall Publishers, USA, 1991 for Unit-4 & 5.
2. Khalil, Hasan K., “Nonlinear Systems”, 2nd edition, Prentice Hall, NewJercy, 2002.
3. Richard C.Dorf& Robert H.Bishop, “Modern Control Systems”12 th Edition, Pearson Publication, NewJercy, 2013.
CO1 analyse the time domain unctional tics of continuos systems in state space domain Analyse(K4)
CO2 Design state feedback controllers and observers Applying (K3)
CO3 Apply the concepts in the design of state feedback controllers and observers Analyse(K4)
CO4 Analyse the unction of nonlinear systems using describing function method Analyse(K4)
CO5 Analyse the stability of linear and nonlinear systems using Lyapunov stability method Analyse(K4)

CO1 3 3 2 2 2 1 3 3
CO2 3 2 1 1 1 1 3 3
CO3 3 3 2 2 2 1 3 3
CO4 3 3 2 2 2 1 3 3
CO5 3 3 2 2 2 1 3 3

Total %
Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % % (K6) %
CAT1 10 40 40 10 100
CAT2 10 40 40 10 100
CAT3 10 40 40 10 100
ESE 10 40 40 10 100
22EIE19 - SAFETY IN PROCESS INDUSTRIES
Programme&
Branch
Preamble This course will provide the required information for safety management, prevention of accidents, hazard
identification and control. It also discusses the risk analysis, management safety strategies, procedures and
designs.
Unit – I Safety Management: 9
Definitions – Safety Culture – Individual Risk, Societal Risk and Risk Populations – Safety Metrics – Risk Perception, Risk
Tolerance/Acceptance and Risk Matrix – Safeguards. Toxicology: How Toxicants Enter Biological Organisms – How Toxicants are
Eliminated from Biological Organisms –Effects of Toxicants on Biological Organisms.
Unit – II Fires and Explosions: 9
The Fire Triangle – Distinction between Fires and Explosions – Ignition Energy – Autoignition – Ignition Sources. Explosions:
Detonation and Deflagration – Confined Explosions. Concepts to Prevent Fires and Explosions: Inerting: Vacuum Purging,
Pressure Purging. Ventilation – Sprinkler Systems.
Unit – III Hazards Identification and Evaluation: 9
Introduction to Hazard Identification – Hazards identification and risk assessment procedure – Process Hazards Checklists –
Hazards Surveys – Hazards and Operability Studies – Case study: HAZOP Study Applied to the Exothermic Reactor.
Unit – IV Risk Analysis and Assessment: 9
Review of Probability Theory – Event Trees– Fault Trees – Bow-Tie Diagrams– Quantitative Risk Analysis– Layer of Protection
Analysis – Relationship between Fault Trees and Event Trees.
Unit – V Solid Waste Management: 9
Process Safety Strategies – Safe Operating Procedures – Safe Work Practices – Designs for Process Safety – Case study: Static
Electricity – Tank Car Loading Explosion – Explosion in a Centrifuge – Duct System Explosion – Conductor in a Solids Storage Bin
– Pigment and Filter.
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
Daniel A Crowl, & Joseph F Louvar, “Chemical Process Safety (Fundamentals with Applications)”, 4 th Edition, Pearson
1.
India, 2020.
REFERENCES:
1. Amit Gupta, “Industrial Safety and Environment’, 2nd Edition, Laxmi Publication (P) Ltd., India, 2015.
American Institute of Chemical Engineers, “Introduction to Process Safety for Undergraduates and Engineers”, John Wiley
2.
& Sons, Inc., Hoboken, New Jersey, 2016.
CO1 outline the fundamentals of safety management and toxicology Understanding (K2)
CO2 interpret the concepts of fires and explosions and preventing fires and explosions Understanding (K2)
CO3 summarize the methods of hazard identification/ evaluation Understanding (K2)
CO4 choose suitable risk analysis and assessment techniques Applying (K3)
CO5 integrate various safety strategies, procedures, and designs involved in process industries Applying (K3)

CO1 3 1 2 1 2 2
CO2 3 1 2 1 2 2
CO3 3 1 2 1 2 2
CO4 3 2 1 1 1 2 1 3 3
CO5 3 2 1 1 1 2 1 3 3

Total %
Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) %
CAT1 30 70 100
CAT2 30 70 100
CAT3 20 40 40 100
ESE 20 50 30 100
22EIE20 - MEMS AND NANO TECHNOLOGY
Programme &
Branch
Preamble The course aims to impart the knowledge on different materials, principles used for recent MEMS and NEMS
fabrication techniques and applications.
Unit – I Microsystems: 9
Overview of microelectronics manufacture and Microsystems technology– Scaling Laws In Miniaturization: Scaling in geometry –
Scaling in rigid body dynamics – Scaling in electrostatic and electromagnetic forces – Scaling in Electricity – Scaling in Fluid
Mechanic – Scaling in heat transfer – Materials for MEMS and Microsystems.
Unit – II Micro sensors and Actuators: 9
Working principle of Microsystems – Micro actuation techniques – Micro actuators: Micro grippers – Miniature Microphones –
Micro motors – Micro pumps – Micro valves – Micro accelerometers – Micro gyroscopes –Application of Microsystems in
Automotive and Biomedical Field.
Unit – III Microsystems Fabrication and Manufacturing: 9
Substrates – Single crystal silicon wafer formation – Photolithography – Ion implantation – Diffusion –Oxidation – CVD – PVD –
Deposition by epitaxy – Etching. Manufacturing process: Bulk Micromanufacturing – Surface Micromachining – LIGA –SLIGA.
Microsystem Design Considerations.
Unit – IV Introduction to Nanotechnology: 9
Carbon Allotropes – CNTs: Structure – Mechanical Properties– Electrical Properties – CNT Electronics – Synthesis – Graphene:
Structure – Synthesis– Electrical Properties. Quantum Dots – Synthesis – Optical Properties – Single Electron Transistor –
Quantum Dots in Medicine. Nanowires: Metal Nanowires – Semiconductor Nanowires.
Unit – V Fields of Nanotechnology: 9
Scanning Tunneling Microscopy – AFM – Scanning Electron Microscopy– TEM. General Principles of Nano Fabrication – Fluid
Flow in Sub micrometer and Nanoscales – Heat Conduction at Nanoscale – Measurement of Thermal Conductivity–Nano Products
– Application of Nanoproducts – Challenges in Nanoscale Engineering.
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
Tai-Ran Hsu, “MEMS and Microsystems: Design, Manufacture and Nano Scale Engineering”, 2nd Edition, John Wiley and
1.
Sons, New York, 2021.
REFERENCES:
Wesley C. Sanders, “Basic Principles of Nanotechnology”, 1 st Edition, CRC Press, Taylor & Francis Group, New York,
1.
2019.
Murty B.S., Shankar P., Baldev Raj, Rath, & James Murday, “Nanoscience and Nanotechnology”, Universities Press
2.
(India) Private Limited, Hyderabad, 2013.
CO1 retrieve the concepts of scaling laws Understanding (K2)
CO2 employ sensors and actuators in micro systems Applying (K3)
CO3 interpret on the rudiments of micro fabrication techniques Applying (K3)
CO4 understand the properties of nanostructures and Nano synthesis Understanding (K2)
CO5 use the nano-structured materials for engineering applications Applying (K3)

CO1 3 1 2 2
CO2 3 2 1 1 1 3 3
CO3 3 2 1 1 1 3 3
CO4 3 2 1 1 1 3 3
CO5 3 2 1 1 1 3 3

Total %
Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) %
CAT1 20 60 20 100
CAT2 30 40 30 100
CAT3 30 40 30 100
ESE 30 40 30 100
22EIE21 - MACHINE LEARNING AND ITS APPLICATIONS
Programme &
Branch
Preamble This course is intended to provide the foundation on topics in probability and various statistical methods which
form the basis for many other areas in the mathematical sciences including parametric methods and decision
theory. As application of machine learning case studies will also be addressed.
Unit – I Machine Learning Basic Concepts: 9
Learning Associations – Classification – Regression – Unsupervised Learning – Reinforcement Learning. Supervised Learning:
Learning Multiple Classes - Model Selection and Generalization. Bayesian Decision Theory: Introduction – Classification - Losses
and Risks – Discriminant Function.
Unit – II Dimensionality Reduction, Clustering and Decision Trees: 9
Introduction – Subset Selection – Principal Component Analysis – Factor Analysis – Multidimensional Scaling – Linear
Discriminate Analysis. Clustering: Introduction – Mixture Densities – K-means Clustering .Decision Trees: Univariate Trees -
Pruning – Multivariate Trees.
Unit – III Multilayer Perceptrons: 9
Introduction – The Perceptron - Training a Perceptron – Learning Boolean Function – Multilayer Perceptrons - MLP as a Universal
Approximator – Back Propagation Algorithm – Training Procedures - Tuning the Network Size – Bayesian View of Learning –
Learning Time: Time Delay Neural Networks – Recurrent Networks.
Unit – IV Local and Graphical Models: 9
Local Models: Introduction – Competitive Learning– Normalized and Competitive Basis Function – Learning Vector Quantization.
Graphical Models: Canonical cases for conditional independence – Example of Graphical Models. Reinforcement Learning:
Introduction – Elements of Reinforcement Learning – Model Based Learning - Temporal Difference Learning – Generalization.
Unit – V Applications of Machine Learning: 9
Clustering: Analysis for Market Research -Regression: Predicting house prices with regression. Classification: Music Genre
Classification – Computer vision.
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
1. Ethem Alpaydin, “Introduction to Machine Learning “,3 rd Edition, The MIT Press, London, England , 2014
REFERENCES:
Luis Pedro Coelho, Willi Richert, “Building Machine Learning Systems with Python” 2nd Edition, Packt Publishing, England,
1.
2015.
2. Tom M.Mitchelll, “Machine Learning” 1st Edition, McGraw-Hill Education, New York, 1997.
3. James A Anderson, “An Introduction to Neural Networks”, 1 st Edition, MIT Press, UK,1995
CO1 infer the basic concepts of learning methods involved in machine learning Understanding (K2)
CO2 explain the fundamentals of dimensionality reduction, clustering and decision trees Understanding (K2)
CO3 summarize the concepts of neural networks along with its architectures Applying(K3)
CO4 explain the various models and reinforcement learning techniques Understanding (K2)
CO5 apply machine learning algorithms for basic clustering, classification and regression problems Applying(K3)

CO1 3 1 2 2
CO2 3 1 2 2
CO3 3 2 1 1 1 3 3
CO4 3 1 2 2
CO5 3 2 1 1 1 3 3

Total %
Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) %
CAT1 20 60 20 100
CAT2 20 30 50 100
CAT3 20 40 40 100
ESE 20 40 40 100
22EIE22 - INSTRUMENTATION IN AIRCRAFT NAVIGATION AND CONTROL
Programme &
Branch
Preamble To discuss the concepts of aircraft instruments and cockpit layout in modern aircraft and deals with the
conventional and advanced flight instruments.
Unit – I Basics of Aircraft and Aircraft Instruments: 9
Introduction – Control Surfaces – Forces – Moments and Angle of Attack – Engines – Avionics – Modern Aircraft System. Aircraft
Instruments and their Layout – Aircraft Display Types – Quantitative and Qualitative Display – Instrument Grouping – Basic T
Grouping, Glass Cockpits of Modern Aircraft.
Unit – II Air Data Instruments and Directional Systems: 9
Introduction to Air Data Instruments – Pitot pressure and Pitot tube – Types of Air Data Instruments – Pneumatic-type Air Data
Instruments – Air Speed Indicator, Air Data Computer – International Standard Atmosphere – Air Data Instruments – Directional
Systems: Magnetic Compass – Earth Magnetic Field – Flux Detector Unit.
Unit – III Gyroscopic and Advanced Flight Instruments: 9
Introduction – Types of Gyro – Conventional Mechanical, Vibrating Gyros, RLG, FOG – Basic Mechanical Gyro and its Properties –
Directional Gyro and limitations – Gyro Horizon – Turn and Bank Indicator – Turn Coordinator – Standby Attitude Director Indicator
Advanced Direction Indicators.
Unit – IV Engine Instruments and Indicators: 9
Introduction – Engine Speed Measurements – Electrical Tacho Generator/Indicator, Servo Type, Non-Contact Type, Optical
Tachometer, Hall Effect Sensor – Torque Measurements – Electronic Torque Meter – Pressure Measurements – Engine Pressure
Ratio Indicator. Engine Fuel Indicators: Fuel Quantity Indicator.
Unit – V Aircraft Navigation and Safety Warning Systems: 9
Introduction – Radio Navigation Aids – VHF Omni Directional Range System DME/ILS/INS/GPS – Principle of VOR operation –
Distance Measuring Equipment, Instrument Landing Systems –Inertial Navigation System: Principle, Gimballed and Strap Down INS
– Global Positioning System. Air Data Warning Systems.
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
Nagabhushana S & Sudha L K. “Aircraft Instrumentation and Systems”, 2 nd Edition, I.K. International Publishing House
1.
Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2013.
REFERENCES:
Federal Aviation Administration (FAA), “Instrument Flying Handbook”, 1 st Edition, Aviation Supplies and Academics,
1.
Washington, 2013.
Megson T M G., “Aircraft Structures for Engineering Students”, 4 th Edition, Elsevier Science and Technology, Great
2.
Britain, 2007.
CO1 infer the basics of aircraft and aircraft instruments Understanding(K2)
CO2 discuss about air data instruments and directional systems Understanding (K2)
CO3 make use of gyroscopes for advanced flight instruments Applying(K3)
CO4 outline the fundamentals of engine instruments and indicators Understanding (K2)
CO5 utilize the concepts of aircraft navigation safety warning systems Applying(K3)

CO1 3 1 2 2
CO2 3 1 2 2
CO3 3 2 1 1 1 3 3
CO4 3 1 2 2
CO5 3 1 1 1 1 3 3

Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K6) %
CAT1 30 70 100
CAT2 30 40 30 100
CAT3 30 40 30 100
ESE 30 40 30 100
22EIE23 - INDUSTRIAL DATA COMMUNICATION
Programme &
Branch
Preamble To educate on the basic concepts of data communication, different industrial communication protocols and
wireless communication.
Unit – I Serial communication: 9
Serial Communication: OSI reference model – Protocols – RS-232 overview, RS-232 interface standard (CCITT V.24 interface
standard) – Half-duplex operation of the RS-232 interface – Limitations – RS-485 overview – The RS-485 interface standard – RS-
485 vs RS-422 – The 20 mA Current loop.
Unit – II Copper Cable and Fiber Optics Cable Communication: 9
Copper cable: Characteristics – Cable selection – Coaxial cables – Twisted-pair cable – Distribution/installation standards –
Connector standards. Fibre optics Communication: Fiber-optic cable components – Cable parameter – Types of optical fiber – Basic
cable types – Connecting fibers.
Unit – III MODBUS, PROFIBUS PA/DP/FMS and TCP/IP: 9
MODBUS: Modbus Overview – MODBUS protocol structure – Function codes – query response cycle, transmission mode, Message
Formatting. PROFIBUS PA/DP/FMS: PROFIBUS protocol stack- The PROFIBUS communication model- Relationship between
application process and communication – Communication objects. TCP/IP – TCP/IP overview: Introduction – Internet Layer Protocols
(Packet Transport) – Host-to-host layer: end to end reliability. TCP/IP troubleshooting: Introduction – Common problems – Typical
network layer problems – Transport layer problems.
Unit – IV HART and Foundation Field Bus: 9
HART: HART Introduction – HART and smart instrumentation – Physical layer, Data link and application layer – HART Commands.
Foundation Field Bus: Introduction – The Physical layer and Wiring Rules, The Data link layer, The Application layer, The User layer,
Error detection and diagnostics - High-speed Ethernet (HSE)
Unit – V Industrial Ethernet and Wireless Communication 9
Industrial Ethernet: Introduction – 10 Mbps Ethernet – 100 Mbps Ethernet – Gigabit Ethernet – Industrial Ethernet.
Wireless communication: Satellite systems – Wireless LANs- Radio and wireless communication : Introduction – components of radio
link – radio spectrum and frequency allocation – Radio MODEMs.
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
1. Deon Reynders, Steve Mackay, Edwin Wright, “Practical Industrial Data Communications”, 1st Edition, Elsevier, 2005.
REFERENCES:
1. Forouzan, Behrouz A., “Data communication and Networking”, 5 th Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2013.
2. William L.Schweber, “Data Communications”, 1st Edition, Tata McGraw-Hall, 2009.

Steve Mackay, Edwin Wright, Deon Reynders,” Practical Industrial Data Networks: Design, Installation and
3.
Troubleshooting”, 1st Edition, Elsevier, 2005.
Make use of the essentials of the communication system and learn the serial
CO1 Understanding(K2)
communication interface
CO2 Interpret knowledge about Copper cable and fiber optic cable communication Understanding(K2)
CO3 Examine the suitability of various communication protocols Understanding(K2)
CO4 Identify the architecture and applications of HART and Field bus Applying (K3)
CO5 Examine the concepts of Industrial Ethernet and wireless communications Applying (K3)

CO1 3 1 1 2 2
CO2 3 1 1 2 2
CO3 3 1 1 2 2
CO4 3 2 1 1 1 1 3 3
CO5 3 1 1 2 2

Total %
Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % %
CAT1 20 80 100
CAT2 20 80 100
CAT3 20 60 20 100
ESE 20 60 20 100
22EIE24 - OPTIMAL AND ADAPTIVE CONTROL
Programme &
Branch
Preamble To provide the knowledge about fundamental concepts of optimal and adaptive control techniques.
Unit – I Optimal Control Formulation: 9
Matrix properties and definitions – Quadratic forms and definiteness – State space form for continuous systems. Calculus of
variations: Fundamental concepts – The unctional of a single function- Optimal Control Formulation: The Performance measure:
Performance measures for optimal control problems, selecting a performance measure. Constraints – Variational approach to optimal
control problems: Necessary conditions for optimal control.
Unit – II Linear Quadratic Optimal Control Systems: 9
Problem formulation – Linear regulator problem –Infinite time linear quadraticator – Meaningful interpretation of Riccati coefficient –
Analytical solution of algebraic Riccati equation – Equivalence of open loop and closed loop. Design of LQR: Inverted pendulum, DC
motor speed control.
Unit – III Dynamic Programming: 9
The Optimal control law –Principle of optimality – Dynamic programming applied to routing problem – Recurrence relation of dynamic
programming – Computational procedure for solving optimal control problems- Characteristics of dynamic programming solutions.
Unit – IV Self Tuning Regulators: 9
Introduction to adaptive control –classification –Pole placement design, Direct and Indirect self tuning regulators, continuous time self
tuners, minimum variance and moving average controllers, stochastic direct and indirect self tuning regulators, linear quadratic self
tuning regulators
Unit – V Model Reference Adaptive control: 9
The MIT rule- Lyapunov theory – Design of model reference adaptive controller using MIT rule and Lyapunov theory – Relation
between MRAS and STR, Introduction to Adaptive back stepping.
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
1. Kirk, Donald E. “Optimal Control Theory: An Introduction” 1st Edition, Dover publications, USA, 2004 for Unit -1, 2 & 3
2. Karl J Astrom and Bjorn Wittenmark, “Adaptive Control”, 2nd Edition, Addison Wesley, USA, 1995 for Unit- 4 & 5
REFERENCES:
1. Desineni Subburam Naidu, “Optimal Control Systems” 1st Edition, CRC Press, London, 2002.
Rolf Isermann and Macro munchhof, “Identification of dynamic systems an introduction with applications”, 8 th Edition,
2.
Springer Verlag, Berlin, 2011.

CO1 formulate optimal control problem Understanding (K2)
CO2 apply the concepts in the design of optimal controller using LQR concepts Applying (K3)
CO3 determine optimal control solution for discrete systems using dynamic programming Applying (K3)
CO4 gain knowledge about the model reference adaptive control and self-tuning control systems Understanding (K2)
CO5 know the Implementation aspects of adaptive control and applications Applying (K3)

CO1 3 1 2 2
CO2 3 2 1 1 1 3 3
CO3 3 2 1 1 1 3 3
CO4 3 1 2 2
CO5 3 2 1 1 1 3 3

Total %
Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) %
CAT1 20 40 40 100
CAT2 20 40 40 100
CAT3 20 40 40 100
ESE 20 40 40 100
22EIE25 - TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT
Programme &
Branch
Preamble This course deals with quality concepts and Total Quality Management (TQM) principles focusing on process
quality for customer perspective. It also deals with the basic and modern quality management tools including
ISO standards
Unit – I Quality Concepts and Principles 9
Definition of Quality - Dimensions of Quality - Quality Planning - Quality Assurance and Control - Quality Costs with Case
Studies - Elements / Principles of TQM - Historical Review – Leadership – Qualities / Habits - Quality Council - Quality Statements,
Strategic Planning – Importance - Case Studies - Deming Philosophy - Barriers to TQM Implementation – Cases with TQM
Success and Failures.
Unit – II TQM-Principles and Strategies 9
Customer Satisfaction - Customer Perception of Quality - Customer Complaints - Customer Retention, Employee Involvement
– Motivation - Empowerment - Teams - Recognition and Reward - Performance Appraisal, Continuous Process Improvement -
Juran’s Trilogy - PDSA Cycle - 5S - Kaizen, Supplier Partnership - Partnering - Sourcing - Supplier Selection -
Supplier Rating - Relationship Development, Performance Measures – Purpose – Methods - Cases.
Unit – III Control Charts for Process Control 9
Basic Seven Tools of Quality and its Role in Quality Control, Statistical Fundamentals - Measures of Central Tendency and
Dispersion, Population and Sample - Normal Curve - Control Charts for Variables and Attributes - Process Capability - Case Study -
Introduction to Six Sigma.
Unit – IV TQM-Modern Tools 9
New Seven Tools of Quality, Benchmarking - Need - Types and Process, Quality Function Deployment - House of Quality
(HOQ) Construction - Case Studies, Introduction to Taguchi’s Robust Design - Quality Loss Function - Design of Experiments
(DOE), Total Productive Maintenance (TPM) - Uptime Enhancement, Failure Mode and Effect Analysis (FMEA) - Risk Priority
Number (RPN) – Process - Case Studies.
Unit – V Quality Systems 9
Need for ISO 9000 and Other Quality Systems - ISO 9000: 2015 Quality System – Elements - Implementation of Quality
System - Documentation - Quality Auditing, Introduction to ISO 14000 - IATF 16949 - TL 9000-IEC 17025 - ISO 18000 - ISO
20000 - ISO 22000 - ISO21001. Process of Implementing ISO - Barriers in ISO Implementation.
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
Besterfield Dale H., Besterfield Carol, Besterfield Glen H., Besterfield Mary, Urdhwareshe Hemant, UrdhwaresheRashmi.
1. th
"Total Quality Management", 5 Edition, Pearson Education, Noida, 2018.
REFERENCES:
1. Subburaj Ramasamy, "Total Quality Management", McGraw Hill Education, New Delhi, 2017.
th
2. James R. Evans and William M. Lindsay, "The Management and Control of Quality", 8 Edition, Cengage Learning, 2012.
3. David Goetsch & Stanley Davis, “Quality Management for Organizational Excellence: Introduction to Total Quality”, 8th
Edition, Pearson, 2017.
CO1 demonstrate the evolution of TQM principles Understanding (K2)
CO2 illustrate the principles and strategies of TQM Understanding (K2)
CO3 use control charts and identify process capability of a process Applying (K3)
CO4 apply various quality tools and techniques in both manufacturing and service industry Applying (K3)
CO5 choose appropriate quality standards and implement them in the respective industry Applying (K3)

CO1 2 2 1 1 3
CO2 2 2 1 1 3
CO3 2 2 1 1 3
CO4 2 2 1 1 3
CO5 1 1 1 1 3
Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) % %
CAT1 25 45 30 100
CAT2 20 40 40 100
CAT3 25 45 30 100
ESE 20 40 40 100
22EIE26 - MULTISENSOR AND DATA FUSION
Programme &
Branch
Prerequisites Digital Signal Processing 7 PE 3 0 0 3
Preamble To impart the fundamental knowledge and applications of data fusion and implementation of data fusion
algorithms
Unit – I Sensor and Data Fusion: 9
Introductions, Sensors and Sensor data. Use of multiple sensors, Fusion applications. The inference hierarchy: Output data. Data
fusion model: Architectural concepts and issues – Benefits of data fusion.
Unit – II Data Registration: 9
Introduction – Registration Problem – Review of existing research – Registration using Meta-Heuristics – Wavelet-based
registration of Range Images – Registration Assistance/Preprocessing – Registration using Elastic Transformations – Theoretical
Bounds.
Unit – III Principles of Image and Spatial Data Fusion: 9
Introduction – Motivation for combining image and spatial data – Defining image and spatial data fusion – Three classic levels of
combination for Multisensor Automatic Target – Image data fusion for Enhancement of Imagery data – Spatial data fusion
applications – Spatial data fusion GEOINT.
Unit – IV Identity Declaration: 9
Identity declaration and pattern recognition – Future extraction – Parametric Templates – Cluster Analysis Techniques – Adaptive
Neural Networks – Physical Models – Knowledge-based Methods – Hybrid Techniques.
Unit – V Implementation of Data Fusion: 9
Introduction – Requirements Analysis and Definition – Sensor Selection and Evaluation – Functional Allocation and Decomposition
– Architecture Trade-Offs – Algorithm Selection – Database Definition – HCI design – Software Implementation – Test and
Evaluation – Survey on Military Applications.
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
David L. hall, Sonya A.H. McMullen, “Mathematical techniques in Multi sensor data fusion”, 2 nd Edition, Artech House,
1.
Boston, 2004, for units 1, 4 and 5.
Martin E. liggins, David L. Hall and James Llinas, “Handbook of Multi sensor data Fusion: Theory and Practice”, 2 nd
2.
Edition, CRC Press, Boca Raton 2009, for units 2 and 3.
REFERENCES:
Brooks R. R. and Iyengar S. S., “Multisensor Fusion: Fundamentals and Applications with software”, 1 st Edition, Prentice
1.
Hall Inc., New Jersey, 1998.
2. Jitendra R. Raol, “Data Fusion Mathematics, Theory and Practice”, 1st Edition, CRC Press, Boca Raton, 2015.
CO1 describe the basics concepts of sensor and data fusion Understanding (K2)
Understanding (K2)
CO2 illustrate the data registration for data fusion
Understanding (K2)
CO3 examine the principles of image and spatial data fusion
CO4 explain the various techniques in data fusion Understanding (K2)
CO5 perform case study on the data fusion algorithm for realtime applications Applying (K3)

CO1 3 1 1 1 2 2
CO2 3 1 1 1 2 2
CO3 3 1 1 1 2 2
CO4 3 1 1 1 2 2
CO5 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 3 3

Total %
Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) %
CAT1 30 70 100
CAT2 30 70 100
CAT3 30 40 30 100
ESE 15 70 15 100
22EIE27 - PIPING AND INSTRUMENTATION DIAGRAMS
Programme &
Branch
Preamble This course discusses the basic knowledge on Instrumentation standards and to make students familiarize
with Instrumentation Symbols, Abbreviations and Identification of Instruments to create Piping and
Instrumentation Diagrams for Process Industries
Unit – I Instrument Symbols And Standards: 9
Instrumentation standards: Purpose, Industry codes and standards, Government Regulations – Application to Industries,
Application to work activities – Application to classes of Instrumentation and to Instrument functions.
Identification Systems: Identification System guidelines: Instrument Index – Multipoint, Multivariable and Multifunction devices –
System Identification – Loop Identification number – Identification Letter Tables
Unit – II Graphic Symbol Systems: 9
Instrument Line symbols – Measurement and control devices – AND/OR function symbols – Discrete devices – Shared continuous
devices – Shared On/Off devices – Multipoint, Multifunction, Multivariable devices and loops. Primary elements – Final control
elements – Electrical schematic symbols.
Unit – III Fundamentals of P&ID Development: 9
Identification of P&ID and its role in process industries - P&ID Development Activity- Anatomy of a P&ID Sheet – Title Block -
Ownership Block - Reference Drawing Block – Revision Block – Comments Block – Main Body of a P&ID.
Pipes and Equipments: Fluid Conductors: Pipes, Tubes, and Ducts – Pipe Identifiers – Pipe Symbol – Pipe Tag – Pipe fittings.
Manual Valves and Automatic Valves – classification of valves – valve operators – Actuators – Tagging Automatic valves – valve
positions. Heat Transfer units: Heat exchanger identifier – Heat exchanger identifier Symbol – Heat exchanger Tag – Heat
exchanger P&ID.
Unit – IV Instrumentation and Control System: 9
Fundamentals of Instrumentation and Control - ICSS System Technology - ICSS Elements – Basic Process Control System
(BPCS) –Instruments on P&IDs - Instrument Identifier – Signals: Communication Between Instruments – Different Instrument
Elements - Simple control loops – Level Control Loops –Pressure Control Loops –Temperature Control Loops – Composition
Control Loops – Flow Control Loops.
Unit – V Plant Interlocks and Alarms: 9
Introduction- Safety strategies – Concept of a SIS – SIS extent – Anatomy of a SIS: SIS Element Symbols, SIS Final Elements,
SIS Logic – Showing Safety Instrumented Functions on P&IDs – Discrete Control – Alarm System: Anatomy of Alarm systems,
Alarm requirements, Alarm system Symbology, Concept of ‘Common Alarm’.
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
Liptak B.G., “Instrumentation Engineers Handbook (Process Measurement & Analysis)”, Volume 3, 4th Edition , Chilton
1.
Book Co, CRC Press, United States, 2016. (Unit 1,2)
REFERENCES:
1. Moe Toghraei, “Piping and Instrumentation Diagram Development”, 1 st Edition, Wiley-Blackwell, USA, 2019. Unit (3,4,5)
Ernest E. Ludwig, “Applied Process Design for Chemical and Petrochemical Plants, Vol-I”, 4th Edition, Gulf Publishing
2.
Company, Houston, 2007.
CO1 summarize the basics of instrumentation standards and symbols. Understanding (K2)
CO2 identify the instrument symbols and function symbols for various elements. Understanding (K2)
interpret the symbols of pipes and various equipments in process industry and recognize P&ID
and its role in process industry.
CO4 implement the control concepts in basic process systems and develop simple control loops Applying (K3)
CO5 develop the safety interlock systems and alarm systems in process plants and equipments Applying (K3)

CO1 3 1 1 2 2 2
CO2 3 1 1 2 2 2
CO3 3 1 1 2 2 2
CO4 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 3 3
CO5 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 3 3

Total %
Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) %
CAT1 40 60 100
CAT2 20 30 50 100
CAT3 20 30 50 100
ESE 20 40 40 100
22EIE28 - ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE
Programme
& Branch
Preamble It is a broad discipline that promises to simulate numerous innate human skills such as automatic programming,
case-based reasoning, natural language processing, pattern recognition and speech recognition etc. There is a
thrust in using learning approaches to build new solutions in many real world applications.
Unit – I Overview of Artificial Intelligence: 9
Introduction – The History of Artificial Intelligence. Intelligent Agents: Introduction - Structure of Intelligent Agents. Problem
Solving: Problem - Solving Agents - Formulating problems.
Unit – II Problem Solving and Informed Search Methods: 9
Searching for Solutions – Search Strategies: Breadth - first search – Uniform cost search – Depth - First search. Informed Search
Methods: Best-First Search – Heuristic Functions – Memory bounded search – Game Playing: Perfect Decisions in Two - Person
Games – Alpha – Beta Pruning.
Unit – III Knowledge and Reasoning: 9
A Knowledge - Based Agent – Representation, Reasoning and Logic – Prepositional Logic – First Order Logic: Syntax and
Semantics - Extensions and Notational Variations. Logical Reasoning Systems: Introduction – Indexing, Retrieval and Unification.
Planning: Basic Representations for Planning.
Unit – IV Learning in Neural and Belief Networks: 9
Neural Networks – Perceptrons – Multilayer Feed-forward Networks – Applications of Neural Networks – Bayesian Methods for
Learning Belief Networks. Reinforcement Learning: Passive Learning in a Known Environment – Generalization in Reinforcement
Learning.
Unit – V Applications of Artificial Intelligence: 9
Perception: Image formation - Image – Processing operation for Early Vision. Robotics: Tasks – Parts – Architectures –
Configuration Spaces – Navigation and Motor Planning.
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
Stuart J.Russell and Peter Norvig , “Artificial Intelligence – A Modern Approach”, 1st Edition , Prentice Hall,
1.
Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey, 2009.
REFERENCES:
Nils J. Nilsson, ―Artificial Intelligence: A new Synthesis, 2nd Edition, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, Inc, San
1.
Francisco, California, 2000.
Elaine Rich and Kevin Knight, ―Artificial Intelligence, 2 nd Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, New York, United States,
2.
2008.
George F. Luger, “Artificial Intelligence-Structures and Strategies for Complex Problem Solving”, 6th Edition,
3.
Pearson Education, University of New Mexico, 2008.
explain the concept of artificial intelligence and impart knowledge on the fundamental
concept of Intelligent system
develop an ability to understand the problem solving and informed search systems
CO2 Applying (K3)
interpret the knowledge based agents and reasoning logic involved in it
comprehend the learning concepts involved in neural and belief networks
CO4 Applying (K3)
apply the artificial intelligence concepts in select problems
CO5 Applying (K3)

CO1 3 1 2 2
CO2 3 2 1 1 1 3 3
CO3 3 1 2 2
CO4 3 2 1 1 1 3 3
CO5 3 2 1 1 1 3 3

Test / Bloom’s Remembering Understanding Applying (K3) Analyzing Evaluating Creating
Total %
Category* (K1) % (K2) % % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) %
CAT1 20 45 35 100
CAT2 25 45 30 100
CAT3 15 40 45 100
ESE 25 45 30 100
22EIE29 - INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL IN PROCESS INDUSTRIES
Programme &
Branch
Prerequisites Industrial Instrumentation, Process Control 7 PE 3 0 0 3
Preamble This course provides the concepts of various processes in process Industries such as steel, glass, dairy
products, pharmaceutical and fermentation. This course emphasizes the Instrumentation and Control
techniques involved in such units.
Unit – I Basics of Process Measurements: 9
Continuous vs. discrete measurement – Continuous vs. Sampled measurement – In-line, On-line and Off-line – Measurement
uncertainty – Measurement decision risk –Calibration – Measurement device components – Current loop – Power supply and
Wiring – Serial communications – Smart transmitters.
Unit – II Instrumentation and Control in Steel Industries: 9
Process description in diagrammatic and functional block details – Raw materials preparation – Operation of Blast Furnace (BF) –
Basic Oxygen Furnace (BOF) – Electric Furnace (EF) – Open Hearth Furnace (OHF) – Gas and water control system in Basic
oxygen furnace–Mold level control system in strand casting operation.
Unit – III Instrumentation and Control in Glass Industries: 9
Definition and composition of glass – Glassmaking process – Level measurement: Electrical, Pneumatic, Optical method –
Temperature measurement: Radiation pyrometer – Furnace pressure measurement – Flow measurement – Automatic inspection
in container and flat glass manufacturing – Control of glass melting furnaces – Electric booster melting controls
Unit – IV Instrumentation and Control in Dairy Industries: 9
Process description in diagrammatic and functional block details – Plate heat exchanger – Single stage and Two stage
Homogenizer – Doppler ultrasonic flow meter – Control system in HTST pasteurizer– Temperature control in spray dryer –
Automation for Cleaning in Place (CIP) – Refrigeration system – Metal detection system
Unit – V Instrumentation and Control in Pharmaceutical and Fermentation Industries: 9
Description of the penicillin production process – Flow measurement – Level measurement – Pressure measurement –
Temperature measurement – Fermentation control system – Continuous fermentation – pH control – Temperature control –
Centrifuge purging control.
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
Liptak B.G, “Instrumentation in the Processing Industries”, 1st Edition, Chilton Book Company, Boston, 1973.
1.
(Digitized 2008).
REFERENCES:
1. Cecil Smith, “Basic Process Measurements”, 1st Edition, John Wiley & Sons, New Jersey, 2009. (E-Book 2011)
2. Gosta Bylund, “Dairy Processing Hand Book”, 3rd Edition, Tetrapak Processing Systems, Sweden, 2015.
Instrumentation and Controls in Dairy Industries – http://ecoursesonline.iasri.res.in/course/view.php?id=82
3. Refrigeration System – http://ecoursesonline.iasri.res.in/mod/page/view.php?id=124105
Metal Detection System – Dairy Knowledge Portal – https://www.dairyknowledge.in › default › files
CO1 explain the basics of process measurements in various industries Understanding (K2)
CO2 build the instrumentation and control techniques involved in iron and steel industry Applying (K3)
CO3 develop the instrumentation and control systems in glass industry Applying (K3)
CO4 apply the various instrumentation and control schemes in dairy industry Applying (K3)
CO5 interpret the knowledge on instruments used in pharmaceutical and fermentation industry Understanding (K2)

CO1 3 1 2 2
CO2 3 2 1 1 1 3 3
CO3 3 2 1 1 1 3 3
CO4 3 2 1 1 1 3 3
CO5 3 1 2 2
Total %
Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) %
CAT1 20 50 30 100
CAT2 10 40 50 100
CAT3 10 40 50 100
ESE 10 40 50 100
22EIE30 - INTELLIGENT ROBOTIC SYSTEMS
Programme &
Branch
Preamble The course aims to impart the knowledge in designing automatic manufacturing systems with robotic control
using the principle behind robotic drive system, end effectors, sensor, robot kinematics.
Unit – I Fundamentals of Robotics: 9
A brief history of Robotics – Robot Anatomy: Polar – Cylindrical – Cartesian Coordinate – Joint–arm Configuration – Work Volume –
Robot Drive Systems: Hydraulic – Electric: Stepper Motor, Servo Motor – Pneumatic – Power Transmission Systems. Control
systems: Limited sequence – Play Back with Point to Point – Continuous Path Control – Intelligent Robots. Precision of movement:
Spatial Resolution – Accuracy – Repeatability – Compliance – Robotic Sensors – Robot Programming and Work cell control – Robot
applications.
Unit – II End Effectors and Sensors: 9
End Effectors: Types of End Effectors: Mechanical Gripper: Vacuum Cups – Magnetic Grippers – Adhesive Gripper – Hooks and
Scoops – Tools as End Effectors. – Robot/ End–Effectors Interface – Consideration in Gripper Selection And Design.
Robotic Sensors: Transducers and Sensors – Sensors in Robotics: Position and Velocity Sensor – Tactile – Proximity and Range
Sensors – Slip Sensors – Force and Torque Sensors – Miscellaneous Sensors and Sensor Based Systems.
Unit – III Programming of Robots: 9
Robot Methods of Programming: Lead through Programming Methods – Robot Program as a path in space – Motion Interpolation –
WAIT, SIGNAL and DELAY Commands – Branching – Capabilities and limitations of Lead through Methods. Textual Robot
Programming – Robot Language Structure, Motion Commands, End Effectors and Sensor Commands, Program Control and Sub–
routines, Monitor Mode Commands.
Unit – IV Robot Control: 9
Introduction to Manipulator Kinematics – Homogeneous Transformations and Robot Kinematics – Manipulator Path control – Robot
Dynamics – Configuration of a Robot Controller. Open and Closed loop control- The manipulator control Problem- Linear control
Schemes- Partitioned PD, PID and Adaptive Control Scheme – Modeling and control of a Single Joint Robot – Linear Second order
SISO Model of Manipulator Joint – Torque and Force Control of Robots. Machine Vision System
Unit – V Automation and Applications of Robots: 9
Fixed Automation, Flexible Automation and Programmable Automation. Intelligent Industrial Automation, Industrial Networking, Bus
Standards Automatic Feeders, Automatic Storage and Retrieval Systems (AS/RS), Transfer Lines, Automatic Inspection Systems.
Factors influencing the Selection of Robots- Robots for Welding, Painting, Assembly, Nuclear, Thermal and Chemical Plants–
Undersea Robots – Space Robots – Agri Bots. Introduction to Mobile Robots, Legged Robots and Remote Controlled Robots,
Automated Guided Robots, Micro Robots – Control and Safety Issues.
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
Mikell P.Groover, Mitchell Weiss, Roger N.Nagel, Nicholas G. Odrey, “Industrial Robotics Technology, Programming and
1.
Applications”, 2nd Edition, Tata McGraw Hill Education Private Limited, New Delhi, 2021.
REFERENCES:
1. Mittal R K, Nagrath I J, “Robotics and Control”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2017.
Deb S R. Deb S., “Robotics Technology and Flexible Automation”, 2 nd Edition, Tata McGraw Hill Education Private Limited,
2.
New Delhi, 2017.
3. Ashitava Ghoshal, “Robotics-Fundamental Concepts and Analysis”, Oxford University Press, Sixth impression, 2010
outline the basic concept of robotics and summarize the types of drives used for robotic
applications
CO2 understand different types of end effectors and sensors required for specific applications Understanding (K2)
CO3 acquire and apply the programming knowledge to control robots Applying (K3)
CO4 relate the kinematics and dynamics effects for task planning in robots Applying (K3)
CO5 infer robots for various applications with safety concern Understanding (K2)

CO1 3 2 2 2
CO2 3 2 2 2
CO3 3 3 1 1 1 3 3
CO4 3 3 1 1 1 3 3
CO5 3 2 2 2

Total %
Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) %
CAT1 30 60 10 – – – 100
CAT2 20 40 40 – – – 100
CAT3 20 40 40 – – – 100
ESE 20 40 40 – – – 100
22EIE31 - MODEL PREDICTIVE CONTROL
Programme &
Branch
Preamble To understand the basic principles and algorithm of predictive control and to get acquainted with the
fundamental contents of predictive control theory and applications
Unit – I Need for Predictive Control: 9
Classical control assumptions: PID compensation-lag-lead compensation-classical control analysis. Challenges in classical
methods: Controlling systems with non-minimum phase zeros and time delays – impact of delays- control of open loop unstable
systems-the potential value of prediction-main components of Model Predictive Control (MPC)
Unit – II Generation and Development of Predictive Control: 9
Principles of Predictive Control (PC)-prediction model-dynamic matrix control (DMC) based on step response model-DMC
algorithm and implementation-DMC in state space framework-general predictive control based on the linear difference equation
model – PC based on state space model.
Unit – III Synthesis of Stable Predictive Control: 9
Fundamental philosophy of qualitative synthesis theory of PC –relationship between MPC and optimal control-synthesis of
stable PC – PC with zero terminal constraints – PC with terminal cost functions-general stability conditions of PC- sub-
optimality analysis of PC
Unit – IV Predictive Control of Non-linear Systems: 9
General description of PC for non-linear systems- PC based on input-output linearization – multiple MPC based on fuzzy
clustering – neural network PC – PC for Hammersian systems – PC with feed-forward and feedback structure – cascade PC.
Unit – V Applications of Predictive Control: 9
Industrial applications and software development of PC –role of PC in industrial process optimization – key technologies pf PC
implementation – process description and control system configuration –problem formulation and variable selection – plant
testing and model identification-application of PC in an automatic train operation system and in solar power plant.
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
Yugeng Xi , Dewei Li, “Predictive Control: Fundamentals and Developments”, 1 st Edition, Wiley Publishers, USA,
1.
2019.
REFERENCES:
Camacho E.F., Bordons C., “Model Predictive control in Process Industry””, 1 st Edition, Springer publications,
1.
London,1995.
2. Rossiter J.A., “A First Course in Predictive Control” 2nd Edition, CRC Press, USA, 2018.
CO1 recognize the need for predictive control and to identify the main components Understanding (K2)
CO2 formulate the predictive control problem and algorithms Applying (K3)
Applying (K3)
CO3 apply the concepts of synthesizing stable predictive control
Applying (K3)
CO4 apply the concepts of predictive control in non-linear systems
Understanding (K2)
CO5 realize the applications of model predictive control in industries

CO1 3 1 2 2
CO2 3 2 1 1 1 3 3
CO3 3 2 1 1 1 3 3
CO4 3 2 1 1 1 3 3
CO5 3 1 2 2

Total %
Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) %
CAT1 20 50 30 100
CAT2 20 50 30 100
CAT3 20 50 30 100
ESE 20 50 30 100
22GEE01 - FUNDAMENTALS OF RESEARCH
Programme &
Branch
Prerequisites Nil 7 GE 3 0 0 3
Preamble This course familiarizes the fundamental concepts/techniques adopted in research, problem formulation and
also disseminates the process involved in collection, consolidation of published literature and rewriting them
in a presentable form using latest tools.
Unit – I Introduction to Research 9
Introduction to Research: Types and Process of Research - Outcomes of Research - Sources of Research Problem -
Characteristics of a Good Research Problem - Errors in Selecting a Research Problem - Importance of Keywords.
Unit – II Literature Review 9
Literature Review: Literature Collection - Methods - Analysis - Citation Study - Gap Analysis - Problem Formulation Techniques.
Unit – III Research Methodology 9
Research Methodology: Appropriate Choice of Algorithms/Methodologies/Methods – Data Collection – Primary Data Analysis –
Experimental Methods and Result Analysis - Investigation of Solutions for Research Problem - Interpretation - Research
Limitations.
Unit – IV Journals and Papers 9
Journals and Papers: Journals in Science/Engineering - Indexing and Impact factor of Journals. Plagiarism and Research Ethics.
Types of Research Papers - Original Article/Review Paper/Short Communication/Case Study.
Unit – V Reports and Presentations 9
How to Write a Report - Language and Style - Format of Project Report - Title Page - Abstract - Table of Contents - Headings and
Sub-Headings - Footnotes - Tables and Figures - Appendix - Bibliography etc - Different Reference Formats. Presentation using
PPTs. Research Tools.
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
1. Walliman, Nicholas. “Research Methods: The basics”. 2nd edition, Routledge, 2017., for Units I, II, III, IV & V
REFERENCES:
1. Mishra, S.B. and Alok, S. “Handbook of research methodology” Educreation Publishing, 2017
2. Kumar, Ranjit. “Research Methodology: A step-by-step guide for beginners”. SAGE Publications Limited, 2019.
Nayak, J.K. and Singh, P. “Fundamentals of Research Methodology Problems and Prospects”. SSDN Publishers &
3.
Distributors, 2021.
CO1 list the various stages in research and categorize the quality of journals Applying (K3)
CO2 formulate a research problem from published literature/journal papers Evaluating (K5)
CO3 write, present a journal paper/ project report in proper format Creating (K6)
CO4 select suitable journal and submit a research paper Applying (K3)
CO5 compile a research report and the presentation Applying (K3)

CO1 3 3 2 2 2 1 1 3 3 1 1 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 3 3 3 1 3 3 3
CO4 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 3 2 1 1 3 3 3
CO5 3 3 2 2 3 1 1 3 3 3 1 3 3 3

Total %
Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) %
CAT1 40 50 10 100
CAT2 30 50 10 10 100
CAT3 20 30 30 10 10 100
ESE 40 40 10 10 100
22EIE32- DIAGONISTIC AND THERAPEUTIC INSTRUMENTS
Programme &
Branch
Prerequisites Bio Medical Instrumentation 8 PE 3 0 0 3
Preamble To impart the fundamental knowledge and applications of Digital Signal Processing.
Unit – I Respiratory Measurements Systems: 9
Pulmonary function measurements – Basic spirometer- Ultrasonic spirometer – Fleisch Pneumotachometer – Pulmonary function
analyzers – Respiratory gas analyzers-Apnea monitor. Types of ventilators – Ventilator terms – Pressure volume flow diagram –
Microprocessor controlled ventilator.
Unit – II Ultrasonic Imaging Systems: 9
Diagnostic ultrasound – Physics of ultrasonic waves – Medical ultrasound – Basic pulse-echo apparatus – Imaging modes – Real-
time ultrasonic imaging systems – Duplex scanner – Modern ultrasound imaging systems –Three-dimensional ultrasound imaging
systems-Portable ultrasound systems.
Unit – III Arrhythmia and Ambulatory Monitoring Instruments: 9
Cardiac Arrhythmias – Arrhythmia monitor – QRS detection techniques – Ambulatory monitoring instruments – Data recording –
Data replay and analysis. Foetal monitoring instruments: Cardiotocograph – Abdominal foetal Electrocardiogram – Foetal
Phonocardiogram.
Unit – IV Blood Cell Counters: 9
Types of blood cells – Cell counting: Microscopic method – Automatic optical method – Electrical conductivity method. Anaesthetic
system: Need of anaesthesia – Anaesthesia machine. Audiometers: Mechanism of hearing –Measurement of sound – Bekesy
audiometery.
Unit – V Surgical and Therapeutic Instruments: 9
Surgical diathermy-Endoscopy basic components-Laparoscope, gastro scope, bronchoscope-Cryogenic techniques and application-
Operating microscope-arthroscopy-Modern lithotripter system-laser lithotripsy.
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
1. Khandpur R.S., “Handbook of Biomedical Instrumentation”, 3rd Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2018.
REFERENCES:
1. Joseph J. Carr and John M. Brown, “Introduction to Biomedical Equipment Technology”, Pearson Education, 2003.
2. John G. Webster, “Medical Instrumentation Application and Design”, 4th Edition, John Wiley and Sons, NewYork, 2015.
3. Leslie Cromwell, “Biomedical Instrumentation and Measurement”, 2 nd Edition, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2007.
CO1 interpret the various measurement techniques related to respiratory system Understanding(K2)
CO2 employ the ultrasound imaging techniques and its usefulness in diagnosis Applying (K3)
CO3 identify the various monitoring instruments Applying (K3)

Understanding(K2)
CO4 explain the mechanisms of special assist devices
Understanding(K2)
CO5 infer the concepts in surgical and therapeutic instruments

CO1 3 1 3 2 2
CO2 3 2 1 1 1 3 3 3
CO3 3 2 1 1 1 3 3 3
CO4 3 1 3 2 2
CO5 3 1 3 2 2

Total %
Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % %
CAT1 20 50 30 100
CAT2 50 20 30 100
CAT3 40 60 100
ESE 30 50 20 100
22EIE33 - INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL IN PAPER INDUSTRIES
Programme &
Branch
Preamble This course discusses the basic knowledge on Instrumentation in paper making process and expose the
students to various control strategies employed in paper industries
Unit – I Paper Making Process: 9
Paper making process: Raw materials, pulping and preparation, screening – bleaching, cooking, chemical addition, approach
system, paper machine, drying section, calenders, drive, finishing, other after treatment processes, coating.Properties of paper:
physical, electrical, optical and chemical properties.
Unit – II Wet End Instrumentation: 9
Conventional measurements at wet end, pressure and vacuum, temperature, liquid density and specific gravity, level, flow,
consistency measurement, pH and ORP measurement, freeness measurement.
Unit – III Dry End Instrumentation: 9
Conventional measurements, moisture basis weight, caliper, coat thickness, optical variables, measurement of length and speed.
Digester: Rotary and Batch type.
Unit – IV Control Strategies: 9
Machine and cross direction control techniques, control of pressure, vacuum, temperature, liquid density and specific gravity, level,
flow, pH, freeness, thickness, consistency, basis weight and moisture.
Unit – V Modernization in Paper Industries: 9
Paper cutting mechanism – packaging mechanism – Computer controls for online basis weight and web moisture in modern mills –
Case Studies: Waste water Management, Advances in Pulp Purification, Paper making and Finishing
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
1. Liptak, B.G., “Instrumentation Engineers Handbook (Measurement)”, CRC Press, 2005.
REFERENCES:
Libby, C. E., “Pulp and Paper Science and Technology (Volume 1, Pulp), (Volume 2, Paper)”, New York McGraw Hill,
1.
USA, 1962.
John Lavigne, “Instrumentation Applications for the Pulp and Paper Industry (A Pulp & paper book)”, Backbeat Books,
2.
1979.
CO1 describe the different stages of operation in Paper Industries Understanding(K2)
CO2 explain the working operation of instruments used in wet end section Understanding(K2)
CO3 explain the working operation of instruments used in dry end section. Understanding(K2)
CO4 iidentify the control aspects used in the paper industry Applying (K3)
CO5 demonstrate about the evolution of computer applications in paper industry Understanding(K2)

CO1 3 1 1 2 2 2
CO2 3 1 1 2 2 2
CO3 3 1 1 2 2 2
CO4 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 3 3
CO5 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 2

Total %
Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) %
CAT1 40 60 100
CAT2 40 60 100
CAT3 40 40 20 100
ESE 40 40 20 100
22EIE34 - INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL IN PETROCHEMICAL INDUSTRIES
Programme &
Branch
Prerequisites Industrial Instrumentation, Process Control 8 PE 3 0 0 3
Preamble This course provides the concepts of petroleum processing and various measurement and control techniques
applied to reactors, crystallizers, distillation columns, safety and regulations
Unit – I Petroleum Processing: 9
Petroleum Exploration – Composition of petroleum – Drilling – Recovery techniques – Oil and Gas separation: Well completion
methods – Feed stocks of Petrochemicals – Separation of Gases into individual constituents – Separation of liquids.
Unit – II Operations in Petroleum Industry: 9
Crude oil distillation – Refining of crude oil –Thermal conversion processes: Thermal cracking – Catalytic conversion processes:
Catalytic cracking –Catalytic reforming – Hydro cracking – Catalytic alkylation – Catalytic Isomerisation – Catalytic polymerization.
Unit – III Control of Reactors and Crystallizers: 9
Reactors: Basic operation and fundamentals – Temperature control – Once through cooling – Recirculated cooling – Cascade
control –Split range controls with multiple coolants – Crystallizers: Control basis – Cooling crystallizers – Classifying crystallizers –
Evaporator crystallizers – Vacuum crystallizers – Reaction crystallizers.
Unit – IV Control of Distillation Columns: 9
Distillation equipment –Column variables –Control configurations –Product Quality Control – Direct control: Feedback control –Feed
forward control – Cascade control - Inferring composition from Temperature – Column pressure control –Feed control: Feed flow
rate control - Temperature control.
Unit – V Safety and ATEX Terminology & Regulations: 9
Introduction - Intrinsic Safety - Certification of Intrinsic Safety – NEC Definition of Hazardous Locations - IEC Definition of
Hazardous Locations – Introduction to ATEX Terminology & Regulations: EC Directives - Directive 94/9/EC – ATEX 95 – Directive
1999/92/EC – ATEX 137 - North America - International IECEx Scheme - IECEx Scheme Objective – IECEx International
Certification Scheme.
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
1. Robert A. Meyers, “Handbook of Petroleum Refining Processes”,4 th Edition, McGraw-Hill, New York,2016 for Unit-1,2
Liptak B.G, “Instrumentation in the Processing Industries”, 1st Edition, Chilton Book Company, Boston, 1973.
2.
(Digitized 2008) for Unit-3,4
https://tools.niehs.nih.gov/wetp/public/Course_download2.cfm?tranid=2497
3.
https://osha.europa.eu/en/legislation/directives/21 for Unit-5
REFERENCES:
1. Dr. Ram Prasad, “Petroleum Refining Technology”, 1st Edition, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2008.
CO1 explain the basics of petroleum exploration and processing in petroleum industry Understanding (K2)
CO2 illustrate the operations of petroleum refining process in petroleum industry Understanding (K2)
CO3 build the instrumentation and control techniques involved in reactors and crystallizers Applying (K3)
CO4 apply the various instrumentation and control schemes in distillation columns Applying (K3)
describe the standards on Electrical, Intrinsic safety systems and ATEX terminology and
regulations

CO1 3 1 2 2
CO2 3 1 2 2
CO3 3 2 1 1 1 3 3
CO4 3 2 1 1 1 3 3
CO5 3 1 2 2

Total %
Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) %
CAT1 40 60 100
CAT2 10 40 50 100
CAT3 10 40 50 100
ESE 20 40 40 100
22EIE35 - VHDL PROGRAMMING AND ITS APPLICATIONS
Programme &
Branch
Preamble To impart knowledge about different modeling in VHDL programming and synthesize complex digital circuits at
several level of abstractions.
Unit – I VHDL Fundamentals: 9
History of Hardware Description Languages – HDL Abstraction – The Modern Digital Design Flow – VHDL Constructs – Data Types –
Libraries and Packages – The Entity – The Architecture – Modeling Concurrent Functionality in VHDL – Concurrent Signal
Assignments – Concurrent Signal Assignments with Logical Operators –Conditional Signal Assignments.
Unit – II Dataflow Modeling: 9
Concurrent Signal Assignment Statement – Concurrent versus Sequential Signal Assignment – Delta Delay – Conditional Signal
Assignment Statement – Block Statement – Concurrent Assertion Statement – Value of a signal.
Unit – III Structural Modeling: 9
Components: Component Declarations – Component Instantiation – Packaging Components – Configuring Component Instances:
Basic Configuration Declarations – Configuring Multiple Levels of Hierarchy – Direct Instantiation of Configured Entities –Port Maps in
Configurations.
Unit – IV Behavioral Modeling 9
If Statements: Conditional Variable Assignments – Case Statements: Selected Variable Assignments – Null Statements – Loop
Statements: Exit Statements – Next Statements – While Loops – For Loops – Summary of Loop Statements.
Unit – V Applications of VHDL in Digital System Design: 9
Combinational Logic Circuits: Adders, Multiplexer, Decoders and Encoders. Sequential logic Circuits: Flip flops, – ALU ––
Counters – Shift registers.
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
1. Peter J Ashenden, “The Designer’s Guide of VHD”L, 3rd Edition, Morgan Kaufmann publisher, USA, 2008.
REFERENCES:
Brock J LaMeres, “Introduction to Logic Circuits & Logic Design with VHDL”, 2 nd Edition, Springer Publisher, Switzerland,
1.
2019.
2. Bhasker J, “VHDL Primer”, 3rd Edition, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2008.
Sung Mo Kang, Yousf Leblebici & Chulwoo Kim, “CMOS Digital Integrated Circuits, Analysis and Design”, 4 th Edition,
3.
McGraw Hill Education, New Delhi, 2019.
CO1 understand the significance of VHDL Understanding (K2)
CO2 apply the concepts for creating dataflow modeling Applying(K3)
CO3 design the logic circuits using structural modeling Applying(K3)
CO4 develop the digital circuits using behavioral modeling Applying(K3)
CO5 design and synthesize the various applications of digital circuits using VHDL programming Applying(K3)

CO1 3 1 1 2 2
CO2 3 2 1 1 1 1 3 3
CO3 3 2 1 1 1 1 3 3
CO4 3 2 1 1 1 1 3 3
CO5 3 2 1 1 1 1 3 3

Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K6) %
CAT1 30 70 100
CAT2 10 30 60 100
CAT3 10 30 60 100
ESE 10 40 50 100
22EIE36 - COMPUTER CONTROL OF PROCESSES
amme &
ch B.E. & Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Sem. Category L T P Credit
quisites Process Control 8 PE 3 0 0 3
mble To provide knowledge and understanding required to effectively analyze and design computer-controlled
systems.
–I Computer Aided Process Control: 9
duction- Role of computers in process control – Classification of computer aided process control system – batch and
uential control processes – supervisory computer control processes – Direct Digital Control processes-Computer aided
ess control architecture- Centralized computer control systems – Distributed computer control systems – Hierarchical
puter control systems-Man Machine Interface-Economics of computer aided process control-Process related interfaces –
es of computer control process software.
– II Sampled Data Control Systems: 9
ventional control Vs Computer control– Mathematical representation of the sampling Process– Sampling frequency
iderations – Selection of optimum sampling period – Zero Order Hold-First order hold –Pulse transfer function- Complex
es representation of the sampler – Development of the Pulse transfer Function – Modified z Transform-stability analysis:
mptotic stability - BIBO stability – Internal stability- Jury’s stability analysis.
– III Design of Controllers for Linear Systems: 9
al equivalent of conventional PID controller – implementation of discrete PID algorithm-controller design for process with
ult dynamics: Non-minimum phase systems – time delay systems- Smith Predictor algorithm –Inverse response systems-
rse response compensator-Open loop unstable systems
– IV Pole Placement Design: 9
e space approach-concepts of controllability, observability, reachability and delectability-regulation by state feedback-
ervers-output feedback –the servo problem. Polynomial approach): simple design problem – The Diophantine equation –
gn procedure –Design of controller for double integrator, Harmonic oscillator and flexible robotic arm.
–V Controller Design for Nonlinear Systems: 9

arization and the classical approach-Adaptive control principles: Scheduled adaptive control –Model reference adaptive
rol-Self tuning adaptive control-Variable transformations. Model based control: Direct synthesis control –First order systems –
erorder systems –Time delay systems-Inverse response systems-Internal model control.
Total:45
BOOK:
Karl Astrom J , & JornWittenmar B, “Computer Controlled Systems: Theory and Design”, 3rd Edition, Prentice Hall
Publishers,1997 for Unit 1, 2 and 4.
st
Babatunte A. Ogunnaike & W. Harmon Ray, “Process Dynamics Modeling and Control “,1 Edition, Public Oxford
UniversityPress, Newyork, 1994 for Unit 3 and 5.
RENCES:
Singh S.K., “Computer aided Process control”, 1st Edition, Prentice Hall India Pvt. Ltd, India, 2004.
st
Deshpande, P.B. & Ash, R.H., “Computer Process Control”,1 Edition, ISA Publications,USA,1995.
th
Curtis D. Johnson, “Process Control Instrumentation Technology”, 8 Edition, Pearson Education Limited, London,
2015.
RSE OUTCOMES: BT Mapped
ompletion of the course, the students will be able to (Highest Level)
recognize the impact of computers in process control Understanding
(K2)
analyze the performance of discrete time systems Analyzing (K4)
apply the concepts in the design of basic digital controllers and analyze the stability of the closed Applying (K3)
loop discrete systems
apply the concepts in designing controllers for linear and nonlinear systems. Applying (K3)
apply the concepts of pole placement design for control applications Applying (K3)

PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1
PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PSO1 PSO2
1 0 1 2
1 3 1 2 2
2 3 3 2 2 2 3 3
3 3 2 1 1 1 3 3
4 3 2 1 1 1 3 3
5 3 2 1 1 1 3 3
ight, 2 – Moderate, 3 – Substantial, BT- Bloom’s Taxonomy

/ Bloom’s Remembering Understanding Applying Analyzing Evaluating Creating Total
ategory* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) % %
CAT1 30 30 40 100
CAT2 10 40 30 20 100
CAT3 10 30 60 100
ESE 20 20 40 20 100
may be varied (CAT 1,2,3 – 50 marks & ESE – 100 marks)

22EIE37 - DIGITAL TWINS
Programme &
Branch
Preamble This course is designed to impart students with introduction to foundation of digital twins in a pragmatic way
for cyber –physical fusion, as emerging approach to support engineering design.
Unit – I Introduction to Digital Twin Driven Smart Design: 9
Development of Product design and Prospect forecast-Digital Twin and its Applications- History, Concept, Applications of Digital
twins-Five Dimension digital twin of a Product-physical, virtual, Digital twin data, Services and connections.-Framework for Digital
twin driven smart product design-Case study: Bicycle and Landing gear.
Unit – II Digital Twin Driven Conceptual Design 9
Conceptual design methodology foundation of digital twin: Design theory-general, Axiomatic, systematic, Function-Behaviour-
structure ontology, Digital twin based conceptual design: function modeling, concept generation, concept evaluation, contradiction
resolution, constraint management, complexity management, collaborative conceptual design, digital twin based design
affordance. Case study: robot vacuum cleaner (functional formulation, concept generation, constraint management, contradiction
solving).
Unit – III Digital Twin Driven Energy-aware Green Design 9
Iterative optimization of energy consumption-energy consumption digital thread-product –life cycle, green design (in material
selection, disassembly, supply chain and its potential applications). Energy aware five-dimension digital twin,
Unit – IV Application and Case Study 9
Digital twin driven factory design: framework, functions at different stages and modular approach-case study: digital twin driven
factory design of a paper cup factory, digital twin driven factory design of a nylon factory.
Unit – V Digital Twin Driven Process Design Evaluation 9
Process design- process design evaluation- Digital Twin driven process design evaluation-framework for Digital Twin driven
process design evaluation-Reconfigurable process plan creation-Digital twin data generation-process plan evaluation based on
digital twin data-case study: digital engine connecting rod model description-real time data collection and management-verification
of process design evaluation.
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
1. Fei Tao, Ang Liu, Tianliang Hu, “Digital Twin Driven Smart Design”, Academic Press, Elsevier, United Kingdom, 2020.
REFERENCES:
Pethuru Raj, Preeta Evangeline,“The Digital Twin Paradigm for Smarter Systems and Environments: The industry use
1.
cases” , 1st Edition, Academic press, Elseiver , 2020
Shyam Varan Nath, Pieter van Schalkwyk,” Building Industrial Digital Twins: Design, Develop and Deploy Digital Twin
2.
Solutions for Real World Industry using Azure Digital Twins”, Packt Publishing, 2021.
Xinya Song, “Machine Learning Assisted Digital Twins for event identification in electrical power system”, 1st Edition,
3.
Technische Universitate Limenau/Universities, Bibliotheck, 2022
understand digital twin product design framework from a holistic perspective and discusses the
related key processes and technologies.
gain envisions a Digital twin driven conceptual design in terms of functional modeling, concept
generation, evaluation and contradiction resolution at basic levels.
discuss and relate digital twin (DT) to green design; proposes and emphasize DT model to
CO3 energy conservation(EC) digital thread and discusses the way DT could promote green design Understanding (K2)
for energy saving.
discuss the practical application of DT driven smart design and present case study about paper
CO4 Applying(K3)
cup and nylon factory.
present a DT based process design evaluation and exemplify the machining process of diesel
CO5 Applying(K3)
engine connecting rod.

CO1 3 1 1 2 1 1 2 2
CO2 3 1 1 2 1 1 3 3
CO3 3 1 1 2 1 1 2 2
CO4 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 2 3 3
CO5 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 2 3 3

Total %
Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) %
CAT1 20 60 20 100
CAT2 20 60 20 100
CAT3 20 60 20 100
ESE 20 60 20 100
22EIO01 - MEASUREMENTS AND INSTRUMENTATION
(Offered by Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering)
Programme & All BE/Btech branches except Electronics and

Branch Instrumentation Engineering
Prerequisites Nil 5 OE 3 1 0 4
Preamble This course imparts the knowledge of measuring instruments for measuring electrical and electronic
parameters. Measurements and Instrumentation course gives overview of various measurements like
PMMC,MI, power, Energy, recorders and various methods of measurements using AC bridges and
transducers.
Unit – I Electrical Meters: 9+3
Deflecting, controlling and damping forces in indicating instruments – Principle and operation: D’Arsonval Galvanometers-Torque
Equation- Permanent Magnet Moving Coil instruments -Moving iron instruments -Dynamometer type Wattmeter- Single Phase
induction type Energy meters.
Unit – II DC Null Methods: 9+3
Measurement of Resistances: Classification of Resistances –Measurement of Medium Resistances: Wheatstone Bridge
Measurement of low resistance: Kelvin Double Bridge– Measurement of high resistance: Megger – Earth resistance measurement.
Potentiometers: Basic Potentiometer circuit-Laboratory Type (Crompton’s) potentiometer-Applications: calibration of ammeter,
voltmeter, wattmeter using potentiometer, measurement of unknown resistance using DC potentiometer.
Unit – III Methods of Measurements using AC bridges : 9+3
Introduction to A.C. bridges-Sources and detectors-General Equation for bridge balance-General form of an AC bridge
Measurement of Self Inductance: Maxwell's inductance Bridge and Anderson's bridge. Measurement of Capacitance: Schering
bridge. Measurement of Mutual Inductance: uses of Mutual Inductance in bridge circuits, Heaviside mutual inductance bridge.
Measurement of frequency: Wien's bridge.
Unit – IV Display Devices and Recorders: 9+3
Segmental Displays: Seven segment display-Dot Matrices-Rear Projection Display-Mixie Tube- Light Emitting Diode-Liquid Crystal
Diode-X-Y Recorders-Magnetic Tape Recorders-Digital tape recorders
Unit – V Transducers: 9+3
Classification of Transducers-Primary and Secondary –Passive and Active- Analog and Digital-Inverse Transducers. Resistive
Transducers: Strain Gauges-Theory of Strain Gauge- Thermistor: Construction of Thermistor. Thermocouple: Construction of
Thermocouple. Linear Variable Differential Transformers (LVDT): Construction – Advantages and Disadvantages.
Lecture:45, Tutorial :15, Total:60
TEXT BOOK:
Sawhney A.K., "A Course in Electronic Measurements and Instrumentation", 2 nd Edition, Dhanpat Rai & Co. Pvt. Ltd.,
1.
New Delhi, 2015.
REFERENCES:
Joseph J.Carr, “Elements of Electronic Instrumentation and Measurement”, 3 rd Edition, Pearson Education Pvt Ltd,
1.
New Delhi, 2008.
2. Oliver B.M., & Cage, J.M., “Electronic Measurements and Instrumentation”, 3rd Edition, McGraw-Hill, New York, 1975.
CO1 explain the working of various electrical meters Understanding (K2)
CO2 employ the DC null methods for measurement of resistance Applying (K3)
CO3 make use of the AC bridges for measurement of Capacitance Applying (K3)
CO4 interpret the concepts of storage and display devices in instruments Understanding (K2)
CO5 select appropriate Transducer for different applications Understanding (K2)

CO1 3 2 1 1 1 3 3
CO2 3 2 1 1 1 3 3
CO3 3 2 1 1 1 3 3
CO4 3 2 1 1 1 3 3
CO5 3 1 2 2

Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K6) %
CAT1 40 30 30 100
CAT2 30 30 40 100
CAT3 40 60 100
ESE 40 40 20 100
2EIO02 - BIOMEDICAL INSTRUMENTATION AND APPLICATIONS

Preamble To impart the knowledge of some human anatomy and measuring bio potentials using bio electrodes with
specific instruments which is most commonly used in hospitals. Also understand the fundamental concept of
various biomedical imaging techniques and learn the advanced physiological assistive medical devices
Unit – I Human Physiological Systems: 9+3
Cell and its structure – Resting and action potentials – Different systems of human body: Circulatory system – Respiratory system –
nervous system – Components of the Bio medical instrument system – strain gauge as pressure transducer – photoelectric type
resistive transducer – piezoelectric ultrasonic transducer.
Unit – II Bio Potential Electrodes: 9+3
Micro electrode-depth and needle electrode-surface electrodes. Biomedical Electrical signal measurement: ECG, EEG, EMG, EOG
and ERG: Lead systems, recording methods and typical waveforms.
Unit – III Biomedical Non Electrical Signal Measurement: 9+3
Phonocardiography – GSR- Blood pressure Measurement: Sphygmomanometer, MEMS based catheter tip pressure sensor,
ultrasonic blood pressure monitor. Spirometer – Blood pH measurement – Ear oximeter – Pulse oximeter – Lung volumes,
respiration and cardiac rate.
Unit – IV Biomedical Imaging Systems: 9+3
X-ray machine – Computer tomography – Thermography – Ultrasonic imaging systems – Magnetic resonance imaging – PET –
SPECT – FMRI – Magnetic Particle Imaging.
Unit – V Physiological Assist Devices: 9+3
Ventricular asynchronous pacemaker – AC Defibrillator – Heart lung machine – Kidney machine – Audiometer – Biothesiometry-
Vibroscreen – Biotelemetry – Telemedicine.
Lecture:45, Tutorial :15, Total:60
TEXT BOOK:
1. Khandpur R.S,” Handbook of Biomedical Instrumentation”, 2nd Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill , New Delhi ,2017.
REFERENCES:
1. John G. Webster, “Medical Instrumentation Application and Design”, 4 th Edition, John Wiley and Sons, NewYork, 2015.
Andrew G. Webb, “Principles of Biomedical Instrumentation” 1 st Edition, Cambridge University Press, United Kingdom,
2.
2018
3. Arumugam. M, “Bio-Medical Instrumentation”, 2nd Edition, Anuradha Agencies, Kumbakonam, 2014.
CO1 interpret the basic principles and phenomena of Biomedical Engineering Understanding (K2)
CO2 record the bioelectric potentials using bio potential electrode through bio signal recording devices Applying (K3)
CO3 measure biomedical signal parameters through medical instruments Applying (K3)
CO4 summarize the basic principles in medical imaging techniques Understanding (K2)
CO5 illustrate the physiological assist devices Applying (K3)

CO1 3 1 2 1 2 2
CO2 3 2 1 1 1 2 1 3 3
CO3 3 2 1 1 1 2 1 3 3
CO4 3 1 2 1 2 2
CO5 3 2 1 1 1 2 1 3 3

Total %
Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % % (K6) %
CAT1 20 40 40 100
CAT2 10 40 50 100
CAT3 10 40 50 100
ESE 10 40 50 100
22EIO03 - INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION

Preamble To provide solution towards better control action for various process applications
Unit – I Introduction To Industrial Automation: 9+3
Automation – Industrial Automation vs. Industrial Information Technology – Role of automation in industry – Types of production
systems – Types of Automation Systems – The Functional Elements of Industrial Automation – Industrial Sensors and Instrument
Systems – Industrial Actuator Systems – Industrial Control Systems – The Architecture of Elements: The Automation Pyramid.
Unit – II Programmable Logic Controllers (PLCs) An Overview: 9+3
Parts of a PLC –Principle of operation. PLC Hardware Components: Discrete I/O Modules- Analog I/O modules – The Central
Processing Unit (CPU) – Programming Terminal Devices. Converting Relay Schematics into PLC Ladder Programs. Programming
Timers: Timer Instructions – Types of timers – On-Delay Timer Instruction – Off-Delay Timer Instruction – Retentive Timer.
Unit – III Advanced PLC Programming: 9+3
Programming Counters: Counter Instructions – Up-Counter – Down counter – Cascading Counters – Program Control Instructions:
Master Control Reset Instruction – Subroutine Functions. Data Manipulation Instructions: Data Compare Instructions. Math
Instructions: Addition Instruction – Subtraction Instruction – Multiplication Instruction – Division Instruction.
Unit – IV Process Control, Network Systems, and SCADA: 9+3
Types of Processes – Structure of Control Systems – On/Off Control – PID Control – Motion Control – Data Communications –
Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) – Human Machine Interfaces (HMIs) – Introduction to DCS
Unit – V Internet of Things – An Overview: 9+3
Introduction – Internet of Things Definition Evaluation – IoT Architectures – IoT Data Management and Analytics – Communication
Protocols – Internet of Things Applications – Security – Identity Management and Authentication – Privacy – Standardization and
Regulatory Limitations.
TEXT BOOK:
Frank D. Petruzella, “Programmable Logic Controllers”, 5th Edition, Tata McGraw Hill Education Private Limited, India,
1.
2019 for Unit 1,2,3,4.
Rajkumar Buyya & Amir Vahid Dastjerdi, "Internet of Things Principles and Paradigms", 1 st Edition, Morgan Kaufmann
2.
(Imprint of Elsevier), USA, 2016 for Unit 5
REFERENCES:
1. https://nptel.ac.in/content/storage2/courses/108105063/pdf/L-01(SM)(IA&C)%20((EE)NPTEL).pdf
2. https://nptel.ac.in/content/storage2/courses/108105063/pdf/L-02(SM)(IA&C)%20((EE)NPTEL).pdf
CO1 explain the concepts about basics of automation system Understanding (K2)
CO2 develop programming with PLC Applying (K3)
CO3 analyze theory of operation in advanced PLC and SCADA Applying (K3)
CO4 interpret the architectural interfaces and operation about DCS Understanding (K2)
CO5 illustrate the advanced technologies, opportunities, challenges to bring out industry 4.0 Understanding (K2)

CO1 3 1 2 2
CO2 3 2 1 1 1 3 3
CO3 3 2 1 1 1 3 3
CO4 3 1 2 2
CO5 3 1 2 2

Total %
Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) %
CAT1 20 50 30 100
CAT2 10 40 50 100
CAT3 30 70 - 100
ESE 10 50 40 100
22EIO04 -PLC PROGRAMMING WITH HIGH LEVEL LANGUAGES
Programme & All BE/BTech branches except Electronics and

Preamble To develop PLC programs using high-level languages, troubleshoot and debug PLC programs
Unit - I Programmable Logic Controllers (PLCs) An Overview: 9+3
Introduction - Parts of a PLC - Principle of operation - PLC Hardware Components: The I/O Section - Discrete I/O Modules- Analog
I/O modules - Special I/O modules - I/O Specifications – The Central Processing Unit (CPU) – Programming Devices.
Unit - II Basics of PLC Programming: 9+3
Program Scan – PLC Programming Languages –Instruction Addressing – Branch Instructions – NO and NC Instructions – Modes
of Operations. Seal-In Circuits – Latching – Simple PLC ladder programming.
Unit - III Programming Timers and Counters: 9+3
Timers: On-Delay Timer Instruction – Off-Delay Timer Instruction – Retentive Timer – basic applications. Counters: Counter
Instructions – Up-Counter – Down-Counter –Combining Counter and Timer Functions - basic applications.
Unit - IV PLC Programming with high level languages: 9+3
Review of Python syntax and data structures - Python scripts with Node-RED - communication between Node-RED and PLCs -
Reading and writing data to PLC registers -IoT devices with Node-RED.
Unit - V Advanced PLC Programming for Basic Applications: 9+3
PLC programming with C++ - Database creation with MySQL - Automatic Door opening and closing –One way traffic light control -
Motor Start-Stop Operation control- Elevator Control - Water Tank Level Control
TEXT BOOK:
Frank D. Petruzella, "Programmable Logic Controllers", 5 th Edition, Tata McGraw Hill Education Private Limited, New
1.
Delhi, 2019.
REFERENCES:
John W. Webb & Ronald A. Reis, "Programmable Logic Controllers: Principles and Application", 5 th Edition, Pearson
1.
Education India, India, 2015.
2. http://instrumentation tools.com/learn-programmable-logic-controller-plc/
CO1 describe the basic components of PLC Understanding (K2)
CO2 interpret various programming logics and languages of PLC Applying (K3)
CO3 develop PLC programs with times and counters Applying (K3)
CO4 develop PLC programs with high level languages Applying (K3)
CO5 create database for data storage and develop select applications Applying (K3)

CO1 3 1 2 2
CO2 3 2 1 1 1 3 3
CO3 3 2 1 1 1 3 3
CO4 3 2 1 1 1 3 3
CO5 3 2 1 1 1 3 3

Total %
Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) %
CAT1 10 60 30 100
CAT2 10 30 60 100
CAT3 10 30 60 100
ESE 10 30 60 100
22EIO05 - VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION

Preamble Virtual instrumentation is a powerful concept for control, measuring, testing and analysis of real time
problems. This course aims at giving an adequate exposure and practice in LabVIEW programming and DAQ
system to overcome the limitations of classical methods.
Unit – I Introduction to Virtual Instrumentation: 9+3
Virtual Instrumentation- Programming Requirements- Drawbacks of Recent Approaches- Virtual Instruments Versus Traditional
Instruments- Advantages of VI- Creating Virtual Instruments Using LabVIEW- Virtual Instrumentation in the Engineering Process-
Graphical Programming and Textual Programming- Advantages of LabVIEW- LabVIEW Environment- Dataflow Programming- G
Programming.
Unit – II Basic Tools, Loops and Graphs: 9+3
Front Panel-Block Diagram Tools and Palettes- Repetition and Loops: FOR Loop, While Loop, Shift Registers, Tunnels, Feedback
Nodes, Local and Global Variables – Arrays-Clusters-Waveform Charts-Waveform Graphs-XY Graphs-Intensity Graphs and
Charts-Digital Waveform Graph-3D Graphs.
Unit – III Programming with Structures: 9+3
Structures: Case Structure, Sequence Structures, Customizing Structures, Timed Structures, Formula Nodes, Event Structure,
MathScript-Strings-File I/O-State Machine.
Unit – IV Data Acquisition: 9+3
Interface Buses: RS 232, RS422, RS485, GPIB and USB. Hardware Aspects: Signal Grounding-Signal Conditioning-Digital I/O
Techniques-Data Acquisition in LabVIEW-Hardware Installation and Conﬁguration-Components of DAQ-DAQ Signal Accessory-
DAQ Assistant-DAQ Hardware- DAQ Software.
Unit – V Tools and Applications: 9+3
Signal processing and Analysis Tools-Control System Design and Simulation Tools-Signal, Voltage and Current measurement
using general purpose DAQ Card-Bio-Medical Signal Acquisition using NI-ELVIS –Temperature Measurement.
TEXT BOOK:
S.Sumathi , P.Surekha, “LabVIEW based Advanced Instrumentation Systems”, 1 st Edition, Springer Berlin, Heidelberg,
1.
2007.
REFERENCES:
1. Jovitha Jerome, “Virtual Instrumentation Using LabVIEW”, 3 rd Edition, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2012.
CO1 explain the Virtual Instrumentation concepts Understanding (K2)
CO2 apply structured programming concepts in developing LabVIEW programs Applying (K3)
CO3 build LabVIEW programs using structures, nodes and state machine concepts Applying (K3)
CO4 utilize DAQ System to solve real time problems Applying (K3)
CO5 apply knowledge on various tools in practical works Applying (K3)

CO1 3 1 2 2
CO2 3 2 1 1 1 3 3
CO3 3 2 1 1 1 3 3
CO4 3 2 1 1 1 3 3
CO5 3 2 1 1 1 3 3

Total %
Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) %
CAT1 20 50 30 100
CAT2 15 40 45 100
CAT3 15 60 30 100
ESE 20 40 40 100
22EIO06 - INTRODUCTION TO DISTRIBUTED CONTROL SYSTEMS

Preamble This course provides the basic concepts in Control Systems and gives an introduction to distributed control
systems, its interfaces, displays and applications.
Unit - I Control Systems: 9
Control System: Definition, Open loop and closed loop control system, Open loop and closed loop systems-P, PI, PD and PID
controller-Signal conversions: I/P converter - Actuators: Electric and Pneumatic type-Sensors
Unit - II Distributed Control Systems: 9

Evolution of Distributed Control Systems: Traditional Control System Developments – Computer-based Control System
Developments – Resulting System Architecture - Emergence of the Distributed Control System architecture: Hybrid System
Architecture, Central Computer System Architecture – Generalized Distributed Control System Architecture
Unit - III Microprocessor based Controller: 9
Basic elements of a microprocessor based controller – Functional blocks: An introduction – Comparison of Architectures - Security
design issues for the local control unit: Redundant controller designs.
Unit - IV DCS Operator Interfaces: 9
Operator interfaces: Introduction – Low level operator interface – High level operator interface: Architectural alternatives, Hardware
elements in the operator interface, Operator displays. Engineering interfaces: Engineering interface requirements.
Unit - V DCS issues and Applications: 9

Power Plants - Water and waste water treatment plants - Cement plants – Pulp and Paper plants – Glass –making Plants – Oil and
Gas Fields.
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
1. Michael P. Lukas, "Distributed Control System", Van Nostrand Reinhold Co., Canada, 2019
REFERENCES:
1. Norman S. Nise, "Control Systems Engineering", 7th Edition, Wiley-India Publishers, New Delhi, 2017.
2. D. Popovic and V.P.Bhatkar,’ Distributed computer control for industrial Automation’ Marcel Dekker, Inc., Newyork, 1990.
3. Nagrath I.J.,& Gopal M., ―Control Systems Engineering‖, 6th Edition, New Age International Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi,2017.
CO1 provide basic concepts in Control Systems Understanding (K2)
CO2 describe the architecture of Distributed Control Systems Understanding (K2)
CO3 give adequate information with respect to interfaces used in DCS Applying (K3)
CO4 choose the operator Interfaces and displays in DCS Applying (K3)
CO5 apply DCS for select applications Applying (K3)

CO1 3 1 1 2 2 2
CO2 3 1 1 2 2 2
CO3 3 2 1 1 3 3
CO4 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 3 3
CO5 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 3 3

Total %
Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) %
CAT1 30 70 100
CAT2 20 40 40 100
CAT3 20 30 50 100
ESE 20 40 40 100
\
22EIO07 - INSTRUMENTATION IN AIRCRAFT NAVIGATION AND CONTROL

Preamble To discuss the concepts of aircraft instruments and cockpit layout in modern aircraft and deals with the
conventional and advanced flight instruments.
Unit – I Basics of Aircraft and Aircraft Instruments: 9
Introduction – Control Surfaces – Forces – Moments and Angle of Attack – Engines – Avionics – Modern Aircraft System. Aircraft
Instruments and their Layout – Aircraft Display Types – Quantitative and Qualitative Display – Instrument Grouping – Basic T
Grouping, Glass Cockpits of Modern Aircraft.
Unit – II Air Data Instruments and Directional Systems: 9
Introduction to Air Data Instruments – Pitot pressure and Pitot tube – Types of Air Data Instruments – Pneumatic-type Air Data
Instruments – Air Speed Indicator, Air Data Computer – International Standard Atmosphere – Air Data Instruments – Directional
Systems: Magnetic Compass – Earth Magnetic Field – Flux Detector Unit.
Unit – III Gyroscopic and Advanced Flight Instruments: 9
Introduction – Types of Gyro – Conventional Mechanical, Vibrating Gyros, RLG, FOG – Basic Mechanical Gyro and its Properties –
Directional Gyro and limitations – Gyro Horizon – Turn and Bank Indicator – Turn Coordinator – Standby Attitude Director Indicator
Advanced Direction Indicators.
Unit – IV Engine Instruments and Indicators: 9
Introduction – Engine Speed Measurements – Electrical Tacho Generator/Indicator, Servo Type, Non-Contact Type, Optical
Tachometer, Hall Effect Sensor – Torque Measurements – Electronic Torque Meter – Pressure Measurements – Engine Pressure
Ratio Indicator. Engine Fuel Indicators: Fuel Quantity Indicator.
Unit – V Aircraft Navigation and Safety Warning Systems: 9
Introduction – Radio Navigation Aids – VHF Omni Directional Range System DME/ILS/INS/GPS – Principle of VOR operation –
Distance Measuring Equipment, Instrument Landing Systems –Inertial Navigation System: Principle, Gimballed and Strap Down INS
– Global Positioning System. Air Data Warning Systems.
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
Nagabhushana S & Sudha L K. “Aircraft Instrumentation and Systems”, 2 nd Edition, I.K. International Publishing House
1.
Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2013.
REFERENCES:
Federal Aviation Administration (FAA), “Instrument Flying Handbook”, 1 st Edition, Aviation Supplies and Academics,
1.
Washington, 2013.
Megson T M G., “Aircraft Structures for Engineering Students”, 4th Edition, Elsevier Science and Technology, Great
2.
Britain, 2007.
CO1 infer the basics of aircraft and aircraft instruments Understanding(K2)
CO2 discuss about air data instruments and directional systems Understanding (K2)
CO3 make use of gyroscopes for advanced flight instruments Applying(K3)
CO4 outline the fundamentals of engine instruments and indicators Understanding (K2)
CO5 utilize the concepts of aircraft navigation safety warning systems Applying(K3)

CO1 3 1 2 2
CO2 3 1 2 2
CO3 3 2 1 1 1 3 3
CO4 3 1 2 2
CO5 3 1 1 1 1 3 3

Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K6) %
CAT1 30 70 100
CAT2 30 40 30 100
CAT3 30 40 30 100
ESE 30 40 30 100
22EIO08 - INDUSTRY 4.0 WITH INDUSTRIAL IoT

Preamble To transform the industrial processes through the integration of modern technologies such as sensors,
communication, and computational processing.
Unit – I Introduction to Industrial IoT and Industry 4.0: 9
Introduction - IoT Background and History, IIoT key technologies, IoT and IIoT similarities and differences – Innovations and the
IIoT – Intelligent devices – Key opportunities and benefits: Digital and human workforce – Industrial Internet use-cases - Industry
4.0: Characteristics and design principles.
Unit – II IIoT Architectures: 9
IIoT Reference Architecture – Industrial Internet Architecture Framework – Five Functional domains – Three tier architecture
topology – Connectivity: Key system characteristics, Connectivity security and functional characteristics – Functions of
communication layer – Overview of Predictive Maintenance Architecture.
Unit – III IIoT WAN Technologies and Protocols: 9
Need of Protocols – Legacy Industrial protocols – Modern Communication protocols: Industrial Ethernet, Encapsulated Field Bus,
Standard Ethernet. IIoT device Low-Power WAN optimized technologies for M2M: SigFox, LoRaWAN, nWave, Dash7, Ingenue
RPMA, Low Power Wi-Fi, LTE Category-M, Weightless, Millimeter Radio.
Unit – IV Industrial IoT Security and Governance: 9
Introduction – Security threats and vulnerabilities of IoT – Industrial challenges – Evolution of Cyber attacks: cyber attacks and
solutions – Strategic principles of cyber security – cyber security measures - Industrial IoT security architecture: IIoT architecture
patterns – four Tier IIoT security model- Management risks with IIoT.
Unit – V Industrial IoT Analytics and Applications: 9
Software Defined Networks: Difference between SDN and NFV – Cloud and Fog - Big Data and Analytics in IIoT. Recent
Technological components of Robots: Industrial Robotic applications – Industrial application of AR: Maintenance, assembly,
operation and training.
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
1. Alasdair Gilchrist, “Industry 4.0: The Industrial Internet of Things”, 1 st Edition, Apress Media, NewYork, 2016.
REFERENCES:
Alp Ustundag and EmreCevikcan, “Industry 4.0: Managing the Digital Transformation”, Springer series in Advanced
1.
Manufacturing, Switzerland, 2018.
DimitriosSerpanos and Marilyn Wolf, “Internet-of-Things (IoT) Systems, Architectures, Algorithms, Methodologies”,
2.
Springer International Publishing AG, Switzerland, 2018.
CO1 explore the basics of industrial internet of things Understanding (K2)
CO2 interpret the concepts of various architectures and components Understanding (K2)
CO3 design and implement protocols and sensors for IIoT Applying (K3)
CO4 impart the knowledge of IIoT security layers Understanding (K2)
CO5 apply IIoT in real time Industrial applications Applying (K3)

CO1 3 1 2 2
CO2 3 1 1 2 2
CO3 3 2 1 1 1 1 3 3
CO4 3 1 1 2 2
CO5 3 2 1 1 1 1 3 3

Total %
Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) %
CAT1 15 85 100
CAT2 10 50 40 100
CAT3 5 35 60 100
ESE 10 50 40 100
22EIO09 - INDUSTRIAL DATA COMMUNICATION

Preamble To educate on the basic concepts of data communication, different industrial communication protocols and
wireless communication.
Unit – I Serial communication: 9
Serial Communication: OSI reference model – Protocols – RS-232 overview, RS-232 interface standard (CCITT V.24 interface
standard) – Half-duplex operation of the RS-232 interface – Limitations – RS-485 overview – The RS-485 interface standard – RS-
485 vs RS-422 – The 20 mA Current loop.
Unit – II Copper Cable and Fiber Optics Cable Communication: 9
Copper cable: Characteristics – Cable selection – Coaxial cables – Twisted-pair cable – Distribution/installation standards –
Connector standards. Fibre optics Communication: Fiber-optic cable components – Cable parameter – Types of optical fiber – Basic
cable types – Connecting fibers.
Unit – III MODBUS, PROFIBUS PA/DP/FMS and TCP/IP: 9
MODBUS: Modbus Overview – MODBUS protocol structure – Function codes – query response cycle, transmission mode, Message
Formatting. PROFIBUS PA/DP/FMS: PROFIBUS protocol stack- The PROFIBUS communication model- Relationship between
application process and communication – Communication objects. TCP/IP – TCP/IP overview: Introduction – Internet Layer Protocols
(Packet Transport) – Host-to-host layer: end to end reliability. TCP/IP troubleshooting: Introduction – Common problems – Typical
network layer problems – Transport layer problems.
Unit – IV HART and Foundation Field Bus: 9
HART: HART Introduction – HART and smart instrumentation – Physical layer, Data link and application layer – HART Commands.
Foundation Field Bus: Introduction – The Physical layer and Wiring Rules, The Data link layer, The Application layer, The User layer,
Error detection and diagnostics - High-speed Ethernet (HSE)
Unit – V Industrial Ethernet and Wireless Communication: 9
Industrial Ethernet: Introduction – 10 Mbps Ethernet – 100 Mbps Ethernet – Gigabit Ethernet – Industrial Ethernet.
Wireless communication: Satellite systems – Wireless LANs- Radio and wireless communication : Introduction – components of radio
link – radio spectrum and frequency allocation – Radio MODEMs.
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
1. Deon Reynders, Steve Mackay, Edwin Wright, “Practical Industrial Data Communications”, 1 st Edition, Elsevier, 2005.
REFERENCES:
1. Forouzan, Behrouz A., “Data communication and Networking”, 5th Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2013.
2. William L.Schweber, “Data Communications”, 1st Edition, Tata McGraw-Hall, 2009.

Steve Mackay, Edwin Wright, Deon Reynders,” Practical Industrial Data Networks: Design, Installation and
3.
Troubleshooting”, 1st Edition, Elsevier, 2005.
Make use of the essentials of the communication system and learn the serial communication
CO1 Understanding(K2)
interface
CO2 Interpret knowledge about Copper cable and fiber optic cable communication Understanding(K2)
CO3 Examine the suitability of various communication protocols Understanding(K2)
CO4 Identify the architecture and applications of HART and Field bus Applying (K3)
CO5 Examine the concepts of Industrial Ethernet and wireless communications Understanding(K2)

CO1 3 1 1 2 2
CO2 3 1 1 2 2
CO3 3 1 1 2 2
CO4 3 2 1 1 1 1 3 3
CO5 3 1 1 2 2

Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K6) %
CAT1 20 80 100
CAT2 20 80 100
CAT3 20 60 20 100
ESE 20 60 20 100
22EIO10 - WIRELESS INSTRUMENTATION

Preamble To impart knowledge on wireless technology for instrumentation, wireless components and its applications.
To provide adequate technical information on power sources, wireless protocols and network implementation
Unit – I Wireless Instrumentation Technology: 9
Introduction – Instruments and Instrumentation: Measurement systems – Multiplexing structures – Wireless instruments and
communication protocols – RF interfaces and examples – Networks of wireless instruments – Sensor node components:
Computing subsystem – Communication subsystem – Power subsystems – Sensing subsystems.
Unit – II Powering Autonomous Sensors: 9
Autonomous sensors – Ambient energy sources and transducers – Energy storage units – Power considerations of wireless
instruments – Energy harvesting: Solar and wind energy harvesting, RF energy harvesting, Energy harvesting from vibration,
Thermal energy harvesting – Energy management techniques – Calculation for battery selection – Understanding RSSI and LQI
values.
Unit – III Wireless Systems/Standards for Automation: 9
Wireless HART: Protocol stack – Network components – Addressing control – Coexistence techniques. ISA100.11a: Introduction –
Scope – Working group of ISA 100 – Features – Sensor classes – System configuration and architecture of ISA 100.11a –
Comparison between ISA100.11a and WHART protocol stacks.
Unit – IV Design of Wireless Devices and LoRa: 9
Wireless sensor and instrument network design – Wireless integrated network sensors – Plug-and-play sensors and networks –
Industrial wireless networks and automation.
Introduction – Communication Methods – Difference between LoRa and LoRaWAN – LoRaWAN architecture – LoRaWAN classes.
Unit – V Wireless Sensor and Instrument Applications: 9
Application specific wireless sensors and instruments – Commercial wireless sensors and instruments – Industrial wireless sensor
and instrument networks – Wireless human health monitoring and environmental applications – Radio frequency identification –
Consumer products and other applications – Applications in Transportation and Agriculture.
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
John G. Webster, Halit Eren, “Measurement, Instrumentation, and Sensors Handbook”, 2 nd Edition, CRC Press - Taylor &
1.
Francis Group, LLC, Boca Raton, Florida, 2017
REFERENCES:
Subhas Chandra Mukhopadhyay, “Smart Sensors, Measurement and Instrumentation”, 2 nd Edition , Springer Science &
1.
Business Media, Heidelberg, Germany, 2013
Sunit Kumar Sen, “Fieldbus and Networking in Process Automation”, 1 st Edition, Taylor & Francis Group, LLC, London,
2.
2017
3. Halit Eren, “Wireless Sensors and Instruments: Networks, Design, and Applications”, 1 st Edition, CRC Press, 2006
CO1 identify different instrumentation systems and fundamentals of wireless technology Understanding (K2)
CO2 indicate the power sources and energy storage units used for autonomous sensors Understanding (K2)
CO3 recognize the different wireless protocols and network standards for wireless instruments Understanding (K2)
CO4 discover design concepts and procedure for wireless devices and LoRA Applying (K3)
demonstrate the various applications of wireless sensor and instrument systems and
CO5 Applying (K3)
networks

CO1 3 1 2 2
CO2 3 1 2 2
CO3 3 1 2 2
CO4 3 2 1 1 1 3 3
CO5 3 2 1 1 1 2 3 3

Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) %
CAT1 15 85 100
CAT2 15 85 100
CAT3 15 50 35 100
ESE 10 70 20 100
22EIO11 - INSTRUMENTATION TECHNIQUES IN AGRICULTURE

Preamble To discuss the sensing and automation technology associated with agriculture.
Unit – I Necessity of Instrumentation: 9
Necessity of instrumentation & control for agriculture and food processing requirement, World Agriculture Scenario, Indian
Agriculture sector – A synoptic Review- Areas of Concern. Information, Interpretation and Instruction Systems – Agri
Instrumentation. Introduction to Transducers – Characteristics.
Unit – II Agri Transducers: 9
Technology Trend – Conventional and Silicon transducers, Capacitive gauges, Silicon Displacement transducer, Silicon
Temperature transducer, Silicon Pressure Transducer. Grain Moisture transducers, soil moisture transducers, Humidity transducers,
pH transducers, Gas transducers, Intelligent Sensors.
Unit – III Automation in Agriculture: 9
Microprocessor based Grain moisture measurement- Introduction, Sensing Mechanism, I/O requirement analysis. Microprocessor
based Soil Nutrient Estimation Systems- Soil nutrients and their role, collection of samples, soil nutrient estimation, sensing
mechanism. Preparation of soil extract for estimation of N,P,K and S, I/O requirement Analysis. SCADA Based system for
Agriculture process monitoring.
Case Study : Interfacing of agri sensors with Microcontroller.
Unit – IV Drip Irrigation and Precision Agriculture: 9
Introduction-Sensors, Hardware block Schematic, system operation, I/O Requirement Analysis, Hardware Systems.
Precision: Introduction, need for precision agriculture. Subsystem and components- GPS, Agri sensors, DAS, Communication
System. Precision agriculture status – Working Philosophy.
Unit – V Green House Cultivation: 9
Designs and classification of greenhouse- Orientation of Greenhouse / Poly house- Components of green house- Plant growing
structures/containers in green house production- Environmental factors influencing greenhouse cultivation- Media preparation and
fumigation- Drip irrigation and fertigation systems greenhouse cultivation- Problem management in greenhouse cultivation.
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
1. Krishna Kant , “Microprocessor Based Agri Instrumentation”, 1st Edition, PHI Private Limited, New Delhi, 2010.
REFERENCES:
Suchismita Satapathy, Debesh Mishra, Arturo Realyvasquez, Arturo Realyvásquez Vargas, “Innovation in Agriculture with
1.
IoT and AI”, Springer nature, Switzerland, 2021.
2. Sidney Walter Reginald Cox, Filby D E , “Instrumentation in Agriculture”, Lockwood Publishers, UK, 2011.
CO1 explain the necessity of instrumentation for agriculture Understanding (K2)
CO2 familiarize with the Soil parameters and tranducers in agricultural instrumentation Understanding (K2)
CO3 illustrate the techniques of agriculture using Microprocessor and SCADA Applying(K3)
CO4 outline the fundamentals of Drip Irrigation and Precision Agriculture Understanding (K2)
CO5 utilize the concepts of instruments in Green house cultivation Understanding (K2)

CO1 3 1 2 2
CO2 3 1 2 2
CO3 3 2 1 1 1 3 3
CO4 3 1 2 2
CO5 3 1 2 2

Total %
Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) %
CAT1 30 70 100
CAT2 20 60 20 100
CAT3 40 60 100
ESE 20 60 20 100
22EIO12 - ENVIRONMENTAL SENSORS

Preamble This course is a fundamental course on sensors, instruments and realtime systems to monitor
environmental systems.
Unit – I Fibre Optic Sensors: 9
The need for environmental monitoring and new technology-principles of fibre optic chemical sensors: Fluorescence sensors-
Raman sensors-Evanescent field sensors - fibre optic sensors for environmental applications: Air pollutants, Seawater monitoring,
Ground and drinking water contamination and Soil contamination.
Unit – II Integrated Optic Sensors: 9
Introduction to integrated optics- Fabrication of integrated optic devices- Sensor techniques in integrated optics: Evanescent
waves, Spectroscopy, Ellipsometry, Surface plasmon resonance, Light scattering - Applications of integrated optic devices for
environmental sensing: An integrated optic biosensor- An integrated optic gas sensor.
Unit – III Piezoelectric Sensors and Gas Analysers: 9
Piezoelectric crystal theory, Instrumentation, Gas analysis, Piezoelectric aerosol sensors, Piezoelectric crystal liquid sensors, PZ
sensor coatings operating in liquids. Gas analysers: Principles of operation, Differential optical absorption spectroscopy, Fourier
transform IR spectroscopy, Differential absorption LIDAR, Laser-induced fluorescence, Chemiluminescent techniques.
Unit – IV Monitoring of Land Pollution: 9
Common contaminant types and environmental behavior: Contaminants and site use, Commonly occurring contaminant types,
Factors affecting contaminant behavior - Monitoring equipment and instrumentation: Discrete monitoring: indirect determination of
subsurface conditions, Discrete monitoring: direct determination of subsurface conditions, Field testing kits, Continuous and
automatic monitoring.
Unit – V Monitoring of Water Pollution and Air Pollution: 9
Water Pollution: Continuous monitoring - Physical variables: Temperature, Conductivity, salinity and total dissolved solids, Turbidity
and suspended solids, Colour. Chemical variables: Dissolved oxygen, Acidity, alkalinity and pH, Anions, Cations. Biological
variables: Biochemical oxygen demand- Total organic carbon, Chemical oxygen demand. Air Pollution: Air quality standards -
Characterisation of atmospheric pollutants – Air pollution sampling - Monitoring modes.
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
Miguel F. Acevedo, “Real-Time Environmental Monitoring Sensors and Systems”, 1st Edition, CRC Press, United States,
1.
2015.
REFERENCES:
Janick Artiola, Ian L. Pepper, Mark L. Brusseau, “Environmental Monitoring and Characterization”, 1st Edition, Elsevier,
1.
2004
Acevedo M.F., “Data Analysis and Statistics for Geography, Environmental Science, and Engineering”, 1st Edition, CRC
2.
press, 2013
CO1 identify the role of fibre optic sensors for environmental monitoring Understanding (K2)
CO2 apply the integrated optic sensors for environmental sensing Applying (K3)
CO3 apply the piezoelectric sensors and gas analyzers for Environmental Monitoring Applying (K3)
CO4 identify the cases and concept of land pollution Understanding (K2)
Understanding (K2)
CO5 explain the concept of Water pollution and Air pollution

CO1 3 1 3 2 2
CO2 3 2 1 1 1 3 3 3
CO3 3 2 1 1 1 3 3 3
CO4 3 1 3 2 2
CO5 3 1 3 2 2

Total %
Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) %
CAT1 30 50 20 100
CAT2 30 50 20 100
CAT3 40 60 100
ESE 30 50 20 100
22EIO13 - POLLUTION CONTROL AND MANAGEMENT

Preamble The course will cover various aspects of pollution control, including the causes and effects of pollution,
regulatory frameworks, and management strategies. Students will gain an understanding of the various types
of pollutants, their sources, and the impact they have on the environment and human health.
Unit – I Introduction to Pollution Control Management: 9
Introduction to Pollution Control Management - Professional Codes of Ethics - Environmental Ethics - Environmental Systems
Overview: Water Resource Management System - Wastewater Disposal Subsystem - Air Resource Management System.
Unit – II Water Pollution: 9
Water Pollutants And Their Sources - Water Pollution In Rivers - Water Pollution In Lakes - Water Pollution In Estuaries -
Groundwater Pollution – Applications.
Unit – III Wastewater Treatment: 9
Characteristics of Wastewater - Wastewater Treatment Standards - Municipal Wastewater Treatment Systems - Land Treatment
For Sustainability - Sludge Treatment - Alternative Sludge Disposal Techniques.
Unit – IV Air Pollution: 9
Air Pollution Perspective - Effects of Air Pollutants - Origin and Fate of Air Pollutants - Micro and Macro Air Pollution - Air Pollution
Meteorology - Air Pollution Control of Stationary Sources - Air Pollution Control of Mobile Sources.
Unit – V Solid Waste Management: 9
Characteristics of Solid Waste - Solid waste management decision alternatives - Integrated Solid Waste Management - Collection
Methods - Disposal by Municipal Solid Waste Landfill - Waste to Energy – Case study.
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
Mackenzie L. Davis & David A. Cornwell, “Introduction To Environmental Engineering”, 5 th Edition, The McGraw -Hill
1.
Series, 2013.
REFERENCES:
Gilbert M. Masters Wendell P. Ela , “Introduction to Environmental Engineering and Science” 3rd Edition, Pearson
1.
Education Limited, 2014.
J.Jeffrey Peirce, P.Aarne Vesilind, Ruth F.Weiner, “Environmental Pollution and Control”, 4 th Edition, Elsevier Science &
2.
Technology Books, 1997.
CO1 outline the fundamentals of pollution control and management Understanding (K2)
CO2 interpret the concepts of water pollution and control methods Understanding (K2)
CO3 summarize the methods of wastewater treatment and waste disposal Understanding (K2)
CO4 apply suitable method for air pollution management techniques Applying (K3)
CO5 identify various method for solid waste management techniques Applying (K3)

CO1 3 1 2 1 2 2
CO2 3 1 2 1 2 2
CO3 3 1 2 1 2 2
CO4 3 2 1 1 1 2 1 3 3
CO5 3 2 1 1 1 2 1 3 3

Total %
Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) %
CAT1 20 80 100
CAT2 20 80 100
CAT3 20 40 40 100
ESE 20 40 40 100

Kec R2022 Eie

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Kec R2022 Eie

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Kec R2022 Eie

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

KONGU ENGINEERING COLLEGE

(Autonomous Institution Affiliated to Anna University, Chennai)

REGULATIONS, CURRICULUM & SYLLABI – 2022

(CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM AND

(For the students admitted during 2022 - 2023 and onwards)

BACHELOR OF ENGINEERING DEGREE

DEPARTMENT OF ELECTRONICS AND

CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM AND OUTCOME BASED EDUCATION

BACHELOR OF ENGINEERING (BE) / BACHELOR OF TECHNOLOGY (BTech) DEGREE

1. DEFINITIONS AND NOMENCLATURE

In these Regulations, unless otherwise specified:

i. “University” means ANNA UNIVERSITY, Chennai.

ii. “College” means KONGU ENGINEERING COLLEGE.

iii. “Programme” means Bachelor of Engineering (BE) / Bachelor of Technology (BTech)

ix. “Principal” means Chairman, Academic Council of the College.

2. PROGRAMMES AND BRANCHES OF STUDY

3.1 First Semester Admission

Should have passed the Higher Secondary Examination of Vocational stream

x. Honours Degree Courses (HC)

4.2 Credit Assignment and Honours Degree

4.2.2 Honours Degree

5.1 A candidate is normally expected to complete the BE / BTech Degree programme in

7. ASSESSMENT AND EXAMINATION PROCEDURE FOR AWARDING MARKS

Sl. Continuous End Semester

2. Theory cum Practical (The distribution 50 50

5. Project Work II Phase I / Project 50 50

7.7 Project Work I / Industrial Training

If a candidate fails to secure 50 % of the continuous assessment marks in this course, he /

7.16 Mandatory Courses

9. REQUIREMENTS FOR APPEARING FOR END SEMESTER EXAMINATION

10. PROVISION FOR WITHDRAWAL FROM EXAMINATIONS

11. PROVISION FOR BREAK OF STUDY

12. PASSING REQUIREMENTS

13. REVALUATION OF ANSWER SCRIPTS

14. SUPPLEMENTARY EXAMINATION

Marks / Examination Status Letter Grade Grade Point

Based on the relative A (Very Good) 8

Less than 50 U (Reappearance) 0

The Grade Point Average (GPA) is calculated using the formula:

16. ELIGIBILITY FOR THE AWARD OF DEGREE

17.2 First Class:

17.5 Honors Degree:

18. MALPRACTICES IN TESTS AND EXAMINATIONS

Course Hours / Week Maximum Marks Cate

Course Hours / Week Maximum Marks Cate

Course Hours / Week Maximum Marks Cate

Course Hours / Week Maximum Marks Cate

Course Hours / Week Maximum Marks Cate

Course Hours / Week Maximum Marks Cate

Course Hours / Week Maximum Marks Cate

Course Hours / Week Maximum Marks Cate

Total Credits: 168

LIST OF PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVES (PEs)

1. 22EIE01 Biomedical Instrumentation 3 0 0 3 AI

2. 22EIE02 Embedded Systems 3 0 0 3 AE

3. 22EIE03 Instrumentation System Design 3 0 0 3 EEA

4. 22EIE04 Electronic Instrumentation 3 0 0 3 AI

5. 22EIE05 Industrial Electronics and Drives 3 0 0 3 CS

6. 22EIE06 Soft Computing Techniques 3 0 0 3 EEA